3$571$0( 5*+3$5712 0$7(5,$/ +($775($70(17 528*+0$66 ),1,6+0$66

  81,7&(57,),('     ;NJV>;OEV@
7
7 %$//9$/9()25,62/$7,21
5(029$%/( 2,/),/7(5 385&+$6(57(55$129$7(&+12/2*,(6,1&
6+$)7&29(5 &14(%0.1 385&+$6(25'(51R
+6,1%2$5' 385&+$6(25'(5'$7(
%($5,1*57' 6$325'(5180%(5 
1R5(48,5('3(5/,1(
5 +6287%2$5' 81,76,=(095&$6 5
%($5,1*57'
81,7),*85(1R
+66+$)7530
81,75$7,2



/66+$)7530
6(59,&(5$7,1*+3
3  6(59,&()$&725 3




86$%/( 2,/&$3$&,7<*$//216$3352;
/(1*7+
$3352;,0$7('5,9(:(,*+7 .*6>/%6@


1  )25$&&(6625,(65()(572&(57,),(''5$:,1*6 1
)25287/,1(5()(572':*

7$*&9

81,7+$63529,6,216)25
0 67$1'$5'&21',7,21021,725,1*3$&.$*(/(9(/
0




U V
Q
RX X
HL
U\ YLVH
LQJ XOW IXUQ SOH V FWXU
H GLW GIR DG
UH HG LQJ XID
'85$3/$7(

G LQD LVKH DVH

$;,$/+66+$)7)$1

VW
/(1*7+
86$%/(

VD XLU DZ Q
:,7+)25&('/8%(

LQW T GU PD


FR
/ &:527$7,21:+(19,(:,1*7+(+66+$)7 /



WK Z 7

DO
HF JH LWK LQJ 5,1
)/2:6:,7&+

QG HV GSU UHUHHVH LWK

LRQ
01$6%*09$:/

DQ Z HG 3
$  FH FK FH FH 5'
ILOH RQ \ DQ UR 2

DW G
DW DQ UG HS 5(&

D
,I FR DU '

V
DF H ),(

LSS UHV
: 57,

VK D\
R U


&(
. .

LQJ P
5


 
WH J Q
H[ D
G FK
DQ Q\
 
 
-
-
;;1($56,'(;)$56,'( 6($/('',367,&.
67,17%($5,1*57'
6

&:527$7,21
581/8%(38030,16



:+(1)$&,1*
$,50$;%5($7+(5 7+(/66 35,257267$5783$1'
7+528*+28723(5$7,212)
+ 5('8&(55()(572/8%( +
3803%8//(7,1 
2:1(560$18$/
.(< “ 3803 02725
[[PP “ 8+37&)5$0(
3++=9$&
P 7()&
* 2,/6,*+7*/$66 *









$17,)2$0%/2&.

0;+
>@0,1,080
) )
+66+$)7'(7$,/
6&$/(

+2/(6




2,/6$03/(3257
 7+58)25
( %2/76*5$'( (


680357'


25%(77(5
.(< “
[[PP “ +6$&&(/(520(7(5P$
P &7&02'(//33  
 
' '

 ;;1($56,'(;)$56,'(  >137@  
%& 67,17$&&(/(520(7(5P$ 2,/'5$,13/8*
;    
&7&02'(//33 >137@3/8*
%$//9$/9('5$,1 
      %$//9$/9()25,62/$7,21
&      &



[
0[+ 
  
6$33$5712

>137@3/8* 81/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
;
'(6,*1(5 %
% ',0(16,216$5(,10,//,0(7(56
5(;125',1'8675,(6//&
0;+ ',0(16,216,1%5$&.(76
>@

$5(,1,1&+(6 -6$'2:6., ZZZUH[QRUGFRP

>@0,1,080
(1*,1((5 d,/^KhDEdKEd/E^KE&/Ed/>ͬWZKWZ/dZz/E&KZDd/KEK&ZyEKZ/Eh^dZ/^͕>>͘

%'21$+2(
E/d,ZZ/WdEKZWK^^^^/KEd,ZK&KE&Z^EzKtEZ^,/W/EdZ^d/EZ/',ddK
ZWZKhKZh^͕KZ/^>K^/Et,K>KZ/EWZd͕Ez^h,/E&KZDd/KEt/d,Khd
/66+$)7'(7$,/ tZ/ddEhd,KZ/d/KE&ZKDZyEKZ/Eh^dZ/^͕>>͘/d/^^h:ddKZdhZEhWKEDE͘

  
d,^KDDK/d/^͕d,EK>K'z͕KZ^K&dtZZ^h:ddKd,hE/d^dd^
6&$/( 0)*385 yWKZdZ'h>d/KE^͘/sZ^/KEKEdZZzdKh͘^͘>tEKd,ZZ>sEdyWKZdKEdZK>^/^WZK,//d͘
; 7,7/( 81,7&(57,),('
  
$
  
'$7(
81,7 095& $

81,76$5()25+25,=217$/)/22502817,1* 6<0 &+.' '$7( 6&$/(  ':*12 5(9

 
6,0,/$572 6,=(
23(5$7,2181/(6663(&,),&$//<67$7('27+(5:,6(
62/,':25.6'5$:,1*  $ 6+((72)
'2127&+$1*(0$18$//<
                      
&/$66,),&$7,21 5(675,&7('
                              
  3$571$0( 5*+3$5712 0$7(5,$/ +($775($70(17 528*+0$66 ),1,6+0$66

  287/,1($66(0%/<     
7
7    
 027253/$7(   
385&+$6(57(55$129$7(&+12/2*,(6,1&
385&+$6(25'(51R



385&+$6(25'(5'$7(
6$325'(5180%(5 


1R5(48,5('3(5/,1(


5 5
$ 81,76,=(095&$6
81,7),*85(1R



+66+$)7530



81,75$7,2



/66+$)7530
$ $ 6(59,&(5$7,1*+3
3
6(59,&()$&725 3











2,/&$3$&,7<*$//216$3352;



$


$3352;,0$7('5,9(6<67(0:(,*+7 .*6>/%6@


$


1


)25$&&(6625,(65()(572&(57,),(''5$:,1*6
)2581,7&(57,),('5()(572':* 1

U V
Q
RX X
HL
/6&283/,1*

U\ YLVH
,167$//$1'23(5$7(25$1*(3((/352'8&76,1

LQJ XOW IXUQ SOH V FWXU

)$/.0&)

IR G
&21)250$1&(:,7+$33/,&$%/(/2&$/$1'1$7,21$/

UH HG LQJ XID

D
81,7+8%


G LQD LVKH DVH

VW
)851,6+(' ),77('%<5(;125' 6$)(7<&2'(6$1'3(525$1*(3((/,167$//$7,21$1'

VD XLU DZ Q
LQW T GU PD

FR
0

G
WK Z 7
0$,17(1$1&(0$18$/

DO
HF JH LWK LQJ 5,1
QG HV GSU UHUHHVH LWK
385&+$6(5+8%

LRQ
0

DQ Z HG 3
)851,6+('%<5(;125'

$  FH FK FH FH 5'

H GLW
7$*&9

ILOH RQ \ DQ UR 2
),77('%<385&+$6(5

DW G
DW DQ UG HS 5(&

D
,I FFR HDU ,('
/6&283/,1**8$5' 81,7+$63529,6,216)25

V

LSS UHV
)851,6+(' ),77('%<385&+$6(5
)

67$1'$5'&21',7,21021,725,1*3$&.$*(/(9(/
: 57,

VK D\


R U
&(

LQJ P
/ 5 
/
 
WH J
D

Q   

H[ D
G FK

   

DQ Q\



 &283/,1* 
 
  6+$)7*$3 *$3 
.
.

- 02725:(*)5$0( &:527$7,21  -

)851,6+('%<385&+$6(5 :+(1)$&,1* 






),77('%<5(;125' 7+(/66

+
+





0


6+,06

*





*









)



) )



;-$&.,1*%/2&.6









6:,1*%$6(



+2/(6 (
( >@',$7+58 +6&283/,1* ;/,)7,1*/8*3/$7(6



)25>@',$%2/76 )$/.7



*5$'(25%(77(5 )851,6+(' ),77('%<5(;125'
121$'-867$%/(
+6&283/,1**8$5' 72548($50
)$/.&)&*:3('(67$/
)851,6+(' ),77('%<5(;125'
' 



  5 '

 
 /2:63(('
  (1'9,(:
   
&    &
+,*+63(('
(1'9,(:



;
6$33$5712
$
81/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
% ',0(16,216$5(,10,//,0(7(56 '(6,*1(5 5(;125',1'8675,(6//& %
',0(16,216,1%5$&.(76
>@

$5(,1,1&+(6 -6$'2:6., ZZZUH[QRUGFRP

(1*,1((5 d,/^KhDEdKEd/E^KE&/Ed/>ͬWZKWZ/dZz/E&KZDd/KEK&ZyEKZ/Eh^dZ/^͕>>͘
',5(&7,212)527$7,215()(56727+(/66+$)7$69,(:(')5207+(0&)6,'(2)7+(81,7
%'21$+2(
E/d,ZZ/WdEKZWK^^^^/KEd,ZK&KE&Z^EzKtEZ^,/W/EdZ^d/EZ/',ddKZWZKh
KZh^͕KZ/^>K^/Et,K>KZ/EWZd͘Ez^h,/E&KZDd/KEt/d,KhdtZ/ddE
hd,KZ/d/KE&ZKDZyEKZ/Eh^dZ/^͕>>͘/d/^^h:ddKZdhZEhWKEDE͘d,^
0$;,080$//2:$%/(%5,'*(6/23(,6 +66+$)78372 +66+$)7'2:1,)$'',7,21$/%5,'*(6/23(,6    0)*385 KDDK/d/^͕d,EK>K'z͕KZ^K&dtZZ^h:ddKd,hE/d^dd^yWKZdZ'h>d/KE^͘
/sZ^/KEKEdZZzdKh͘^͘>tEKd,ZZ>sEdyWKZdKEdZK>^/^WZK,//d͘
5(48,5('/8%5,&$7,2102',),&$7,216:,//%(1(&(66$5< ;
   7,7/( 287/,1($66(0%/< $
$ 72548($503$576$5(6+,33('/226(72%(),77('%<385&+$6(5
$ -$6 
'$7(
81,7 095&

86(/,)7,1*/8*3/$7(+2/(6:,7+635($'(5%$5)25/,)7,1*(17,5($66(0%/< 6<0 &+.' '$7( 6,=( 6&$/(  ':*12 5(9

 $
6,0,/$572
62/,':25.6'5$:,1* $/
1RQ6WDQGDUG 6+((72)
'2127&+$1*(0$18$//<
                            

&/$66,),&$7,21 5(675,&7('
                        
  3$571$0( 5*+3$5712 0$7(5,$/ +($775($70(17 528*+0$66 ),1,6+0$66

  0&)&(57,),('$66(0%/<     
7
7
385&+$6(57(55$129$7(&+12/2*,(6
385&+$6(25'(51R
385&+$6(25'(5'$7(
6$325'(5180%(5 
1R5(48,5('3(5/,1(
727$/&283/,1*:(,*+7.*6>/%6@
5 727$/:5ò>/%,1ò@ 5

U V
Q
RX X
HL
U\ YLVH
LQJ XOW IXUQ SOH V FWXU
IR G
UH HG LQJ XID

 D
G LQD LVKH DVH

VW
VD XLU DZ Q
LQW T GU PD

FR
G
WK Z 7

DO
HF JH LWK LQJ 5,1
QG HV GSU UHUHHVH LWK

LRQ
5 DQ Z HG 3
3 3

$  FH FK FH FH 5'

H GLW
ILOH RQ \ DQ UR 2

DW G
DW DQ UG HS 5(&

D
,I FR DU '

V
DF H ),(

LSS UHV
: 57,

VK D\
R U
&(

LQJ P
WH J Q
1 1

H[ D
 

G FK 
 

DQ Q\


0 6+$)7*$3
$ 0

385&+$6(5+8%
/ 0$/(7<3( 81,7+8% /
)(0$/(7<3(

. .
6+$)76,=(P
%25(>@
.:<[-V
6+$)76,=(PP +8%:(,*+7.*6>/%6@
%25(>@
.:<[-V
+8%:(,*+7.*6>/%6@
-
-










+ +

* *

) [ )
81&%7+58
385&+$6(5+8%)25
-$&.,1*6&5(:6

( (

  $
 

'   '

 

6(&7,21$$ ;%2/76+(;+'
*5%&$670$
& >81&[@ &
;/2&.187+(;$//0(7$/
35(9$,/,1*72548(
6$33$5712
7,*+7(1)$67(1(56,1$67$5
&5,66&52663$77(51
7,*+7(1,1*72548(>/%)7@ 81/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
;
'(6,*1(5 %
% ',0(16,216$5(,10,//,0(7(56
5(;125',1'8675,(6//&
',0(16,216,1%5$&.(76
>@

$5(,1,1&+(6 -6$'2:6., ZZZUH[QRUGFRP

(1*,1((5
$//'5$:,1*6$5(3523(57<2)5(;125',1'8675,(6//&$1'0$<127%(5(352'8&('
%'21$+2( 87,/,=('25',6&/26(')25$1<385326((;&(37$6$87+25,=(',1:5,7,1*%<5(;125'
,1'8675,(6//&7+(6(&2002',7,(67(&+12/2*<2562)7:$5($5(68%-(&7727+(
81,7('67$7(6(;32575(*8/$7,216',9(56,21&2175$5<7286/$:$1'27+(5
   0)*385 5(/(9$17(;3257&21752/6,6352+,%,7(',7,668%-(&7725(78518321'(0$1'
; 7,7/( 0&)&(57,),('$66(0%/<
  
$
  
'$7(
81,7 0&) $

6<0 &+.' '$7( 6&$/(  ':*12 5(9

 
6,0,/$572 6,=(
62/,':25.6'5$:,1*  $ 6+((72)
'2127&+$1*(0$18$//<
                       ',675,%&2'(
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 1 of 26)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual provides detailed instructions on installation
and maintenance of parallel shaft Type VP and right angle
Type VR gear drives. Use the table of contents below to
locate required information.
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS
MANUAL FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE AND
TROUBLE-FREE SERVICE OF YOUR FALK GEAR DRIVE.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Shaft Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Lubrication Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Lubricant Selection Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lubricant Analysis and Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Stored and Inactive Gear Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Food Grade Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Food Grade Lubricant Selection Process . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lubricant Analysis and Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Stored and Inactive Gear Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
APPENDIX
Appendix A: Rod End Adj. Torque Arm Installation . . 18-19
Appendix B: Swing Base Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Appendix C: Alignment-Free Assembly & Installation 21-22
Appendix D: Electric Fan Installation & Maintenance 23-24
Appendix E: Thrust Plate & Fastener Usage . . . . . . . . . . 25
Appendix F: AirMax Plus Breather Installation ���������������26
INTRODUCTION
Credit for long service and dependable operation of a
gear drive is often given to the engineers who designed it,
or the craftsmen who constructed it, or the sales engineer
who recommended the type and size. Ultimate credit
belongs to the mechanic on the job who worked to make
the foundation rigid and level, who accurately aligned the
shafts and carefully installed the accessories, and who
made sure that the drive received regular lubrication. The
details of this important job are the subject of this manual.
NAMEPLATE — Operate Falk gear drives only at power,
speed and ratio shown on the nameplate. Before changing
any one of these, submit complete nameplate data and
new application conditions to Factory for correct oil level,
parts, and application approval.
LUBE PLATE — Refer to gear drive lube plate for basic
lubrication specifications. Lube plate will be mounted on
the drive near the nameplate.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY — Disassembly and
assembly instructions and parts guides are available from
Factory or Rexnord representatives. When requesting
information, please give complete data from the nameplate
on the gear drive: model, M.O. number, date, rpm, and ratio.
WARNING: Consult applicable local and national safety
codes for proper guarding of rotating members. Lock out
power source and remove all external loads from drive
before servicing drive or accessories.
WARRANTY
Rexnord Industries, LLC (the ”Company”) warrants
that Falk V-Class gear drives (I) conform to Company’s
published specifications, and (II) are free from defects of
material for three years from the date of shipment.
Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
• Owners Manual
Type VR
Type VP
Company does not warrant any non-Company branded
products or components (manufacturer’s warranty applies)
or any defects in damage to, or failure of products caused
by: (I) dynamic vibrations imposed by the drive system in
which such products are installed unless the nature of such
vibrations has been defined and accepted in writing by
Company as a condition of operation; (II) failure to provide
suitable installation environment; (III) use for purposes other
than those for which designed, or other abuse or misuse;
(IV) unauthorized attachments, modifications or disassembly,
or (V) mishandling during shipping.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The following instructions apply to standard Falk Type VP &
VR drives. If a drive is furnished with special features, refer
to the supplementary instructions shipped with the drive.
WELDING — Do not weld on the gear drive or accessories
without prior approval from the Factory. Welding on the
drive may cause distortion of the housing or damage to the
bearings and gear teeth. Welding without prior approval
could void the warranty.
NOTE: Drives equipped with accessories may require
removal of components to access lifting provisions and
install foundation fasteners.
EFFECTS OF SOLAR ENERGY — If the gear drive
operates in the sun at ambient temperatures over 38°C
(100°F), then special measures should be taken to protect
the drive from solar energy. This protection can consist
of a canopy over the drive or reflective paint on the drive.
If neither is possible, a heat exchanger or other cooling
device may be required to prevent the sump temperature
from exceeding the allowable maximum.
MOUNTING POSITION — Standard mounting positions
for types VP & VR are with the input and output shafts
horizontal.
Allowable mounting angles for standard oil levels are:
Bridge Slope
VP & VR ± 2° ± 4°
Consult Factory for other angles.
If a gear drive is ordered for non-standard mounting
positions, refer to the instructions provided with the drive
for oil levels and bearing lubrication. If it is necessary to
mount the gear drive in a different position from which
it was ordered, refer to Factory for required changes to
provide proper lubrication.
INVERTING DRIVE – Standard VP and VR drives are
equipped with lubrication provisions for horizontal
mounting with feet down (or Falk emblem up for drives
without feet). If the drive was ordered with the “Flip-ability”
package, the drive can be mounted in either orientation.
To flip VP drives without the “Flip-ability” package, the drive
must be disassembled to change hand of the shafting.
Removal of the top cover of housing must be performed by
Falk RENEW® Prager® in order to ensure that the original
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 2 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277
warranty is valid. Please contact Falk RENEW Prager for
lead time and pricing. To flip VR drives without the “Flip-
ability” package, remove the inspection cover and remove
the high-speed and low-speed oil collectors. Remove the
opposite inspection cover and reinstall the collectors in
the same orientation with respect to the gearing. Apply
Loctite® 242 or equivalent to the fasteners. Reinstall
inspection covers (top and bottom) with gasket.
For all drives, when flipping, the dipstick and breather (if
equipped) must be repositioned to the desired “top” of
drive. The dipstick must be located in the hole opposite the
low-speed gear. The square head magnetic drain plugs
must be repositioned to the desired “bottom” of drive.
When flipping a drive that was ordered with the flipability
option and accessories, it will be necessary to remove and
re-install any accessories in the new orientation. certain that all pads are supported to prevent distortion of
FOUNDATION, GENERAL —
To facilitate oil drainage,
elevate the gear drive
foundation above the
surrounding floor level. If
desired, replace the drive oil
drain plug with a valve, but
provide a guard to protect the valve from accidental opening
or breakage. When an outboard bearing is used, mount drive
and outboard bearing on a continuous foundation or bedplate,
and dowel both in place.
FOUNDATION, STEEL —
When mounting gear
drive on structural steel,
it is recommended
that an engineered
design be utilized for
a pedestal, adapter
base or bed to provide
sufficient rigidity, and to Continuous Plate
prevent induced loads
from distorting the housing and causing gear misalignment.
In the absence of an engineered design, it is recommended
that a base plate, with thickness equal to or greater than
the thickness of the drive feet, be securely bolted to steel
supports and extend under the entire drive as illustrated.
FOUNDATION, CONCRETE —
If a concrete foundation is
used, allow the concrete
to set firmly before bolting
down the gear drive. For the
best type of mounting, grout
structural steel mounting pads into the mounting base, as
illustrated, rather than grouting the drive directly into the
concrete.
Motors and other components mounted on motor plates or
motor brackets may become misaligned during shipment.
ALWAYS check alignment after installation. Refer to Page 6
for coupling alignment instructions.
GEAR DRIVE ALIGNMENT
FOOT-MOUNTED DRIVES — Align drive with driven
equipment by placing broad, flat shims under feet at
all foundation fastener locations. Jack screw holes are
provided by mounting feet to facilitate alignment. See
Table 9, Page 9 for fastener and wrench sizes. Start at the
178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
DIPSTICK/VENT
LIFTING HOLES
1 PER CORNER
(8 TOTAL)
DRAIN PLUG
(ALSO ON
LOW-SPEED
END)
JACKING
SCREW HOLES
low-speed shaft end and level across the length and then
the width of the drive. Check with a feeler gauge to make
housing when drive is bolted down. After drive is aligned
with driven equipment and bolted down, align prime mover
to drive input shaft. Refer to Page 6 for coupling alignment.
If equipment is received from the Factory mounted on
a bedplate, the components were accurately aligned at
the Factory with the bedplate mounted on a large, flat
assembly plate. Shim under the bedplate foot pads until
the gear drive is level and all feet are in the same plane.
LEVELING
REFERENCE
SURFACES
SHIMS
Check high-speed shaft coupling alignment. If the
coupling is misaligned, the bedplate is shimmed
incorrectly. Reshim bedplate and recheck high-speed
coupling alignment. If necessary, realign motor.
SHAFT-MOUNTED DRIVES — GENERAL
Shaft-mounted drives should never be mounted in a
manner that restricts the natural movement of the drive.
They must be allowed to move freely with the shaft on
which it is mounted. Shaft-mounted drives should always
be used in conjunction with a torque reaction arm. Refer to
appendix A for torque reaction arm mounting instructions
and angular limits. The drive may require repositioning on
the driven shaft after initial installation to accommodate
the location of the foundation anchor and be within limits
specified in appendix A (rod end adjustable torque arm).
The tapered bore hollow shaft is designed for use with
a TA Taper® bushing for mounting the drive on a driven
shaft with a straight outside diameter. The taper bushing
assembly is supplied with a thrust plate kit and retention
fastener as standard (usage is required) shaft cover must
be removed to install thrust plate kit. Refer to data sheet
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Owners Manual
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 3 of 26)

supplied with the tapered bushing assembly for driven

shaft length, shaft keyway length and driven shaft tapped
hole dimensions for thrust plate retention fastener
Prior to installing the drive, it is a good idea to check A
the driven shaft for proper dimensions. Using Table
1 or 1A, find the driven shaft size for the application.
Verify that dimensions A and B are within the allowable
range. When dimensions are verified, proceed with the
installation. The minimum and maximum driven shaft B
engagements, dimension N in Figure 1, are shown in
Table 2. The minimum engagement is necessary for full Table 1A — Driven Shaft Dimensions –
bushing engagement, and the maximum (and specified) Inches
engagement is provided for use when the thrust plate kit is Shaft Diameter
used for added retention capacity and an auxiliary removal Drive A B
AGMA 6109
aid (bushing nut normally used for both). Size
Nominal + - Min Max Min Max
3.4375 0.0 0.006 3.8580 3.8770 3.4315 3.4375
KEEP CLOSE M107 3.4875 0.0 0.006 3.7331 3.7521 3.1815 3.1875
N 2.9375 0.0 0.006 3.6081 3.6271 2.9315 2.9375
KEEP CLOSE
4.1875 0.0 0.007 4.6278 4.6478 4.1805 4.1875
BUSHING NUT M117 3.9375 0.0 0.006 4.5028 4.5218 3.9315 3.9375
3.4375 0.0 0.006 4.2528 4.2718 3.4315 3.4375
DRIVEN SHAFT
4.4375 0.0 0.007 5.1450 5.1650 4.4305 4.4375
THRUST
PLATE M127 4.1875 0.0 0.007 5.0200 5.0400 4.1805 4.1875
BORE BEARING 3.9375 0.0 0.006 4.8950 4.9140 3.9315 3.9375
SUPPORT M133 4.9375 0.0 0.007 5.5920 5.6120 4.9305 4.9375
INPUT M137 4.4375 0.0 0.007 5.3420 5.3620 4.4305 4.4375
SHAFT 5.9375 0.0 0.007 6.4855 6.5055 5.9305 5.9375
M143
SHEAVE M145 5.4375 0.0 0.007 6.2349 6.2549 5.4305 5.4375
M147 4.9375 0.0 0.007 5.9856 6.0056 4.9305 4.9375
M153 6.5000 0.0 0.008 7.1590 7.1800 6.4920 6.5000
M155 6.0000 0.0 0.007 6.9106 6.9306 5.9930 6.0000
M157 5.9375 0.0 0.007 6.8794 6.8994 5.9305 5.9375
Figure 1 7.0000 0.0 0.008 7.8045 7.8255 6.9920 7.0000
M163 6.9375 0.0 0.008 7.7725 7.7935 6.9295 6.9375
M165 6.5000 0.0 0.008 7.5539 7.5749 6.4920 6.5000
Table 1 — Driven Shaft Dimensions – M167 6.0000 0.0 0.007 7.3055 7.3255 5.9930 6.0000
Millimeters 5.9375 0.0 0.007 7.2743 7.2943 5.9305 5.9375
M173
Shaft Diameter M175 8.000 0.0 0.008 9.2224 9.2434 7.9920 8.000
Drive A B M177 7.500 0.0 0.008 8.8478 8.8688 7.4920 7.500
Tolerance h10
Size 8.000 0.0 0.008 9.2224 9.2434 7.9920 8.000
Nom. + - Min Max Min Max M187 7.500 0.0 0.008 8.8478 8.8688 7.4920 7.500
90 0.0 0.140 99.314 99.774 89.860 90.000
85 0.0 0.140 96.814 97.274 84.860 85.000
M107
80 0.0 0.120 94.334 94.774 79.880 80.000 Table 2 — N Dimension †
75 0.0 0.120 91.834 92.274 74.880 75.000
100 0.0 0.140 114.362 114.812 99.860 100.000 Minimum Maximum
Drive Size
M117 95 0.0 0.140 111.862 112.312 94.860 95.000 mm (inches) mm (inches)
90 0.0 0.140 96.550 97.000 89.860 90.000 M107 285 (11.2) 340 (13.4)
120 0.0 0.140 134.334 134.784 119.860 120.000
M127 115 0.0 0.140 131.834 132.284 114.860 115.000 M117 300 (11.8) 390 (15.4)
110 0.0 0.140 129.334 129.784 109.860 110.000 M127 310 (12.2) 410(15.7)
135 0.0 0.160 146.674 147.264 134.840 135.000 M133, M137 330 (13.0) 450 (17.7)
M133 130 0.0 0.160 144.314 144.784 129.840 130.000 M143, M145, M147 340 (13.4) 435 (17.1)
M137 125 0.0 0.160 141.814 142.284 124.840 125.000
M153, M155, M157 380 (15.0) 515 (20.3)
120 0.0 0.160 139.334 139.784 119.860 120.000
M143 150 0.0 0.160 164.193 164.773 149.840 150.000 M163, M165, M167 395 (15.6) 545 (21.5)
M145 140 0.0 0.160 159.193 159.773 139.840 140.000 M173, M175, M177 423 (16.78) 425 (16.84)
M147 130 0.0 0.160 154.293 154.773 129.840 130.000 M187 423 (16.78) 425 (16.84)
M153 170 0.0 0.160 184.173 184.763 169.840 170.000
†† The minimum engagement is necessary for full bushing engagement;
M155 160 0.0 0.160 179.113 179.733 159.840 160.000 the maximum engagement is only if a thrust plate will be employed to
M157 150 0.0 0.160 174.113 174.733 149.840 150.000 remove the drive from the driven shaft. Shaft engagements include 5 mm
185 0.0 0.185 201.698 202.303 184.815 185.000 (.20 inch) clearance at the bushing nut.
M163 175 0.0 0.160 196.720 197.303 174.840 175.000
M165
M167 170 0.0 0.160 194.223 194.803 169.840 170.000 TAPER BUSHING — With the driven shaft keyway at the
160 0.0 0.160 189.223 189.803 159.840 160.000 12 o’clock position, slide bushing assembly onto the driven
M173 shaft, nut end first, and position the keyway slot over the
M175 200 0.0 0.185 226.087 226.732 199.815 200.000
M177 190 0.0 0.185 221.087 221.732 189.815 190.000 shaft keyway. The bushing may have to be opened slightly
200 0.0 0.185 226.087 226.732 199.815 200.000 to assist in installation. Insert a prybar into the slot in
M187 the bushing and very lightly pry open until the bushing
190 0.0 0.185 221.087 221.732 189.815 190.000

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 4 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277

slides onto the shaft. Insert the drive key furnished with Table 3A — Equivalent Tightening Torque †
the bushing into the shaft keyway. On drives using the
thrust plate kit, slide the bushing assembly onto the driven Drive Required Torque Person's Weight Length of Handle
shaft until final position (end of driven shaft open-ended Size Nm (lb-ft) kg (lbs) mm (ft)
keyway).
M107 380 (280) 80-100 (180-220) 460-610 (1.5-2)
INSTALLATION OF SHAFT-MOUNTED DRIVES — M117 450 (332) 80-100 (180-220) 610-915 (2-3)
TA BUSHING TYPE, SIZES M107 – M167 M127 450 (332) 80-100 (180-220) 610-915 (2-3)
M133, M137 520 (384) 80-100 (180-220) 610-915 (2-3)
1. Remove the hollow low-speed shaft cover. Before lifting
M143, M145, M147 630 (465) 80-100 (180-220) 915-1220 (3-4)
the drive into position, rotate the high-speed shaft until
M153, M155, M157 770 (568) 80-100 (180-220) 915-1220 (3-4)
the hollow shaft keyway will be in position to line up with
the driven shaft key. M163, M165, M167 900 (664) 80-100 (180-220) 1220-1525 (4-5)
†† If a torque wrench is not available, the torque can be approximated by
2. Lift the drive into position and slide onto the driven applying the given weight at the given distance from the nut.
shaft, taking care that the driven shaft key seats into the
hollow shaft keyway. DO NOT hammer or use excessive b. Optional TA Bushing Nut Tightening — When the
force. required tightening torque of the TA bushing nut
3. Thread the bushing nut onto the hollow shaft one to cannot be measured at the low-speed shaft, the
two turns. NOTE: The bushing nut threads have been torque-multiplying characteristic of the drive can be
coated with an anti-seize compound at the Factory. This utilized. Rotating the high-speed shaft of the drive
compound should not be removed. Before re-installing while holding the TA bushing nut stationary will allow
a previously used nut, recoat the nut threads only with a large torque to be reached. Fix the TA bushing nut
an anti-seize compound. by securing a spanner, chain or pipe wrench to the
WARNING: DO NOT apply anti-seize or lubricant nut. Allow the wrench to contact a surface that will
to bushing or shaft surfaces. Use of anti-seize may hold the force when tightening.
prevent secure connection of the drive to the shaft and WARNING: Make sure the wrench will not slip and
cause the drive to move cause damage or injury.
See Table 9 for nut setscrew and wrench sizes. Determine the proper rotation of the high-speed shaft
a. Preferred Method — Use a spanner, chain or pipe to achieve tightening of the stationary nut. If the drive
wrench to tighten the bushing nut to the torque value is equipped with a backstop, verify that the backstop
indicated in Table 3. If the required torque cannot will allow the necessary rotation or remove the
be measured, an approximation can be made using backstop. Find the torque to apply to the high-speed
Table 3A. The full weight should be applied to the shaft by dividing the tightening torque indicated in
wrench handle in a horizontal position. For example, Table 3 by the drive’s ratio (torque ÷ ratio). Apply the
to achieve the required tightening torque for an calculated torque to the high-speed shaft or coupling
M163 bushing nut, an 85 kg person would have to using a spanner, chain or pipe wrench. Be careful not
apply all of his/her weight to a wrench handle to damage the usable length of the high-speed shaft.
1070 mm from the nut (a 190 lb. person would have Remove the fixed wrench from the TA Bushing nut
to apply all his/her weight to a wrench handle 3.5 and reassemble the backstop if necessary.
feet from the nut). Apply Loctite 243 or equivalent WARNING: Never use the prime mover to produce
to threads of the setscrew. Tighten the setscrew to the required torque. This could result in severe
10 Nm (90 lb-in). For drives subjected to vibratory personal injury or damage.
conditions, refer to step c. Apply Loctite 243 or equivalent to threads of
setscrew. Tighten the setscrew to 10 Nm (90 lb-in)
Table 3 — Wrench Type and Bushing Nut on the bushing nut. For drives subjected to vibratory
Tightening Torque conditions, refer to step c.
c. Drives Subjected to Vibratory Conditions — Extra
Wrenches Nut
Drive Tightening Torque
precautions should be taken for drives subjected
Size Armstrong
Tools Williams Nm (lb-ft) to vibratory conditions. With the nut of the TA
M107 bushing tightened to the specified torque, locate the
34-313 474B 380 (280)
setscrew hole in the nut of the bushing assembly.
M117 34-313 474B 450 (332) Using a 6 mm (15/64 inch) diameter drill, create
M127 34-313 474B 450 (332) a dimple in the outside diameter of the bushing
M133, M137 73-237 H CT-15-2 H 520 (384) flange by drilling through the setscrew hole in the
M143, M145, M147 73-237 H CT-15-2 H 630 (465) nut. Apply Loctite 243 or equivalent to threads of
M153, M155, M157 73-237 H CT-15-2 H 770 (568) setscrew and tighten into bushing nut.
M163, M165, M167 73-237 H CT-15-2 H 900 (664) 4. Thrust Plate Installation — Install thrust plate and thrust
H These are chain wrenches where standard spanner wrenches are not plate retaining ring in hollow shaft. Coat four to five
available.
engaging threads of retention fastener with Loctite
242 or equivalent (medium strength) thread locking
compound and thread into driven shaft end. Tighten
fastener to 80% of torque shown in table 4 or 4A.
Reinstall shaft cover.

178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 5 of 26)
REMOVAL OF SHAFT-MOUNTED DRIVES —
TA BUSHING TYPE, SIZES M107 – M167
WARNING: Lock out power source and remove all external
loads from drive before servicing drive or accessories.
1. Drain the lubricant from the drive.
2. Remove safety guards and belts (if so equipped).
Remove hollow shaft cover opposite bushing nut.
3. Remove motor and motor mount (if so equipped).
4. Remove backstop (if so equipped).
WARNING: Drive must be supported during removal
process. Use a sling and take up the slack before
proceeding.
5. Remove the setscrew(s) on the bushing nut which is
located at the output end of the hollow shaft. Remove
the driven shaft retention fastener from the thrust plate.
6. Use a spanner, pipe or chain wrench to loosen
the bushing nut. Initially the nut will freely rotate
counterclockwise approximately 180° as the nut moves
from the locked position to the removal position. At this
point, anticipate resistance which indicates unseating
of the bushing. Continue to rotate the nut until it is free
from the hollow shaft. If unable to release the drive
from the driven shaft with the bushing nut, the thrust
plate kit using a backing bolt (threaded into the driven
shaft tapped hole) and removal bolt (threaded into
the thrust plate tapped hole) may be used to release
the drive from the driven shaft. Refer to Appendix E
for backing and removal bolt sizes (user supplied).
To use, remove thrust plate retaining ring and thrust
plate, install backing bolt, and reinstall thrust plate with
retaining ring. Remove bushing nut retaining ring. Install
removal bolt in thrust plate and tighten against backing
bolt to release drive from driven shaft (insert key stock
or similar tool in thrust plate key slot to engage hollow
shaft keyway to prevent thrust plate rotation while
tightening removal bolt).
7. Prepare drive for lifting by disconnecting the torque
arm.
8. Slide the drive from the bushing. The bushing can be
left in place or removed as required. If bushing will not
slide off the shaft, insert a small prybar into the split of
the bushing and pry the split open slightly to loosen the
bushing and remove from the shaft.
TAPER BUSHING — SIZES M173 – M187
Driven shafts are retained on sizes M173 thru M187 drives
with a thrust plate and three cap screw arrangement. With
the driven shaft keyway at the 12 o’clock position, slide
bushing onto the driven shaft, flange end first, and position
the keyway slot over the shaft keyway. The bushing may
have to be opened slightly to assist in installation. Insert a
prybar into the slot in the bushing and very lightly pry open
until the bushing slides onto the shaft. Insert the drive key
furnished with the bushing into the shaft keyway.
INSTALLATION OF SHAFT-MOUNTED
DRIVES SIZES M173 – M187
1. Before lifting the drive into position, rotate the high-
speed shaft until the hollow shaft keyway will be in
position to line-up with the driven shaft key.
Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
• Owners Manual
2. Lift the drive into position and slide onto the drive shaft,
taking care that the driven shaft key seats into the
hollow shaft keyway. DO NOT hammer or use excessive
force.
3. Align three holes in hollow shaft thrust plate with tapped
holes in end of driven shaft. Coat four to five engaging
threads of retention fasteners with Loctite #222 or
equivalent (low strength) thread locking compound.
Insert fasteners through thrust plate and engage
tapped holes in driven shaft one to two turns by hand to
ensure that fasteners are not cross-threaded.
4. Tighten fasteners to the torque values (±10%) listed
below:
M24 x 3 – 640 Nm (470 lb-ft) for metric-based bushing
bores.
1.250-7UNC – 1400 Nm (1060 lb-ft) for inch-based
bushing bores.
5. Re-install low-speed shaft cover.
REMOVAL OF SHAFT-MOUNTED DRIVES
SIZES M173 – M187
1. Remove low-speed shaft cover.
2. Remove three thrust plate fasteners, retaining ring and
thrust plate from the hollow shaft.
3. Select the backing bolts from Appendix E and install
them into the three threaded holes in the end of the
driven shaft. The head of the backing bolts provides a
working surface for the removal bolts.
4. Re-insert the thrust plate and retaining ring into the
hollow shaft and select the removal bolts from Appendix
E.
5. Thread three removal bolts into the thrust plate until they
contact the backing bolt heads.
6. Tighten the removal bolts equally in stages to the
torque indicated in Appendix E, after torquing the bolts,
as instructed, strike the bolts sharply with a hammer
and re-torque the bolts if separation of the drive from
the driven shaft did not occur. Repeat this procedure,
re-torquing the bolts after each blow, until separation
occurs.
7. Prepare drive for lifting by disconnecting the torque
arm.
8. Slide the drive from the bushing. The bushing can be
left in place or removed as required. If bushing will not
slide off the shaft, insert a small prybar into the split of
the bushing and pry the split open slightly to loosen the
bushing and remove from the shaft.
SHAFT-MOUNTED DRIVE — SHRINK DISC
SIZES M127 – M227
For installation and removal of shaft mounted drives with
a Shrink Disc connection, refer to Manual 168-850 (Shrink
Disc Installation and Maintenance Instructions).
 take-offs as close to the gear drive
housing as possible to avoid undue bearing load and shaft
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed deflection. Gear Drives
Align the output shaft of the gear drive square and parallel
(Page 6 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107
withthru M277shaft by placing a straightedge across the face
the driven
of the sprockets or sheaves as illustrated.Check horizontal
shaft alignment by placing one leg
SHAFT CONNECTIONS ofhorizontal
a square against the face by
shaft alignment RIGHT WRONG
ofplacing
the sheave
one or
legsprocket
of a with
square
WARNING: Provide suitable guards in accordance with the spirit level on the
local and national standards. against the face of the sheave or
horizontal
sprocket leg withofthe
thespirit
square.
level on
COUPLING CONNECTIONS — the horizontal leg of the square.
The performance and life of any coupling depends largely
upon how well the coupling is installed and serviced. GEAR DRIVE WALL
Refer to the coupling manufacturer’s manual for specific
instructions.
CORRECT METHOD
Heat interference fitted hubs,
Installation and Maintenance
pinions, sprockets • Falk™toEnclosed
or pulleys a Gear Drives LEVEL
maximum of 135°C (275°F) and
SQUARE AND
(Page 4 of 11) slide onto gear drive
Sizesshaft.
305 thru 585 • Type APARALLEL
Series
See manual 138-050
for proper location.
INCORRECT METHOD DO NOT over tighten belts or chains. Adjust chains to
FALK ™FLUID COUPLINGS DO NOT — Refer
drive to the installation
coupling hub, DO NOT over
manufacturers’ tighten beltsAdjust
specifications. or chains.
belts Adjust chains to
as follows:
manual furnished with the Falk fluid coupling
pinion, sprocket or pulley onto for installation manufacturers’
138-050 specifications. Adjust belts as follows:
and startup instructions. the shaft. An endwise blow on The ideal tension is the lowest tension at which the belt will Rexnord Indust
The ideal tension is the lowest tension
not slip under peak load conditions. Check the belt tension
January 2010 at which the belt will not
– CAUTION
Type ABRC – — The Alignment the shaft/coupling
Free flange motor may damage slip under
adapter has Supersedes
frequently peak
during
11-09 theload
first conditions.
24 to 48 hours Check the belt
of run-in tension
operation.
DOtwoNOT side inspection openings. gears On andsolidbearings.
shaft gear drives, the
HAMMER Overfrequently
tighteningduring the first 24
belts shortens belttoand
48 hours
bearing of life.
run-inKeepoperation.
belts
opening opposite the low speed shaft extension has been freeOver tightening
from foreign belts which
material shortens may belt and slippage.
cause bearing life. Keep belts
Inspect
marked to indicate the vertical midpoint of the adapter. On free periodically;
the belt from foreigntighten
material thewhich
belts may
if theycause slippage. Inspect
are slipping.
FALK COUPLINGS — (except fluid type) Detailed
hollow shaft gear drives, the opening on the shrink disk side of the V–belt periodically; tighten the belts if they are slipping.
installation manuals are available from Factory, your local
the gear drive has been marked to indicate the vertical
Rexnord representative or distributor—just provide size Table 4 — Tightening
OUTBOARD BEARING —Torques: ± 5% bearing and
Mount the outboard
midpoint of the adapter. These marks are used to establish the gear drive DO
on a NOT
commonLubricate Fasteners
foundation so that they will shift as
and type designations stamped on the coupling. For
proper fill angle for the fluid coupling. an assemblyMetric if settling
Fastenersshould occur.Class
– Property Bring8.8 the outboard
lubricant requirements and a list of typical lubricants
The fluid
meeting coupling
Rexnord outside diameter
specifications, refer has been marked with two
to appropriate bearing to the correct
Fastener Metal to horizontal
Metal position with
Metal to broad
Concrete flat shims
separate
coupling matchmanual.
service marks. The recommended fill can be obtained under
Size the mounting Nm pad. Align
lb-ft accurately Nm so that the lb-ftload is
by lining up the correct match mark on the fluid coupling with equally divided3 between the2 two drive bearings
M4 x .7 2
and1.5 the
FALK theFLANGED-TYPE
mark in the inspection RIGID COUPLINGS
opening and filling — Forthe fluid M5outboard
x .8 bearing.
6 Mount a5stop bar against 5 the pillow
3.5 block
installation
couplingand untilremoval of shaft
fluid appears mounted
at the lip of the drives withToa determine
fill hole. Falk M6foot
x 1.0on the load 10 side when 8large horizontal 8 6
load components
flanged-type
the correctrigidmarkcoupling
on the fluidconnection,
coupling begin refer by to aligning
Manual the fill M8are
x 1.25
exerted on24the pillow block. 18 19 14
458-864 (FalktheRigid Moment
mark inCouplings Installation
opening.and M10 x 1.5 50
hole with
Maintenance).
match the inspection For fill PINION
M12 x 1.75
MOUNTING
84
— 36 Mount pinion39
62 68
as close to 29 the drive
50
angles less than 90°, rotate the fill plug upward till the match asx possible to 210
avoid undue156 bearing load
M16 2 170and shaft deflection.
126
FALK marksFLUID COUPLINGS
line up. For fill angles— greater
Refer to the90°,
than installation
rotate the fill plug M20 x 2.5to Factory
Refer 415for pinion 305 330
alignment instructions. 246
manual
downwardfurnished
till thewith themarks
match Falk fluid
line up.coupling for installation M24 x 3 705 530 570 420
andGAP startupAND instructions.
ANGULARFor Alignment-Free
ALIGNMENT Drives, refer
— If possible, afterto
Non Falk™1440
M30 x 3.5
Couplings 1060
— Refer to manufacturer’s
1150 850
Appendix
mounting C. coupling hubs, position the driving and driven installation
M36 x4 and
2520 maintenance 1860 instructions.
2030 1500
M42 x 4.5 4050 3000damage to 3250 2400
GAP AND ANGULAR
equipment so that the ALIGNMENT
distance between — shaft ends is equal to BACKSTOPS
M48 x 5
— To prevent
6100 4500
backstops due
4880 3600
to
Afterthemounting
coupling coupling
gap. Alignhubs, position
the shafts incorrect
M56 x 5.5 motor shaft
9850 rotation 7300at start up, couplings
7860 are NOT
5800
the bydriving
placing and a driven
spacer equipment
block, equalso in assembled when gear drives are furnished with backstops for all
thatthickness
the distance between
to required gap, shaft ends
between Table
types4A — ABRC.
except TighteningFor type ABRC Torques:
drives, remove± 5% the backstop
is equal to theas
hub faces, coupling
shown atgap.right,Align
and before electrically
DO connecting
NOT Lubricate the motor. AB, ABR, and ABRC
Fasteners
the also
shafts at by
90°placing
intervalsa around
spacerthe block, backstops are heldInch in place by a retaining ring on the intermediate
Fasteners – Grade 5
equalhub. in Check
thickness withtofeelers.
required gap, shaft.
Fastener Metal to Metal Metal to Concrete
between
OFFSET hubALIGNMENT
faces, as shown — Align at right, Steelflex Illustrated After
Size completing Nm electricallb-ft connections,Nm check motor lb-ftand gear
anddriving
also atand 90°driven
intervals around
shafts so thatthe a Steelflex Illustrated drive shaft rotations. If rotations are correct, complete
.250-20 10 7 8 6
hub.straight
Checkedge with will
feelers.
rest squarely on alignment and21assembly of15coupling or 16
.3125-18 re-install the12backstop.
OFFSET ALIGNMENT
both couplings hubs — as Align
showndriving
to .375-16 37 27 30 22
andthe driven
rightshafts
and also so that a straight
at 90° intervals. edge .500-13 91 67 73 54
will Tighten
rest squarely
foundationon both coupling
bolts of the hubs .625-11 184 134 146 108
.750-10 330 242 265 194
as shown
connected to the right and and
equipment also recheck
at 90° .875-9 530 395 425 315
intervals.
alignment Tighten
andfoundation
gap. bolts of 1.000-8 800 590 640 475
the SPROCKETS,
connected equipment PULLEYSand ORrecheck 1.125-7 1000 740 800 590
Steelflex Illustrated
alignment
SHEAVES and— gap.Mount power 1.250-7 1420 1060 1140 840
1.375-6 1860 1360 1480 1100
SPROCKETS,
take-offs as PULLEYSclose to the OR SHEAVES
gear drive — Mount power 1.500-6 2480 1840 1980 1460
take-offs
housing as as
close to thetogear
possible avoid drive
undue housingbearingas possible
load andtoshaft 1.750-5 5300 3900 4240 2700
avoid undue bearing load and shaft deflection.
deflection. 2.000-4.5 7900 5900 6300 4100
Align thethe
Align output
output shaft of of
shaft thethegear
geardrivedrivesquare
squareand andparallel
parallel 2.250-4.5 11800 8600 9400 6000
2.500-4 16000 11800 12800 8300
withwith
the thedriven
drivenshaft byby
shaft placing
placinga astraightedge
straightedge across across the face 2.750-4 19800 14600 15800 10200
the offace
theofsprockets
the sprockets or sheaves
or sheaves as illustrated.
as illustrated.Check Check
horizontal 3.000-4 26400 19400 21100 13600
shaft alignment by placing one leg
of a square against the face RIGHT WRONG
of the sheave or sprocket with
178-052
the spirit level on the Rexnord
August 2016 leg of the square.
horizontal 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 7 of 26)
OUTBOARD BEARING — Mount the outboard bearing
and gear drive on a common foundation so that they
will shift as an assembly if settling should occur. Bring
the outboard bearing to the correct horizontal position
with broad flat shims under the mounting pad. Accurate
alignment is required to avoid inducing loads on drive
bearings due to misalignment. Mount a stop bar against
the pillow block foot on the load side when large horizontal
load components are exerted on the pillow block.
PINION MOUNTING — Mount pinion as close to the
drive as possible to avoid undue bearing load and shaft
deflection. Refer to the Factory for pinion alignment
instructions.
NON-FALK COUPLINGS — Refer to manufacturers’
installation and maintenance instructions.
BACKSTOPS — To prevent damage to backstops due
to incorrect motor shaft rotation at start up, couplings
are NOT assembled when gear drives are furnished
with backstops. After completing electrical connections,
check motor and gear drive shaft rotations. If rotations are
correct, complete alignment and assembly of coupling.
FASTENER TIGHTENING TORQUES
Use the tightening torque values specified in Table 4 and
4A for fastening Falk gear drives, motors and accessories to
their mounting surfaces with un-lubricated fasteners. DO NOT
use these values for “torque locking” fasteners or for fastening
components with aluminum feet, soft gaskets, or vibration
dampeners on the mounting surface. If the tightening torque
exceeds the capacity of the torque wrench, use a torque
multiplier. Use ISO property class 8.8 for metric fasteners. See
Table 9 for fastener and wrench sizes.
FAN COOLING
RADIAL SHAFT FANS — Standard horizontal shaft-type
M107–M227 VP drives have radial shaft fans when required
for cooling. Radial fans function in either rotation of the
drive. The fan is a split design that can be removed without
disturbing other equipment or components connected to
the shaft. The fan hub is not removable without removing
other equipment. If fan hub is removed or repositioned,
remove and clean fasteners and setscrew. Apply Loctite
#242 threadlocker or equivalent to fasteners, setscrew and
tapped setscrew hole in hub before reinstalling. Caution:
Do NOT over tighten fasteners securing plastic fan to hub.
AXIAL SHAFT FANS — Standard horizontal shaft type
M107–M227 VR and all M237–M277 drives have axial
shaft fans when required for cooling. Axial shaft fans are
rotation-dependent and will only function in the rotation
indicated by arrow. If the opposite rotation is required,
the fan must be changed to one of the desired rotation
(consult factory for opposite rotation fan). The fan is a
split design that can be removed without disturbing other
equipment or components connected to the shaft. The fan
hub is not removable without removing other equipment;
both rotation fans use the same hub. If fan hub is removed
or repositioned, remove and clean fasteners and setscrew.
Apply Loctite #242 threadlocker or equivalent to fasteners,
setscrew and tapped setscrew hole in hub before
reinstalling.
Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
• Owners Manual
Radial and axial shaft fans require unimpeded airflow to
operate. Maintain a minimum of 25 mm (1.0”) clearance
between fan shroud and the closest obstruction (coupling
guard, etc.) for optimal performance.
INTEGRAL COOLING
DURAPLATE™ COOLER — Standard horizontal shaft-type
VP and VR drives have DuraPlate coolers when required
for cooling. No electricity or external water is required for
cooling. The system consists of a radial fan, shaft-driven
oil pump and cooling plates. The entire system functions
in either rotation of the drive. The M107–M227 VP and all
M237–M277 fan and shrouds are a split design that can be
removed without disturbing other equipment or components
connected to the shaft. The M107–M227 VR fan and shroud
are not a split design. If fan hub is removed or repositioned,
remove and clean fasteners and setscrew. Apply Loctite
#242 threadlocker or equivalent to fasteners, setscrew
and tapped setscrew hole in hub before reinstalling. The
system is also equipped with a combination pressure relief/
thermal bypass valve. Pressure relief limits of the valve are
586 kPa (85 psi) and thermal bypass temperature of 60°C
(140°F). See Oil Pump sections under Lubrication and Oil
Levels for additional information. Duraplate coolers require
unimpeded airflow to operate. Maintain a minimum of 25
mm (1.0”) clearance between fan shroud and the closet
obstruction (coupling guard, etc.) for optimal performance.
WATER COOLING
WATER COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS — Install a shut-
off or control valve in the water line to the heat exchanger
to regulate the water flow through the exchanger. Also
install a water flow gauge between the control valve and
the exchanger to determine actual flow rate. Discharge
water to an OPEN DRAIN to prevent back pressure.
AIR VENTS
All drives must be equipped with an air vent or expansion
chamber for operation. Drives are shipped sealed and
require vent/breather installation. The standard vent
is integral with the dipstick and is maintenance-free.
The drive may be equipped with an optional premium
desiccant vent/breather. See Appendix F for installation
and maintenance instructions. Other vent/breather/
expansion chamber options may also be available. See
information included with component.
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 8 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277
Lubrication Recommendations
INTRODUCTION
Carefully follow instructions on the drive nameplate,
warning tags and installation manuals furnished with the
drive. Failure to follow instructions voids warranty.
WARNING: Drives are shipped without oil.
Industrial type extreme pressure (EP) or industrial type
micropitting resistant gear lubricants MUST be used
with V-Class gear drives. They can be formulated using
petroleum or synthetic base stocks.
The section on food grade lubricants provides guidance
selecting lubricants for applications needing this class of
lubricants. Food grade lubricants are formulated using
petroleum or different types of synthetic base stocks.
LUBRICANT SELECTION PROCESS
1. Refer to Table 6 or 7 for proper lubricant viscosity grade
based on ambient temperature range.
2. Refer to Table 5 for summary of lubricant type.
3. Using proper lubricant table and viscosity grade, select
desired lubricant manufacturer name.
4. Refer to drive nameplate for approximate oil capacity to
purchase.
TABLE 5 — S
 ummary of Lubricant Type and
Greases
Petroleum-Based
Extreme Pressure (EP) Micropitting Resistant
See Table 8A See Table 8B
Synthetic Lubricant, Polyalphaolefin Type (PAO)
Extreme Pressure (EP) Micropitting Resistant
See Table 9A See Table 9B
Conventional Grease
See Table 10
Food Grade Lubricant & Grease
See Page 13
VISCOSITY (IMPORTANT)
The proper viscosity grade for petroleum-based lubricant
is found in Table 6. For synthetic lubricant viscosity grades,
refer to Table 7 and the “Synthetic Lubricants” paragraphs.
Viscosity grade is determined by ambient air temperature
in immediate vicinity of gear drive. Lubricant selections
must have a pour point at least 10°F (5.5°C) below the
expected minimum ambient starting temperature. For lower
ambient temperatures, immersion heaters may be required
to ensure proper lubrication at cold start conditions.
OIL PUMPS — When selecting a lubricant for a gear
drive equipped with an oil pump (including DuraPlate),
cold temperature oil viscosity is very important. Lubricant
viscosity at start-up generally should not exceed 3250
cSt (15,000 SSU). When exceeding this viscosity, pump
cavitation is possible, reducing oil circulation to gear drive
and possibly damaging the pump. A sump heater may be
required or it may be possible to use a lower viscosity oil to
minimize pump cavitation.
178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
SUMP HEATERS — For cold starts, the gearbox may
be equipped with a sump heater to warm lubricant to
acceptable viscosities. Approximate heating time is two to
four hours depending on ambient conditions. Standard
heaters will raise sump temperature approximately 17°C
(30°F) in two hours depending on conditions. For drives
equipped with pumps, the minimum temperature of
the sump at start is 10°C (50°F) for petroleum-based
lubricants and 2°C (35°F) for synthetic lubricants.
LUBRICANT TYPES
PETROLEUM-BASED GEAR LUBRICANTS
(TABLES 8A & 8B) — Industrial type (not automotive)
petroleum-based sulfur-phosphorous extreme pressure
(EP) or micropitting resistant gear lubricants meeting
specific requirements are required for ambient air
temperatures of -9°C to +52°C (15°F to 125°F). An
approved lubricant MUST be used. Approved lubricants
meeting specific requirements are listed in Tables 8A &
8B. Failure to use an approved lubricant voids warranty.
SYNTHETIC LUBRICANTS (TABLES 9A & 9B) —
Synthetic extreme pressure (EP) or micropitting resistant
lubricants of the polyalphaolefin (PAO) type meeting
specific requirements are recommended for cold climate
operation, high temperature applications, extended
temperature range (all season) operation, and/or extended
lubricant change intervals. The proper viscosity grade
of synthetic lubricants is given in Table 7. An approved
lubricant MUST be used. Approved synthetic lubricants
meeting the specific requirements are listed in Tables 9A &
9B. Failure to use an approved lubricant voids warranty.
EXTREME PRESSURE (EP) LUBRICANTS (TABLES 8A &
9A) — EP lubricants are manufactured from petroleum or
synthetic base lubricants. Anti-scuff is another term used
to describe EP lubricants.
MICROPITTING RESISTANT LUBRICANTS (TABLES
8B & 9B) — Micropitting resistant lubricants are specially
developed for surface hardened gearing commonly used
in modern industrial gear drives. These lubricants contain
additives to resist formation of micropitting and other
conventional forms of gear wear. Generally lubricants are
available in limited number of viscosity grades.
WARNING: LUBRICANTS IN FOOD PROCESSING
INDUSTRY — Generally conventional gear lubricants are
classified as H2 by NSF (National Sanitation Foundation)
since they contain harmful substances and should not
be used in the food processing industry. Lubricants
registered as H1 by NSF are suitable for food processing
applications.
CLIMATE CONDITIONS — Ambient temperature in
immediate vicinity of gear drive is very important for
determining viscosity grade. Table 6 provides viscosity
grade selections for petroleum-based lubricants. See
Table 7 for synthetic lubricants.
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Owners Manual
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 9 of 26)

OIL LEVELS LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

TYPES VP & VR — Fill gear drive with oil to level indicated
on oil dipstick. Prime oil troughs and pans with at least two
gallons or full sump capacity (if less than two gallons) of
oil when filling. Approximate oil capacities are given on the
drive nameplate. Gear drive can be filled through dipstick
tube, oil fill plug or inspection cover. Inspection cover
must be removed to prime oil troughs. Clean area around
fill location BEFORE removing dipstick, plug or cover to
reduce risk of debris getting into gear drive. Lubricant
must be clean to maximize gear and bearing life. It is
recommended to filter new oil when filling or adding oil to
the gear drive.
The inspection cover is sealed with a gasket. Gaskets
in good condition may be re-used. Replace damaged
gaskets.
CAUTION: If drive has been idle for more than one month,
re-prime oil troughs and pans before start-up.
DRIVES WITH OIL PUMPS — Fill drive to level marked on
the dipstick. Before starting the gear drive, rotate the input
shaft to check for obstructions. For drives equipped with
electric motor-driven oil pumps, run the oil pump for 2 to 5
minutes with the gear drive not running. For all drives, start
the gear drive and allow it to run without load for several
minutes to fill system components. Verify that the pump
is circulating oil properly then shut down drive. Recheck
oil level and add oil if necessary. When everything is
satisfactory, the drive is ready for operation.
TABLE 6 — Viscosity Grade Recommendations
for Petroleum-Based Extreme
Pressure (EP) and Micropitting
Resistant Lubricants
-9° to +16°C +10° to +52°C
Ambient Temperature s
Range (+15° to +60°F) (+50° to +125°F)
ISO Viscosity Grade 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 5 6
s See Viscosity (Important) section on oil pumps.
TABLE 7 — Viscosity Grade Recommendations for
Synthetic Extreme Pressure (EP) and
Micropitting Resistant Lubricants
Ambient Temperature s –34° to +27°C –12° to +52°C
Range (–30° to +80°F) (+10° to +125°F)
ISO Viscosity Grade 150 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 4 6
s See Viscosity (Important) section on oil pumps.
SPLASH LUBRICATED DRIVES — Standard horizontal
shaft type VP and VR drives are splash lubricated. The
lubricant is picked up by the revolving elements and
distributed to bearings and gear meshes.
OIL PUMP LUBRICATED DRIVES — Types VP and VR
may be equipped with oil pumps for special lubrication
considerations or external cooling.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
AFTER FIRST WEEK — Check alignment of total system
and realign where necessary. Tighten all external bolts
and plugs where necessary. See Table 12 for fastener and
wrench sizes. DO NOT adjust the internal gear or bearing
settings in the drive, these were permanently set at the
factory.
AFTER FIRST MONTH — Proceed as follows:
1. Operate drive until sump oil reaches normal operating
temperature. Shut down drive and drain immediately.
CAUTION: Oil may be hot. Clean up any spilled oil per
applicable environmental standards.
2. Immediately flush drive (including troughs and pans)
with new oil of the same type and viscosity grade as the
original charge (warmed to approximately 38°C (100°F)
in cold weather) by rapidly pouring or pumping a
charge equal to 25 - 50% of the initial fill volume or until
clean oil flows through the drain.
3. Close the drain and refill drive to correct level with new
oil of the correct type and viscosity. It is recommended to
filter new oil when filling or adding oil to the gear drive.
PERIODICALLY —
1. Check oil level in drive when it is stopped and at
ambient temperature. Add oil if needed. If oil level is
ABOVE the high oil level mark on dipstick, lower oil level
to dipstick mark and have the oil analyzed for water
content and other contaminants. Moisture in the oil may
indicate that a seal or heat exchanger is leaking. If so,
replace the defective part immediately and change oil.
DO NOT fill above the mark indicated as leakage or
undue heating may occur.
2. Check coupling alignment to make certain that
foundation settling has not caused excessive
misalignment or twisted gear drive. See coupling
installation manual for alignment limits.
3. If drive is equipped with a fan, periodically clean
accumulated foreign debris from the fan, guard, and
deflector.
4. If drive is equipped with a torque arm, check for free
movement.

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 10 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277

TABLE 8A — Petroleum Based EP (Extreme Pressure) Lubricants s

Maximum Operating Temperature of Lubricants 93°C (200°F)
ISO Viscosity Grade 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 5 6
Viscosity cSt @ 40°C  198-242 288-352
Viscosity SSU @ 100°F 918-1122 1335-1632
Manufacturer Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
Castrol Industrial Lubricants Alpha SP 220 Alpha SP 320
Meropa 220 Meropa 320
Chevron / Texaco / Caltex Ultra Gear 220 Ultra Gear 320
Citgo Petroleum Corp. EP Compound 220 EP Compound 320
Exxon Mobil / Esso Mobilgear 600 XP 220 Mobilgear 600 XP 320
Fuchs Lubricants Company GearMaster CLP Oils 220 ---
Petro-Canada Lubricants Enduratex EP 220 Enduratex EP 320
Phillips 66 / Conoco / 76 Lubricants / Kendall Extra Duty Gear Oil 220 Extra Duty Gear Oil 320
Shell Oil Co. Omala S2 G 220 Omala S2 G 320
Total Lubricants USA / Keystone Div. Penwalt Corp. Carter EP 220 Carter EP 320
cc Minimum viscosity index of 90.
„„ Kinematic viscosity in units of mm2/s is equivalent to cSt (centistokes).

TABLE 8B — P
 etroleum Based Micropitting Resistant Lubricants s
Maximum Operating Temperature of Lubricants 93°C (200°F)
ISO Viscosity Grade 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 5 6
Viscosity cSt @ 40°C  198-242 288-352
Viscosity SSU @ 100°F 918-1122 1335-1632
Manufacturer Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
Kluber Lubrication Kluberoil GEM 1 N 220 Kluberoil GEM 1 N 320
cc Minimum viscosity index of 90.
„„ Kinematic viscosity in units of mm2/s is equivalent to cSt (centistokes).

TABLE 9A — Synthetic PAO (Polyalphaolefin) EP (Extreme Pressure) Lubricants s

ISO Viscosity Grade
AGMA Viscosity Grade
Viscosity cSt @ 40°C 
Viscosity SSU @ 100°F
Manufacturer
Castrol Industrial Lubricants
Chevron / Texaco / Caltex
Citgo Petroleum Corp.
Exxon Mobil / Esso
Fuchs Lubricants Company
Kluber Lubrication
Petro-Canada Lubricants
Phillips 66 / Conoco / 76
Lubricants / Kendall
150 220 320
4 5 6
135-165 198-242 288-352
626-765 918-1122 1335-1632
Lubricant Name Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
Alphasyn EP 150 Alphasyn EP 220 Alphasyn EP 320
Castrol Isolube EP 150 Castrol Isolube EP 220 Castrol Isolube EP 320
Tegra Synthetic Gear Lubricant 150 Tegra Synthetic Gear Lubricant 220 Tegra Synthetic Gear Lubricant 320
CITGEAR Synthetic EP Gear 150 CITGEAR Synthetic EP Gear 220 CITGEAR Synthetic EP Gear 320
Mobil SHC Gear 150 Mobil SHC Gear 220 Mobil SHC Gear 320
--- Renolin Unisyn CLP 220 Renolin Unisyn CLP 320
Klubersynth EG 4 150 Klubersynth EG 4 220 Klubersynth EG 4 320
Enduratex Synthetic EP 150 Enduratex Synthetic EP 220 Enduratex Synthetic EP 320
Syncon EP Plus Gear Oil 150 Syncon EP Plus Gear Oil 220 Syncon EP Plus Gear Oil 320

Shell Oil Co. Omala S4 GX 150 Omala S4 GX 220 Omala S4 GX 320

Whitmore Mfg. Company Decathlon HD 150 Decathlon HD 220 Decathlon HD 320
cc Minimum viscosity index of 130. Consult lubricant supplier/manufacturer for maximum operating temperature.
„„ Kinematic viscosity in units of mm2/s is equivalent to cSt (centistokes).

178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Owners Manual
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 11 of 26)

TABLE 9B — Synthetic PAO (Polyalphaolefin) Micropitting Resistant Lubricants s

ISO Viscosity Grade 150 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 4 5 6
Viscosity cSt @ 40°C  135-165 198-242 288-352
Viscosity SSU @ 100°F 626-765 918-1122 1335-1632
Manufacturer Lubricant Name Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
Chevron / Texaco / Caltex --- --- Pinnacle WM 320
Exxon Mobil / Esso --- --- Mobil SHC Gear 320 WT
Kluber Lubrication Klubersynth GEM 4 N 150 Klubersynth GEM 4 N 220 Klubersynth GEM 4 N 320
Petro-Canada Lubricants --- --- Harnex 320
Phillips 66 / Conoco / 76 Lubricants / Kendall --- --- Syncon WTL 320
Whitmore Manufacturing Company Decathlon F 150 Decathlon F 220 Decathlon F 320
cc Minimum viscosity index of 130. Consult lubricant supplier/manufacturer for maximum operating temperature.
„„ Kinematic viscosity in units of mm2/s is equivalent to cSt (centistokes).

LUBRICANT ANALYSIS AND CHANGES GREASE LUBRICATED SEALS AND

OIL ANALYSIS REPORT — Checking oil condition at
regular intervals is recommended. Analyze oil samples
approximately every 1000 hours for petroleum lubricants or
every 3000 hours for synthetic lubricants. In the absence
of more specific limits, the guidelines listed below
may be used to indicate when to change petroleum or
polyalphaolefin type synthetic lubricants:
1. Water content is greater than 500 ppm (parts per
million) (0.05%).
2. Iron content exceeds 150 ppm.
3. Silicon (dust/dirt) exceeds 25 ppm, above reference
sample from new oil container.
4. Copper content exceeds 75 ppm.
5. TAN (Total Acid Number) 50% increase above reference
sample from new oil container.
6. Viscosity changes more than ±15%.
7. Solid particle contamination code exceeds 25/22/18 for
particle sizes ≥4/≥6/≥14 microns, respectively per ISO
4406.
Laboratory analysis is recommended for optimum lubricant
life and gear drive performance.
PETROLEUM LUBRICANTS (EP AND MICROPITTING
RESISTANT) — In the absence of oil analysis, change
gear oils every 6 months or 2500 operating hours,
whichever occurs first. Change oil more frequently when
gear drives operate in extremely humid, chemical or dust
laden atmospheres. In these cases, lubricants should be
changed every 3 to 4 months or 1500 to 2000 hours. If
the drive is operated in an area where temperatures vary
with the seasons, change the oil viscosity grade to suit the
temperature, refer to Table 6. Lubricant suppliers can test
oil from the drive periodically and recommend economical
change schedules.
SYNTHETIC LUBRICANTS (EP AND MICROPITTING
RESISTANT) — In the absence of oil analysis, synthetic
lube change intervals can be extended to 8000 hours
depending upon operating temperatures. Laboratory
analysis is recommended for optimum lubricant life and
drive performance. Change lube with change in ambient
temperature, if required. Refer to Table 7.
BEARINGS
All drives and some backstops have grease lubricated
seals. Some specially mounted drives have grease
lubricated bearings. Drives are shipped with NLGI #2
grade grease in the seal housing cavities and in those
bearings requiring grease lubrication unless otherwise
specified. Refer to Table 10 for grease recommendations.
GREASE LUBRICATED SEALS — Falk V-Class gear
drives are furnished with grease purged seals which
minimize the entry of contaminants and abrasive dusts into
the drive.
Grease seals during oil change intervals. Depending on
the degree of contamination, it may be necessary to purge
contaminated grease from seals more often (at least every
3 to 6 months). Purge grease from seals by first cleaning
grease fitting and then slowly pump fresh grease, WITH A
HAND GREASE GUN, through the seal cavity until fresh
grease flows out along the shaft. Wipe off purged grease.
Cooling accessories can be removed to access grease
purge without removing shaft connection on motor.
CAUTION: Rapid greasing with a power grease gun can
force grease inward past the seals causing seal leaks.
GREASE LUBRICATED BEARINGS — Grease those
bearings of specially mounted drives that require grease
lubrication during oil change intervals or every 6 months or
2500 hours of operation, whichever occurs first.
WARNING: Greases in Table 10 contain harmful
substances not allowed in the food processing industry. If
grease could contaminate the product, as in the food and
drug industries, the grease originally supplied with gear
drive must be removed and replaced with grease listed in
Table 19. Simply purging grease with grease gun will not
remove all grease and cross-contamination will likely occur.
Refer to gear drive assembly/disassembly instructions.
Grease registered as H1 by NSF, National Sanitation
Foundation, is suitable for food processing applications.
STORED & INACTIVE GEAR DRIVES
Each drive is protected with a rust preventive that will
protect parts against rust for a period of 4 months in
an outdoor shelter or 12 months in a dry building after
shipment from the factory.

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 12 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277

TABLE 10 — Conventional NLGI #2 Grade Periodically inspect stored or inactive gear drives and
Grease s for Grease Lubricated add Nox-Rust VCI-10 every six months, or more often if
necessary. Indoor dry storage is recommended.
Bearings & Grease Purged Seals
-18° to +93°C (0° to 200°F) The vented dipstick should be replaced with a plug
(vented dipstick should be attached to gear drive for future
Manufacturer Lubricant use) so that the protective rust inhibiting atmosphere
Chevron / Texaco / Caltex Multifak EP 2 is sealed inside the drive. Install vented dipstick when
preparing drive for operation.
Lithoplex RT 2
Citgo Petroleum Corp.
Premium Lithium EP 2 WARNING: The rust preventative oil from the factory
and Nox-Rust VCI-10 are not H1 registered with the NSF
ExxonMobil / Esso Mobilux EP 2 (National Sanitation Foundation) as suitable for food
Mobilith SHC 460  processing applications. When Food Grade Lubricants are
Petro-Canada Lubricants Precision General Purpose EP2 to be used, it is the end users responsibility to properly
flush and prepare the drive for Food Grade service.
Phillips 66 / Conoco / Contact the lubricant manufacturer for specific information
76 Lubricants / Kendall Multiplex Red
and flushing procedures.
Shell Oil Co. Gadus S1 V220-2
Total Lubricants USA /
Multis 2 or Multis EP 2 TABLE 11 — Nox-Rust VCI-10
Keystone Div. Penwalt Corp. ( Add to stored or Inactive Drives with
s Not suitable for food grade applications. conventional gear lubricants)
 High performance synthetic alternate. NOX-RUST VCI-10
Grease application or re-lubrication should be done at temperatures
above -7°C (20°F). If grease must be applied at cooler temperatures Unit Size 2% of Sump 2% of Sump
consult lubricant supplier for recommendations. Capacity Capacity
Liters Quarts
If a gear drive is to be stored, or is inactive after installation M107 0.3 0.3
beyond the above periods, add Nox-Rust VCI-10* vapor- M117, M127 0.6 0.6
phase rust inhibitor. For drives that have oil installed, add M133, M137 0.7 0.7
Nox-Rust VCI-10 vaper-phase rust inhibitor at the rate of M143, M145, M147 1.1 1.1
2% of sump capacity as shown in Table 11. For drives
without oil, add Nox-Rust VCI-10 vapor-phase rust inhibitor M153, M155, M157 1.2 1.3
at the rate of one ounce per cubic foot of internal drive M163, M165, M167 1.5 1.6
space. Rotate the shafts several times by hand. Before M173, M175, M177, M187 2.5 2.6
operating, drives which have been stored or inactive M193, M195, M197 3.9 4.1
must be filled to the proper level with oil meeting the M203, M207 3.6 3.8
specifications given in this manual. Oil troughs and pans
must also be primed. Refer to Manual 128-014 for “Start-up M213, M215, M217 6.2 6.6
after Storage” instructions. M223, M225, M227 5.9 6.3
* Product of the Daubert Chemical Company, Chicago, Illinois. M237 8.5 9.0
M243, M247 10.8 11.5
M253, M257 12.6 13.3
M263, M267 16.2 17.1
M273, M277 20.4 21.5

178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Owners Manual
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 13 of 26)

Table 12 — Fastener & Wrench Sizes

DRIVE SIZE
Fastener M133, M143, M145, M153, M155, M163, M165, M173, M175,
M107 M117 M127 M187
M137 M147 M157 M167 M177
185mm 205mm 225mm 240mm 260mm 280mm 295 mm
Diameter … …
Bushing 7.3" 8.1" 8.9" 9.4" 10.2" 11.0" 11.6"
Nut 581mm 644mm 707mm 754mm 817mm 880mm 927 mm
Circumference … …
22.9" 25.4" 27.8" 29.7" 32.2" 34.6" 36.5"
Bushing Nut Screw Size M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 … …
Setscrew Hex Size 4mm 4mm 4mm 4mm 4mm 4mm 4 mm … …
Inspection Screw Size M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
Cover Wrench Size 10mm 10mm 13mm 13mm 13mm 13mm 13 mm 13 mm 13 mm
Screw Size M16 M16 M12 M20 M20 M20 M20 M24 M24
Jackscrews
Wrench Size 24mm 24mm 19mm 30mm 30mm 36mm 30 mm 36 mm 36 mm
Plug Size 1.0 NPT / 0.75 NPT 1.0 NPT / 0.75 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT
Magnetic
Wrench Size
Drain Plugs 13/16" / 5/8" 13/16" / 5/8" 13/16" 13/16" 13/16" 13/16" 13/16" 13/16" 13/16"
(Square)
Plug Size 1.0 NPT / 0.75 NPT 1.0 NPT / 0.75 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT
Other Plugs
Hex Size 5/8" / 9/16" 5/8" / 9/16" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8"
Nut Size M30 M30 M39 M39 M39 M39 M39 M45 M45
Torque Arm
Wrench Size 46mm 46mm 60mm 60mm 60mm 60mm 60 mm 70 mm 70 mm
Grease Purge Screw Size M5/M6 M5/M6 M6 M6 / M8 M6 / M8 M6 / M8 M6 / M8 M6 / M8 M6 / M8
Cover Wrench Size 8mm / 10mm 8mm / 10mm 10mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10 mm / 13 mm 10 mm / 13 mm 10 mm / 13 mm
Screw Size M6/M8/M12 M6/M8/M12 M6/M8/M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M12
Shaft Fan
Shroud Wrench Size 10mm/13mm/ 10mm/13mm/ 10mm/13mm/ 13mm / 19mm 13mm / 19mm 13mm / 19mm
13mm / 19mm 13mm / 19mm 13mm / 19mm
19mm 19mm 19mm
Shaft Fan Screw Size M5/M6/M8 M5/M6/M8 M5/M8 M8 / M10 M8 / M10 M8 / M10 M8 / M10 M8 / M10 M8 / M10
Setscrew Hex Size 2.5mm/3mm/4mm 2.5mm/3mm/4mm 2.5mm / 4mm 4 mm / 5 mm 4 mm / 5 mm 4 mm / 5 mm 4 mm / 5 mm 4 mm / 5 mm 4 mm / 5 mm

DRIVE SIZE
Fastener M203, M205 M213, M215 M223, M225
M193 & M197 M237 M243, M247 M253, M257 M263, M267 M273, M277
& M207 & M217 & M227
Screw Size M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10
Inspection Cover
Wrench Size 17mm 17mm 17mm 17mm 17mm 17mm 17mm 17mm 17mm
Screw Size M24 M24 M24 M24 M24 M30 M30 M30 M30
Jackscrews
Wrench Size 36mm 36mm 36mm 36mm 36mm 46mm 46mm 46mm 46mm
Plug Size 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT 2.0 NPT
Magnetic Drain
Plugs Wrench Size
(Sqr) 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-3/8"

Plug Size 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 1.0 NPT 2.5 NPT 2.5 NPT 2.5 NPT 2.5 NPT 2.5 NPT
Other Plugs
Wrench Size 5/8" Hex Skt 5/8" Hex Skt 5/8" Hex Skt 5/8" Hex Skt 1-1/8" Sqr Skt 1-1/8" Sqr Skt 1-1/8" Sqr Skt 1-1/8" Sqr Skt 1-1/8" Sqr Skt
Screw Size M6/M8 M6/M8 M6/M8 M6/M8 M6/M8 M6/M8 M6/M8 M6/M8 M6/M8
Grease Purge Cover
Wrench Size 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm 10mm / 13mm
Screw Size M8 / M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M12 M8 / M10 / M16 M8 / M10 / M16 M8 / M10 / M16 M8 / M10 / M16 M8 / M10 / M16
Shaft Fan Shroud 13mm/17mm/ 13mm/17mm/ 13mm/17mm/ 13mm/17mm/ 13mm/17mm/
Wrench Size 13mm / 19mm 13mm / 19mm 13mm / 19mm 13mm / 19mm
24mm 24mm 24mm 24mm 24mm
Screw Size M8/M10 M8/M10 M8/M10 M8/M10 M8/M10 M10 M10 M12 M12
Shaft Fan Setscrew
Hex Size 4mm / 5mm 4mm / 5mm 4mm / 5mm 4mm / 5mm 4mm / 5mm 5mm 5mm 6mm 6mm

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 14 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277

FOOD GRADE LUBRICANTS TABLE 15 — Viscosity Grade Recommendations

Guidance for selecting petroleum-based and synthetic- for Food Grade Synthetic Extreme
based food grade lubricants are shown below in Table Pressure (EP) Lubricants
13. For general lubrication guidlines, refer to the first part
of the “Lubrication Recomendation” Section. Approved Ambient Temperature s –34° to +27°C –12° to +52°C
Food Grade lubricants meeting the specific requirements Range (–30° to +80°F) (+10° to +125°F)
are listed in Tables 16, 17 & 18 for Petroleum-based EP, ISO Viscosity Grade 150 320
synthetic-PAO EP, and synthetic-PAG EP, respectively.
Failure to use an approved lubricant voids warranty. AGMA Viscosity Grade 4 6
WARNING: SERVICE FACTOR REQUIREMENTS — s See section on oil pumps
Using petroleum-based or synthetic PAO food grade
lubricants require a minimum service factor of 1.50 or
0.25 added to the recommended catalog service factor, FOOD GRADE LUBRICANTS (TABLES 16, 17, 18 & 19) —
whichever is greater. Food grade lubricants are a class of lubricants registered
as H1 by NSF, National Sanitation Foundation. They contain
base stock and additives which comply with Food and
FOOD GRADE LUBRICANT SELECTION Drug Administration Title 21 CFR 178.3570 regulations for
PROCESS lubricants with incidental food contact. Base stock can
1. Refer to Table 14 or 15 for proper lubricant viscosity be petroleum oil or different types of synthetic lubricant.
grade based on ambient temperature range. Food grade lubricants are not same as biodegradable or
environmentally friendly lubricants.
2. Refer to Table 13 for summary of food grade lubricant type.
3. Using proper food grade lubricant table and viscosity Rust and corrosion inhibitors used to protect gear drive
grade, select desired lubricant manufacturer name. during shipment are not qualified as food grade fluids. Flush
out inhibitor oil before filling with food grade lubricant.
4. Refer to drive nameplate for approximate oil capacity to
purchase. Tables 16, 17, 18 & 19 list food grade lubricants that
have performance properties meeting Rexnord/Falk
specifications. They are not exclusive recommendations but
TABLE 13 — Summary of Food Grade serve as a guide for making proper lubricant selections.
Lubricants and Greases CLIMATE CONDITIONS — Ambient temperature in
Petroleum-Based t immediate vicinity of gear drive is very important for
Extreme Pressure (EP) determining viscosity grade. Table 14 provides viscosity
See Table 16 grade selections for petroleum-based lubricants. See
Synthetic Lubricant, Polyalphaolefin Type (PAO) t Table 15 for synthetic lubricants.
Extreme Pressure (EP) Polyalkylene glycols (PAG) are another class of synthetic
See Table 17 lubricants. They have similar performance properties
Synthetic Lubricant, Polyalkylene Glycol Type (PAG) as PAO synthetics - low pour point, stable at elevated
Extreme Pressure (EP) temperatures, and high viscosity index. PAG’s have
See Table 18 exceptional tolerance to water contamination.
Food Grade Grease WARNING: Polyalkylene glycols (PAG’s) are not
See Table 19 compatible with petroleum mineral oil or PAO synthetic
 These lubricants require a minimum service factor of 1.50 or 0.25 added lubricants and must not be topped off with either lubricant.
to the recommended catalog service factor, whichever is greater.
In addition, petroleum mineral oils or PAO synthetic
lubricants must not be used to top off systems containing
TABLE 14 — Viscosity Grade PAG’s. Do not use PAG’s in gear drives with painted interior
Recommendations For housing walls unless paint compatibility is checked.
Food Grade Petroleum- Compatibility with oil seals and gasket materials must be
Based Extreme Pressure (EP) checked prior to use. PAG lubricants are not compatible
with polycarbonate sight glass. Use glass sight glass.
Lubricants
Ambient Temperature s –9° to +16°C +10° to +52°C
Range (+15° to +60°F) (+50° to +125°F)
ISO Viscosity Grade 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 5 6
s See section on oil pumps

OIL PUMPS — When selecting a lubricant for a gear

drive equipped with an oil pump (including DuraPlate),
cold temperature oil viscosity is very important. Lubricant
viscosity at start-up generally should not exceed 3250
cSt (15,000 SSU). When exceeding this viscosity, pump
cavitation is possible, reducing oil circulation to gear drive
and possibly damaging the pump. A sump heater may be
required or it may be possible to use a lower viscosity oil to
minimize pump cavitation.

178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Owners Manual
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 15 of 26)

TABLE 16 — Food Grade Petroleum-Based EP (Extreme Pressure) Lubricants — NSF (National

Sanitation Foundation) H1 Registered
Maximum operating temperature of lubricants 93° (200°F)
ISO Viscosity Grade 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 5 6
Viscosity cSt @ 40°C n 198-242 288-352
Viscosity SSU @ 100°F 918-1122 1335-1632
Manufacturer Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
Petro-Canada Purity FG EP 220 Purity FG EP 320
Total Lubricants USA, Inc. Nevastane EP 220 Nevastane EP 320
n Kinematic viscosity in units of mm2/S is equivalent to cSt (centistokes)

TABLE 17 — Food Grade Synthetic PAO (Polyalphaolefin) EP (Extreme Pressure) Lubricantst —

NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) H1 Registered
Maximum operating temperature of lubricants 93° (200°F)
ISO Viscosity Grade 150 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 4 5 6
Viscosity cSt @ 40°C n 135-165 198-242 288-352
Viscosity SSU @ 100°F 626-765 918-1122 1335-1632
Manufacturer Lubricant Name Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
ExxonMobil Mobil SHC Cibus 150 Mobil SHC Cibus 220 Mobil SHC Cibus 320
Kluber Lubrication Kluberoil 4 UH1 N 150 Kluberoil 4 UH1 N 220 Kluberoil 4 UH1 N 320
Lubriplate Lubricants Co. Lubriplate SFGO Ultra 150 Lubriplate SFGO Ultra 220 Lubriplate SFGO Ultra 320
Petro-Canada --- Purity FG Synthetic EP 220 ---
Total Lubricants USA, Inc. Nevastane SL 150 Nevastane SL 220 Nevastane SL 320
n Kinematic viscosity in units of mm2/S is equivalent to cSt (centistokes)
 Lubricants in this table may not technically be classified as extreme pressure lubricants; however they have been approved for use in V-Class gear drives
based on laboratory bench tests or factory testing.

TABLE 18 — Food Grade Synthetic PAG (Polyalkylene Glycol) EP (Extreme Pressure)

Lubricantst — NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) H1 Registered
Maximum operating temperature of lubricants 93° (200°F)
See Warning Note below.
ISO Viscosity Grade 150 220 320
AGMA Viscosity Grade 4 5 6
Viscosity cSt @ 40°C n 135-165 198-242 288-352
Viscosity SSU @ 100° F 626-765 918-1122 1335-1632
Manufacturer Lubricant Name Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
Exxon Mobil Glygoyle 150 Glygoyle 220 Glygoyle 320
Kluber Lubrication Klubersynth UH1 6-150 Klubersynth UH1 6-220 Klubersynth UH1 6-320
Lubriplate Lubricants Co. PGO-FGL Synthetic Gear Oil 150 PGO-FGL Synthetic Gear Oil 220 PGO-FGL Synthetic Gear Oil 320
WARNING: Polyalkylene glycol (PAG) lubricants are not compatible with petroleum mineral oils or PAO synthetic lubricants. PAG’s must not be mixed or
used to top off either petroleum mineral oils or PAO synthetic lubricants.
n Kinematic viscosity in units of mm 2/S is equivalent to cSt (centistokes)
 Lubricants in this table may not technically be classified as extreme pressure lubricants; however they have been approved for use in V-Class gear drives
based on laboratory bench tests or factory testing.

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Owners Manual • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 16 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
AFTER FIRST WEEK — Check alignment of total system
and realign where necessary. Tighten all external bolts and
plugs where necessary. See Table 12 for fastener and wrench
sizes. DO NOT adjust the internal gear or bearing settings in
the drive, these were permanently set at the Factory.
AFTER FIRST MONTH — Proceed as follows:
1. Operate drive until sump oil reaches normal operating
temperature. Shut down drive and drain immediately.
CAUTION: Oil may be hot. Clean up any spilled oil per
applicable environmental standards.
2. Immediately flush drive (including troughs and pans)
with new oil of the same type and viscosity grade as the
original charge (warmed to approximately 38°C (100°F)
in cold weather) by rapidly pouring or pumping a charge
equal to 25 - 50% of the initial fill volume or until clean oil
flows through the drain.
3. Close the drain and refill drive to correct level with new
food grade oil of the correct type and viscosity. It is
recommended to filter new oil when filling or adding oil to
the gear drive.
PERIODICALLY —
1. Check oil level in drive when it is stopped and at ambient
temperature. Add food grade oil if needed. If oil level
is ABOVE the high oil level mark on dipstick, lower oil
level to dipstick mark and have the oil analyzed for water
content and other contaminants. Moisture in the oil may
indicate that a seal or heat exchanger is leaking. If so,
replace the defective part immediately and change oil.
DO NOT fill above the mark indicated as leakage or
undue heating may occur.
2. Check coupling alignment to make certain that
foundation settling has not caused excessive
misalignment or twisted gear drive. See coupling
installation manual for alignment limits.
3. If drive is equipped with a fan, periodically clean
accumulated foreign debris from the fan, guard, and
deflector.
4. If drive is equipped with a torque arm, check for free
movement.
LUBRICANT ANALYSIS AND CHANGES
OIL ANALYSIS REPORT (FOOD GRADE) — Checking oil
condition at regular intervals is recommended. Analyze oil
samples approximately every 1000 hours for food grade
petroleum lubricants or every 3000 hours for food grade
synthetic lubricants. In the absence of more specific limits,
the guidelines listed below may be used to indicate when to
change food grade lubricants:
1. Water content is greater than 500 ppm (parts per million)
(0.05%).
2. Iron content exceeds 150 ppm.
3. Silicon (dust/dirt) exceeds 25 ppm, above reference
sample from new oil container.
4. Copper content exceeds 75 ppm.
5. TAN (Total Acid Number) 50% increase above reference
sample from new oil container.
6. Viscosity changes more than ±15%.
7. Solid particle contamination code exceeds 25/22/18 for
particle sizes ≥4/≥6/≥14 microns, respectively per ISO 4406.
178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
Guidelines for when to change food grade polyalkylene
glycol type lubricant are:
1. Water content is greater than 3%.
2. Iron content exceeds 150 ppm.
3. Silicon (dust/dirt) exceeds 25 ppm, above reference
sample from new oil container.
4. Copper content exceeds 75 ppm.
5. Viscosity changes more than ±15%.
6. Solid particle contamination code 25/22/18 per ISO
4406.
Laboratory analysis is recommended for optimum lubricant
life and gear drive performance.
PETROLEUM LUBRICANTS (FOOD GRADE) — In the
absence of oil analysis, change gear oils every 6 months
or 2500 operating hours, whichever occurs first. Change
oil more frequently when gear drives operate in extremely
humid, chemical or dust laden atmospheres. In these
cases, lubricants should be changed every 3 to 4 months
or 1500 to 2000 hours. If the drive is operated in an area
where temperatures vary with the seasons, change the oil
viscosity grade to suit the temperature, refer to Table 14.
Lubricant suppliers can test oil from the drive periodically
and recommend economical change schedules.
SYNTHETIC LUBRICANTS (FOOD GRADE) — In the
absence of oil analysis, synthetic lube change intervals
can be extended to 8000 hours depending upon operating
temperatures. Laboratory analysis is recommended for
optimum lubricant life and drive performance. Change lube
with change in ambient temperature, if required. Refer to
Table 15.
GREASE LUBRICATED SEALS AND BEARINGS
All drives and some backstops have grease lubricated
seals. Some specially mounted drives have grease
lubricated bearings. Drives are shipped with NLGI #2
grade grease in the seal housing cavities and in those
bearings requiring grease lubrication unless otherwise
specified.
GREASE LUBRICATED SEALS — Falk V-Class gear
drives are furnished with grease purged seals which
minimize the entry of contaminants and abrasive dusts into
the drive.
Grease seals during oil change intervals with one of the
food grade greases listed in Table 19. Depending on the
degree of contamination, it may be necessary to purge
contaminated grease from seals more often (at least every
3 to 6 months). Purge grease from seals by first cleaning
grease fitting and then slowly pump fresh grease, WITH A
HAND GREASE GUN, through the seal cavity until fresh
grease flows out along the shaft. Wipe off purged grease.
Cooling accessories can be removed to access grease
purge without removing shaft connection on motor.
CAUTION: Rapid greasing with a power grease gun can
force grease inward past the seals causing seal leaks.
GREASE LUBRICATED BEARINGS — Grease those
bearings of specially mounted drives that require grease
lubrication during oil change intervals or every 6 months or
2500 hours of operation, whichever occurs first, with one
of the food grade greases listed in Table 19.
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Owners Manual
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 17 of 26)

If grease could contaminate the product, as in the food

and drug industries, the grease originally supplied with
gear drive must be removed and replaced with grease
listed in Table 20. Simply purging grease with grease gun
will not remove all grease and cross-contamination will
likely occur. Refer to gear drive assembly/disassembly
instructions. Grease registered as H1 by NSF, National
Sanitation Foundation, is suitable for food processing
applications.

TABLE 19 — Food Grade Grease s for Grease

Lubricated Bearings & Grease
Purged Seals, NLGI #2 Grade
-18° to +93°C (0° to 200°F)
Manufacturer Lubricant
Bel-Ray Company, Inc. No-Tox HD Grease 2
Chevron USA, Inc. (Texaco/
Caltex) Chevron FM ALC EP 2

Exxon Mobil Mobil SHC Polyrex 462

Kluber Lubrication Klubersynth UH1 14-222
Lubriplate Lubriplate FGL-2
Total Lubricants USA, Inc. Nevastane HT/AW 2
Petro-Canada Purity FG
Phillips 66 / Conoco / 76
Food Machinery Grease 2
Lubricants / Kendall
cc NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) H1 Registered.
Grease application or re-lubrication should be done at temperatures
above -7°C (20°F). If grease must be applied at cooler temperatures
consult lubricant supplier for recommendations.

STORED & INACTIVE GEAR DRIVES

Prior to shipment from the factory, all Rexnord enclosed
gear drives are protected internally against corrosion with
a rust preventative oil. A vapor phase rust inhibitor may
also be added.
WARNING: These corrosion inhibitors are not H1
registered with the NSF (National Sanitation Foundation)
as suitable for food processing applications. When Food
Grade Lubricants are to be used, it is the end users
responsibility to properly flush and prepare the drive for
Food Grade service. Contact the lubricant manufacturer for
specific information and flushing procedures.

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Appendix A • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 18 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277
Rod End Adjustable Torque Arm Installation
INTRODUCTION
The Falk V-Class rod end type adjustable torque arm is
available for all shaft-mounted Falk V-Class sizes, both
parallel shaft Type VP and right angle Type VR. It is used to
support the drive when mounted in a standard horizontal
position; other positions may be available (consult the
Factory). The torque arm accessory is suitable for use on
swing bases, bedplates, or mounted directly to the drive.
Three styles of rod end torque arms are available:
(1) Standard style for swing base or bedplate mounting;
(2) Clevis style for mounting directly to the drive foot;
(3) Turnbuckle style for greater length and adjustment.
The torque arm requires mounting holes in the driven
equipment support structure to provide for attachment.
The customer is responsible for determining the structural
integrity of their support member.
MOUNTING
It is natural for the drive system to move during operation.
This movement is due to runout from the driven equipment
shaft, gear drive low-speed shaft and the connection of the
two. Plain spherical bearing rod ends form a link to provide
a resilient mounting support that accommodates the
motion of the drive. To allow for maximum movement, the
torque arm must be perpendicular to the supports and rod
ends centered in the mounting anchor bracket. Restricting
the drive’s motion in any way may result in premature
failure of the drive or driven equipment.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the drive on the driven equipment shaft such
that the torque arm link is centered in the anchor
bracket. Ideally, the anchor bracket mounting holes
should be added to the structure after the drive has
been secured to the driven equipment.
NOTE: Do not fasten the torque arm to the support
structure at this time.
2. Secure the drive to the driven equipment via the TA
Bushing, shrink disc or rigid coupling connection.
178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
3. Mount the anchor bracket or clevis to the drive or drive
system if not already done. Locate the position of the
anchor bracket to be mounted to the support structure.
Match drill the mounting holes for the fastener size listed
in Tabel 1; class 8.8 or grade 5 minimum. Lock washers
and flat washers are also required.
NOTE: Torque arm must be vertical (±1°) in both
directions after installation.
4. (IF REQUIRED) Assemble rod end components to create
a link. A combination of male/female rod ends, clevis/
male rod end or turnbuckle/male rod ends are required
dependent on torque arm style. All styles require jam
nuts to lock linkage. Refer to Figures 1 through 3.
NOTE: Rod ends must be assembled such that the
relative position of one rod end head to the other is
parallel. Loosen locknut and adjust if necessary. See
Figure 4.
5. For Standard and Turnbuckle style torque arm, install
pin through one lug of anchor bracket mounted to drive.
Position spacer, then rod end and finally second spacer
on pin. Finish positioning pin within anchor bracket.
Install retaining ring to secure the pin. See Figures 1
through 3.
6. Install pin in anchor bracket mounted to supporting
structure with spacers in a similar manner. The drive
may need to be rotated about the low-speed shaft to
install second pin. If the drive has a backstop, it may
be necessary to disconnect the backstop to rotate the
drive. Refer to the backstop instructions for removal.
7. If the drive system is not horizontal, the rod end linkage
can be adjusted (within the limits indicated in the
catalog or certified print) to level the drive.
8. Verify the torque arm link is centered in the anchor
bracket and is not restricting motion of the drive.
9. Some rod ends may be provided with grease fittings
for lubricating. Grease rod end at every scheduled
maintenance or at least every six months. See Table 10
for approved greases.
Table 1
Bolt Size
Drive Size
mm inch
M107 M12 x 1.75 0.500 -13 UNC
M117 M16 x 2.0 0.625 - 11 UNC
M127-157 M24 x 3.0 1.00 - 8 UNC
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Appendix A
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 19 of 26)

FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2

MOUNTING HARDWARE DRIVE

(PROVIDED) BRACKET
ANCHOR
BRACKET TORQUE TORQUE
ARM PIN ARM PIN
RETAINING DRIVE MOUNTING
RING ROD END HARDWARE (SUPPLIED)
SPACER (MALE) ROD END
(MALE) RETAINING
SPACER JAM NUT RING
JAM NUT SPACERS
ROD END ROD END
RETAINING (FEMALE) (FEMALE) SPACERS
RING RETAINING
TORQUE RING
TORQUE ARM PIN
ARM PIN FOUNDATION MOUNTING
HARDWARE (SUPPLIED
ANCHOR MOUNTING HARDWARE ANCHOR BY CUSTOMER)
BRACKET (SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER) BRACKET

FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4 ROD END

HEAD
MOUNTING HARDWARE
(PROVIDED)
ANCHOR TORQUE
BRACKET ARM PIN
JAM NUT JAM NUT
RETAINING
RING
SPACER
ROD END TURNBUCKLE

ROD END JAM NUT

SPACER
TORQUE ROD END
RETAINING ARM PIN HEAD
RING
CORRECT INCORRECT
ANCHOR LINK ASSEMBLY - LINK ASSEMBLY -
BRACKET MOUNTING HARDWARE ROD END HEADS ROD END HEADS
(SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER) PARALLEL NOT PARALLEL

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Appendix B • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 20 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277

Swing Base Installation

INTRODUCTION are firmly seated. Motor mounting needs to be done in
conjunction with coupling alignment to control angular and
The Falk V-Class swing base is a welded steel structure
offset misalignment. Refer to the coupling manufacturer’s
designed to support a motor and a right angle Type VR,
manual for specific instructions. Bolt down the motor to the
shaft-mounted drive. The swing base itself is a length of
torque specified in Table 4, page 6.
square cross-sectional tubing with plates welded to it for
the motor and drive. The motor and drive plates are not
machined, and are supported by gussets for additional
strength. A torque arm attaches to the tube section near STEP
the motor end of the swing base. BLOCK

MOTOR PLATE

COUPLING GUARD PLATE

DRIVE PLATE
TORQUE ARM
CONNECTION LUG
COUPLING GUARD
TUBE The coupling guard may be trimmed in order to fit the
SECTION height and shaft extension requirements. Refer to the
coupling guard installation manual for instructions on
GUSSET trimming the guard. After the guard has been trimmed,
holes can be drilled in the coupling guard plate on the
swing base. The guard can then be bolted down to the
SUPPORTING THE SWING BASE plate.
The torque arm connection lug prevents the swing base
from lying flat on the ground; therefore, a supporting LIFTING THE SWING BASE ASSEMBLY
structure is required for mounting the gear drive and motor After the drive, motor, and coupling have been mounted
to the swing base. This structure is typically built from to the swing base, the completed assembly can be lifted
wood and is unique to each swing base. All gussets have into position for installation on the driven shaft. The motor
a 19 mm (0.75 inch) diameter hole for securing the swing eyebolt and the lifting holes on the drive housing can
base to the supporting structure. be used as cable attachment points. The motor eyebolt
is strongest when the cable pull is vertical. To ensure
that cable pull on the motor eyebolt is vertical, use of a
spreader bar is recommended. See the sketch below. To
ensure safety, chains or a sling should be placed behind
the torque arm connection.

WOODEN SUPPORTING SPREADER BAR

STRUCTURE

MOUNTING GEAR DRIVE TO SWING BASE

VERTICAL
It is Rexnord’s standard procedure to mount the drive CABLE PULL
to the swing base at the Factory. These instructions are
to be followed when field mounting of the drive to the
swing base is required. Use of broad, flat shims between
the gear drive and mounting plate are recommended to
prevent distortion of the housing when the drive is bolted
down. Jacking screw holes are provided in gear drive
housing to aid in fixing the shims. Begin at the low-speed
shaft end and level across the length and then the width of
LOCATE SAFETY
the gear drive. Use a feeler gauge to ensure that all pads CHAINS/SLING HERE
are supported. Bolt down the drive to the torque specified
in Table 4, page 6.
MOUNTING SWING BASE ASSEMBLY TO
MOUNTING MOTOR AND COUPLING DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
ALIGNMENT
Mount the gear drive to the driven shaft (see page 3). Secure
Shims are provided for motor mounting. Holes must be the torque arm to the foundation per the instructions in
drilled into the swing base motor plate for mounting of the Appendix A.
motor. Step blocks are also provided for some small frame
motors. Use a feeler gauge to ensure that all motor pads

178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Appendix C
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 21 of 26)

Alignment-Free Assembly and Installation

INTRODUCTION Table 2A — Fan Hub Location
The Alignment-Free Drive design consists of a shaft- Fan Hub Location
mounted gear drive, bell housing, torque arm, motor and Drive Size mm Inch
coupling. When assembled, the gear drive, bell housing
and motor locate off registers, resulting in alignment of the M193, M195, M197 468 18.23
M203, M207 468 18.23
shafts. Therefore, no additional alignment is required for
the high-speed coupling.
FAN HUB
POSITION
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
The bell housing is fastened to the gear drive’s high-speed
end using capscrews through the four mounting holes on SET SCREW
that face with a nut and lock washer (see Table 1 for size
and torque). Apply Loctite #242 or equivalent to mounting
fastener threads. The bell housing will locate on the bevel
head of the gear drive. Read instructions, provided with
high-speed coupling, prior to assembly. FAN HUB
FIGURE 1
Table 1 — Tightening Torques
Tightening Torque Assemble split fan to fan hub with fan support ring on the
Drive Size Bolt Size
Nm lb-ft opposite side of the fan as the hub flange. Apply Loctite
M117 #242 or equivalent to fastener threads and tighten.
M24 780 570
M127 M24 780 570 CAUTION: Do not over-tighten fasteners into plastic fan as
M133, M137 fan may crack.
M24 780 570
M143, M145, M147 M30 1540 1140 Assemble fan shroud mounting rails to bell housing.
M153, M155, M157 M30 1540 1140 Assemble fan cowling with expanded metal guard to back
M163, M165, M167 of fan shroud/plates on same fasteners. Mount fan shroud
M36 2720 2000
assembly to mounting rails. The cowling may require
M173, M175, M177 M36 2720 2000 to be notched to allow clearance for the bell housing to
M187 M36 2720 2000
drive mounting fasteners. Rotate fan to ensure clearance;
M193, M195, M197 M24 780 570 reposition fan hub if necessary. Split fan guard may
M203, M207 M24 780 570 be removed or installed without disrupting high-speed
coupling. See Figure 2.

HIGH-SPEED SHAFT FAN

High-speed shaft fans are available for all Falk V-Class MOUNTING RAILS MOUNTING PLATE
FAN SHROUD FAN COWLING WITH
Alignment-Free Drives. Fan size and position is dependent SPLIT FAN EXPANDED METAL
on bell housing casting and high-speed coupling, for sizes FAN SUPPORT RING
FAN HUB
M117 thru M187, and by drive size for M193 thru M207.
Mount the fan hub on the gear drive high-speed shaft such
that the flange of the hub is toward the gear drive. Locate
the hub axially on the shaft at the values listed in Table 2 or
Table 2A. Dimensions listed are from the inside face of the
bell housing to the far side of the hub. See Figure 1. Apply
Loctite #242 or equivalent to threads of the set screw and
tighten over key to secure hub in position. Fan hub must be
installed prior to installing high-speed coupling hub.
FIGURE 2

Table 2 — Fan Hub Location

Bell Housing Fan Hub Location FLUID COUPLING
Coupling Size Casting Number u mm inch The fluid coupling can be installed/removed without
1420HFDD D011723 108 4.25 removing the motor (see fluid coupling instructions for
1480HFDD D011724 106 4.17 procedure). Mount the coupling hubs to the drive high-
1584HFDD D011725 87 3.43 speed shaft and the motor shaft. Hubs are to be mounted
1660HFDD D011726 108 4.25 flush with the end of the shafts (coupling hubs may be
Spacer Coupling D011723 108 4.25 furnished with an interference fit). Mount the motor to the
Spacer Coupling D011725 87 3.43 bell housing, apply Loctite #242 or equivalent to fastener
u Casting number located on inside sidewall of bell housing.
threads, and tighten to proper torque. Install fluid coupling
per coupling instructions.

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Appendix C • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 22 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277
To fill the fluid coupling to the proper oil level, install
the small top cover on the bell housing. Rotate the fluid
coupling such that the fill hole is up and fill with the
approximate quantity of oil (see coupling instructions for oil
type and quantity). Rotate the coupling in either direction
to align the mark on the perimeter of the fluid coupling with
the mark in the center of the cover on the bell housing. A
container should be placed to catch any excess oil that
may spill from the fill hole. If oil drains from the fill hole,
allow all excess to drain to achieve the proper fill level. If
no oil drains when marks are aligned, rotate coupling back
and add more oil. Repeat process until excess oil drains
and proper fill level is achieved.
CLOSE COUPLING
Mount the coupling hubs to the drive high-speed shaft and
motor shaft. Hubs are to be mounted flush with the end of
the shafts unless otherwise noted (coupling hubs may be
furnished with an interference fit). Mount the motor to the
bell housing, apply Loctite #242 or equivalent to fastener
threads, and tighten to proper torque. Install high-speed
coupling per coupling instructions.
GUARDS AND COVERS
Install bell housing covers (top and bottom). Install air
deflectors on the top, bottom and both sides of the gear
drive. The bends of the deflectors are perforated to allow
positioning of the deflectors. Air deflectors should be
positioned approximately 25 mm (1 inch) from the nearest
housing surface by bending deflector toward or away from
the drive.
TORQUE ARM
The carriage, adjusting rod, brackets and support bar are
furnished pre-assembled from the Factory. Assemble the
FEMALE
ROD END THREADED
SPACER ADJUSTING ROD
BRACKET
ADJUSTING
SCREW
CARRIAGE
PIN
LOCKING
PLATE
MALE
ROD END
FIGURE 3
SECTON A-A
FIGURE 4
178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
rod ends with heads perpendicular to each other (90°) as
shown in Figure 3. Rod end threads must be engaged a
minimum of one times the thread diameter. Attach female
rod end to carriage with pin. Place a spacer on each side
of the rod end. Secure pin with locking plate. Carriage may
be adjusted from center to either far end of the housing to
facilitate installation of pin.
Ensure that adjusting rod locking plate is NOT installed at
this time, as it will prevent adjustment of the torque arm
assembly. Assemble anchor bracket to male rod end with
a spacer on each side and secure with pin and retaining
ring.
LIFTING THE ALIGNMENT-FREE DRIVE
Lifting points are provided on the corners of the motor
end of the bell housing. See Figure 4. Lift by these and the
provisions provided on the drive housing itself to maneuver
the drive. DO NOT lift by the motor lifting eye.
MOUNTING THE DRIVE
Mount the Alignment-Free Drive to the driven equipment,
per pages 2 and 3 of this manual. With Alignment-Free
Drive assembly supported, rotate adjusting screw to
move torque arm to desired position and to line up with
foundation. Torque arm must be perpendicular in both
directions (± 1°). Adjust screw if not. Install locking plate
to lock the adjusting screw (plate can be installed on either
side). Remove support from drive and secure anchor
bracket to foundation. Use M24 Class 8.8 (1 inch Grade
5) or better fasteners with lock and flat washers to mount
anchor bracket. Slots are provided such that torque arm
can be mounted perpendicular.
CAUTION: Do NOT adjust torque arm screw after support
is removed and torque arm is under any load.
CARRIAGE
A PIN LOCKING
PLATE
BRACKET
JAM NUT SUPPORT BAR
RETAINING
PIN RING
MOUNTING ANCHOR
HARDWARE BRACKET
(SUPPLIED BY
CUSTOMER)
A SPACER
LIFT POINTS
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Appendix D
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 23 of 26)

Electric Fan Installation & Maintenance

INSTALLATION FIGURE 1
The installation and troubleshooting of electric cooling fans
are to be carried out by a qualified electrician according
to the applicable local, state, province and federal codes.
SINGLE PHASE 1 PHASE 220V - 50Hz
1 PHASE 220V - 50Hz
Inspect for any damage that may have occurred during TYPE - E 1 PHASE 110V - 60Hz
transit. Note: Electric fans require unimpeded airflow to 1 PHASE 220V - 60Hz
1 PHASE 240V - 60Hz
operate. Maintain a minimum of 25 mm (1.0”) clearance
between fan shroud and the closest obstruction (coupling
guard, etc.) for optimal perferance. Check all bolts, CAPACITOR
screws, set screws, etc. Retighten as required. Before
installing, rotate the blade to be sure it does not rub. Adjust
if necessary. Before installation, read the entire manual
carefully. This guide is pertinent only to electric fans
furnished by the Factory and branded as Multifan. (can be
verified from nameplate on the electric fan). In the event
the electric fan furnished by the Factory is of a special
nature (manufactured by an alternate fan manufacturer),
please contact the Factory for appropriate electric fan
installation and maintenance instructions. THERMAL
PROTECTON

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION L N (L2)

Warning: To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or
personal injury, observe the following:
1. Use this electric fan only in the manner intended by the
manufacturer. If you have any questions, contact the SINGLE PHASE 3 PHASE

Factory. TYPE - D 3 PHASE 220/380V - 50Hz

3 PHASE 230/400V - 50Hz
2. Before servicing or cleaning the fan, switch the power 3 PHASE 240/415V - 50Hz
off at the service panel and lock out to prevent the 3 PHASE 220/380V - 60Hz
power from being switched on accidentally. 3 PHASE 208/360V - 60Hz
3 PHASE 265/460V - 60Hz
3. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as well as
the National Electrical Code (NEC) and Occupational
Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
4. Fan motor must be securely and adequately grounded. B3

5. All working parts should be grounded.

6. When cleaning electrical equipment, always use an 250V B3
approved cleaning agent. See CLEANING in NOTES 10A
section, page 20. COS ψ=1

7. For general ventilation and cooling use only. DO NOT OPTION

THERMAL L1 L2 L3
use if hazardous or explosive materials and vapors are PROTECTION
present.
B3
GUIDELINES FOR INSTALLATION
Before connecting the electric fan, check if the information
on the fan motor name plate is in accordance with the 250V B3
actual main supply voltage, phase and frequency. 10A
COS ψ=1
Warning: To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or OPTION
personal injury, observe the following: L1 L2 L3
1. Switch off the main power supply and lock out before
installing, servicing or making connections to the fan.
2. Installation work and electrical wiring must be done by
a qualified person(s) in accordance with all applicable
codes and standards, including fire-rated construction.
3. The fan should be securely mounted. Recheck the
mounting hardware and tighten as necessary.
4. The fan motor must always be grounded. The
installation of a motor protection switch is
recommended. See Figure 1 for wiring diagrams.

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Appendix D • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 24 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277

5. Mount the motor guard if removed. The motor guard 10. Remove proper condensation plug. See Figure 3
must be installed at all times during operation to prevent below. Do not discard. Plug is to be used during
injury to personnel by rotating fan blade. cleaning.
6. Use liquid-tight electrical fittings and conduit.
FIGURE 3
7. A temperature switch is provided to control oil sump
temperature. See Figure 2 for proposed wiring. Mounting Positions
There are two separate circuits in the temperature For Position For Position Note: Never use
switch. The low circuit is to operate the electric fan. A&B C copper or brass
It is recommended the fan motor be operated by Remove Plug 1 Remove Plug 2 fastening materials

POSITION A
FIGURE 2 POSITION B POSITION C

PROPOSED TEMPERATURE SWITCH WIRING 1

DIAGRAM FOR ELECTRIC FANS

L1 L2 2
1
CONTROL VOLTAGE
SWITCH
FALK PART NO.
932716 - NEMA 4 & 13
LOW CIRCUIT NOTES
RED
MS
START FAN AIR SUPPLY AND TEMPERATURE — Sufficient air supply
PURPLE MOTOR
BLUE over the motor must be assured in all circumstances.
Limits of operating ambient temperature are 14°F to 113°F
(–10°C to 45°C).
SET AT 140°F
(60°C) RESTRICTION ON USE — Fan blade material
HIGH CIRCUIT is Polypropylene which is unsuitable and/or not
YELLOW recommended for certain chemicals. The following is a
BROWN partial list of unsuitable chemicals for guideline purposes.
ORANGE
ALARM OR MAIN MOTOR
CIRCUIT Chloro-Sulphonic Acid Nitric Acid Chloroform
SET AT 210°F
(100°C)
Mixture of HNO3-HCL Esters 1:2 Trichloroethylene
Mixture of HNO3-H2SO4 Benzene Trichloroethylene
Sulfuric Acid, fuming Gasoline Diethyl Ether
CUSTOMER WIRING MS = MOTOR STARTER
AND COMPONENTS Carbon Tetrachloride Toluene Chlorine, Liquid
Chlorobenzene Xylene
 AC RATING - INDUCTIVE LOAD - 50% PF
DC RATING - INDUCTIVE LOAD - L/R = 0.26
AC DC CLEANING — When cleaning fan, both condensation
VOLTS AMP VOLTS AMP holes (Figure 3, items 1 and 2) are to be temporarily
125 15 6-12 ** 15 plugged. If this is not done, guarantee is void. When
250 15 24 ** 5
480 15 125 0.05
cleaning electrical equipment, always use an approved
250 0.03 cleaning agent.
 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS CURRENT
∗∗ Reference only.

the temperature switch through a motor starter relay

(consult applicable local and national electrical codes).
The high circuit is provided to operate either a high
temperature alarm or main motor shutdown.
8. Connect power to the motor using an approved wiring
method. See Figure 1 for connection diagrams.
9. Before starting the fan, double-check to ensure there
are no obstructions that could interfere with proper
fan operation and airflow. Verify proper fan rotation,
resulting in air flow directed at the adjacent face of the
gear drive.

178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives • Appendix E
Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277 (Page 25 of 26)

Thrust Plate & Fastener Usage

Thrust plate usage is required for taper bushing shaft-
mounted drives. For additional information and assembly/
removal instruction refer to pages 3 through 5.

Table 1 — Metric & Inch Bore Bushings

Drive Retention Fasteners u Backing Bolt † Removal Bolt †
Size
mm Inch mm Inch mm
M107 M20 x 2.5 x 75 0.750-10UNC x 3.00 M20 x 2.5 x 30 0.750-10UNC x 1.25 M24 x 3 x 80
M117 M24 x 3 x 90 1.000-8UNC x 3.50 M24 x 3 x 40 1.000-8UNC x 1.50 M30 x 3.5 x 80
M127 M24 x 3 x 90 1.000-8UNC x 3.50 M24 x 3 x 40 1.000-8UNC x 1.50 M30 x 3.5 x 80
M133
M137 M24 x 3 x 90 1.000-8UNC x 3.50 M24 x 3 x 40 1.000-8UNC x 1.50 M30 x 3.5 x 80
M143
M145 M30 x 3.5 x 100 1.125-7UNC x 3.75 M30 x 3.5 x 50 1.125-7UNC x 1.75 M36 x 4 x 90
M147
M153
M155 M30 x 3.5 x 100 1.125-7UNC x 3.75 M30 x 3.5 x 50 1.125-7UNC x 1.75 M36 x 4 x 90
M157
M163
M165 M30 x 3.5 x 100 1.125 x 7UNC x 3.75 M30 x 3.5 x 50 1.125 x 7UNC x 1.75 M36 x 4 x 90
M167
u Retention fastener is factory-supplied (Class 8.8 metric & Grade 5 inch).
†† Backing and removal bolts are user-supplied (removal bolt Class 8.8 minimum).

Table 2 — Metric & Inch Bore Bushings

Drive Tightening Torque Removal Bolt Size & Max Tightening Torque Backing Bolt Size & Minimum
Bushing Size Retention Fastenersu
Size Minimum Length † Length †
Nm Ib-ft Nm Ib-ft
M173
M175 190-200 mm M24 x 3 x 220 mm 640 470 M30 x 3.5 x 200 mm 1355 1000 M24 x 3 x 45 mm
M177
M187 7.50-8.00 inch 1.250-7UNC x 9 inch 1400 1060 1.500-6UNC x 7.50 inch 1125 830 1.250-7UNC x 3.00 inch
u Retention fastener is factory-supplied (Class 8.8 metric & Grade 5 inch).
†† Backing and removal bolts are user-supplied (removal bolt Class 8.8 metric & Grade 5 inch minimum).

RETENTION FASTENER
5 mm, 0.20 INCHES

KEY

THREADED HOLE

REMOVAL BOLT

BACKING BOLT WITH FLAT WASHER(S)

AUXILIARY RELEASE SYSTEM - USER PROVIDED WHEN REQUIRED

LOOSEN BUSHING NUT AND REMOVE NUT RETAINING RING BEFORE USING
ADD FLAT WASHERS AT BACKING BOLT IF NEEDED

Rexnord 178-052
3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 August 2016
Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 04-15
Appendix F • Falk V-Class™ Model A Enclosed Gear Drives
(Page 26 of 26) Type V Series • Sizes M107 thru M277

AirMax Plus Breather Installation and Maintenance

Introduction
Breathers are required on enclosed equipment to equalize
the internal housing pressure as the drive or equipment
temperature changes during operation and idle time in
relation to the ambient temperature. As air is transferred in
and out to equalize pressure, the AirMax® Plus™ breather
provides contamination and moisture control preventing
contamination of the gear drive.

Installation Instructions
Breathers are shipped loose and must be installed prior to
drive or equipment operation. The following instructions are
for Falk AirMax Plus AM-HG-8 installation. See Figure 1 for
reference.

1. Remove airtight cap from bottom of breather

standpipe.
2. Red air vent plugs must be removed prior to operation
based on air flow requirements. Open air vents should
be 180° from each other. For ALL Falk/Rexnord gear
drives, remove two (2) plugs from the bottom air vents.
Figure 1
3. Install breather on gear drive. The breather threads
directly into a pipe tap hole or fitting. Hand-tighten
only to seal o-ring against pipe fitting.

Specifications
See Table 1 for breather specifications.

Table 1 – Falk AirMax Plus Specifications

Model
Product Specification
AM-HG-8
Max. Flow 2.50 cfm
Rate @ 1 psid 70.5 lpm
3µ absolute
Filtration
(β3 > 200)
Connection 1” NPT
Falk P/N 2930751

Maintenance
Falk AirMax Plus breathers have visual indication when
they need to be changed. As the breather functions, the
silica gel material changes color from blue to pink as it
absorbs moisture. When all the material has turned pink
in color, it is time to replace the breather. Life of breather
is dependent on operating conditions and ambient
conditions (humidity). Breather should be changed every
twelve (12) months regardless of color.

178-052 Rexnord
August 2016 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
Supersedes 04-15 Telephone: 513-455-5030 Fax: 414-937-4359 www.rexnord.com
 Falk® Gear Drives and Open Gearing
All Types (Page 1 of 4)
Falk Enclosed Gear Drives
(See Page 3 for Open Gearing, Spare Parts and Footnotes)
Information provided herein supplements instructions furnished
with the drive. These instructions are based on the use of the
products shown in footnotes on Page 3. Refer to the instructions
furnished with the product if other supplier’s products are used.
FACTORY SHIPPING PREPARATION — Enclosed gear drives
are protected against corrosion at the Factory prior to shipment
for the following periods after date of shipment (stamped on
drive nameplate):
Shelter -
Outdoor Outdoor 
Domestic Shipment of Standard Drives 0 Months 4 Months
Standard Drives Factory Prepared for
Long Term Storage 0 Months 12 Months
Export Shipments of Standard Drives
0 Months 12 Months
All Shipments of Custom Design,
Marine and High Speed Drives 0 Months 12 Months
CAUTION: DRIVES ARE NOT TO BE STORED OUTDOORS
WITHOUT SHELTER. STANDING WATER ON DRIVES
SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASES RISK OF WATER INGRESSION
AND RUST. INSTALLER ASSUMES RISK.
If the drive is stored OUTDOORS, position it on blocks. Build a
frame around it if possible and cover it with a tarpaulin. Leave
the bottom open for ventilation. DO NOT use a plastic cover.
(See Figure 1)
FIGURE 1
Inspect the storage condition of drives stored outdoors
every three (3) months to ensure area is dry, there is no
standing water on the drive and there is no apparent risk to
continued storage of drive. If possible, rotate the shafts one
quarter rotation (90 degrees)in order to prevent fretting (false
brinelling) in the gearing and bearings due to static vibrations.
If the gear drive is opened for any reason during the storage
period the customer is to protect inside of drive from moisture
and re-seal the drive as outlined in paragraph 1C through1E
of the Extended Storage section.
Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 128-014
Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2012
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 01-10
• Corrosion Protection
Drives prepared for Long Term Storage and Export are spin
tested with rust preventative oil , pressure tested, and charged
with vapor-phase rust inhibitor ‡ at the Factory. Informative tape
is applied to critical locations to deter unplanned breakage of
sealed condition. When lifted, this tape will leave the words
“VOID” on the gearbox in order to indicate that the long
term storage has been compromised. Shaft extension seals
are protected with a grease purge and exposed bare metal
coated with a polar type rust inhibiting compound . Unsealed
dipsticks and RTDs are shipped loose with the drive.
EXTENDED STORAGE — The following procedure is
recommended for drives stored beyond the initial Factory
Dry preparation period and must be inspected prior to expiration of
Building †
protection period which is based on the factory ship date that is
12 Months stamped on drive nameplate:
1. Maintenance Required for Extended Storage
24 Months
A. Inspect the external storage condition of drive every
24 Months three (3) months to ensure area is dry, there is no
standing water on the drive and there is no apparent
24 Months
risk to continued storage of drive. For external surfaces
protected at the Factory, inspect and protect scratched
surfaces as required, see Open Gearing and Spare
Parts, Extended Storage.
B. Remove inspection cover and inspect for internal water
contamination, rust or damage. Drain if necessary.
Rotate shafts to inspect gear teeth which had been in
contact and bearings for signs of surface rust. Should
minor surface rust be present remove visible rust and
increase inspection interval. Contact Factory for review
if necessary and note that internal bearing components
cannot be effectively inspected. Undetected rust poses
risk of start-up problems and/or reduced life.
C. If using mineral or PAO oils:
1. Recoat the internal components with rust preventative
oil .
2. Add vapor-phase rust inhibitor ‡ at the rate of one
ounce per cubic foot of internal drive space. For
drives that have oil installed, add vapor-phase rust
inhibitor at the rate of 2% of sump capacity.
D. If using GMAX or a PAG oil, ensure that the drive is
100% full to prevent corrosion.
E. Reseal drive and repeat every three (3) months until
drive is put into operation.
2. Start-Up After Storage
A. Remove all informative tape applied to sealed areas in
storage preparation.
B. Remove inspection cover and inspect for internal water
contamination, rust or damage. Drain if necessary.
Rotate shafts to inspect gear teeth which had been in
contact and bearings for signs of surface rust. Should
minor surface rust be present remove visible rust.
Contact Factory for review if necessary.
C. If components such as dipsticks and breathers have
been shipped loose with the drive, remove the plugs and
install them. Contact Factory for installation instructions
for loose-shipped RTDs.
D. If using mineral or PAO oils, vapor-phase rust inhibitor
is soluble in recommended lubricating oils and need
not be flushed from the drive. GMAX or PAG oils are
not compatible with the vapor-phase rust inhibitor. If
Corrosion Protection • Falk® Gear Drives and Open Gearing
(Page 2 of 4) All Types
the drive has been stored with rust inhibitor, it must be
flushed per oil manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. If the drive has been prepared for Extended Storage with
GMAX, remove the standpipe and reduce the oil in the
drive to the recommended operating level.
F. Refer to individual Manuals furnished with the drive for
recommended lubricants and instructions for installation
and maintenance. Note: For Type A, AB, Y and YB
drives, the oil troughs must be primed as instructed
in the installation instructions.
CUSTOMER INTERMITTENT STORAGE — (1 to 6 months) -
The following procedure is recommended when a drive is not
used for prolonged periods. Examples of intermittent storage
are Winter Lay Up for marine applications, Power Plant outages
between commissioning and start up, and spare drives.
1. Customer Preparation for Storage
A. Drain all moisture from the drive and check for damage
if water was present. Remove all visible surface rust. If
rust cannot be removed contact Falk Renew for a full
inspection/repair of your drive.
B. If using mineral or PAO oils and the drive has been
drained of oil, add vapor-phase rust inhibitor ‡ at the
rate of one ounce per cubic foot of internal drive space.
For drives that have not been drained of oil, add vapor-
phase rust inhibitor at the rate of 2% of sump capacity.
C. GMAX and PAG oils are not compatible with a vapor-
phase rust inhibitor. If using GMAX or PAG, fill the
drive 100% to prevent corrosion. A stand pipe must
be attached to the top of the drive to allow for oil
expansion.
D. Seal the drive completely by tightening all gauges and
plugs, remove all vented dipsticks and breathers and
replace them with plugs; or carefully seal air vents and the
area around the dip stick with pressure sensitive tape .
E. Drain all water from any attached cooling system.
F. Remove all moisture from shaft areas near the oil seals
and purge the grease cavities or wrap tape  against
the seals so that corrosion does not take place near or
under the seal area.
G. After three months, inspect the external storage
condition of drive to ensure area is dry, there is no
standing water on the drive and there is no apparent risk
to continued storage of drive.
H. After three months, remove inspection cover and inspect
for internal water contamination, rust or damage. Drain
if necessary. Rotate shafts to inspect gear teeth which
had been in contact and bearings for signs of surface
rust. Should minor surface rust be present remove visible
rust and increase inspection interval. Contact Factory for
review if necessary.
128-014 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200
October 2012 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
Supersedes 01-10 www.rexnord.com
I. If using mineral or PAO oils:
1. Recoat the internal components with rust preventative oil .
2. Add vapor-phase rust inhibitor ‡ at the rate of one
ounce per cubic foot of internal drive space. For
drives that have oil installed, add vapor-phase rust
inhibitor at the rate of 2% of sump capacity.
J. GMAX and PAG oils are not compatible with a vapor-
phase rust inhibitor. If using GMAX or a PAG, fill the
drive 100% full to prevent corrosion. A stand pipe
must be attached to the top of the unit to allow for oil
expansion.
K. Reseal drive and repeat every three (3) months until
drive is put into operation.
2. Start-Up After Storage
A. Remove all tape applied in storage preparation.
B. Remove inspection cover and inspect for internal water
contamination, rust or damage. Drain if necessary.
Rotate shafts to inspect gear teeth which had been in
contact and bearings for signs of surface rust. Should
minor surface rust be present remove visible rust and
increase inspection interval. Contact Factory for review
if necessary and note that internal bearing components
cannot be effectively inspected. Undetected rust poses
risk of start up problems and/or reduced life.
C. If components such as dipsticks and breathers have
been removed from the drive, remove the plugs and
install them.
D. If using mineral or PAO oils, vapor-phase rust inhibitor
is soluble in recommended lubricating oils and need
not be flushed from the drive. GMAX or PAG oils are
not compatible with the vapor-phase rust inhibitor. If
the drive has been stored with rust inhibitor, it must be
flushed per oil manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. If the drive has been prepared for Extended Storage with
GMAX, remove the standpipe and reduce the oil in the
drive to the recommended operating level.
F. Refer to individual Manuals furnished with the drive for
recommended lubricants and instructions for installation
and maintenance. Note: For Type A, AB, Y and YB
drives, the oil troughs must be primed as instructed
in the installation instructions.
 Falk® Gear Drives and Open Gearing • Corrosion Protection
All Types (Page 3 of 4)

Falk Open Gearing & Spare Parts STORAGE REMOVAL — After storage, remove all applied
tape and protective coverings. Remove firm film forming polar
FACTORY SHIPPING PREPARATION — Open gearing and
type rust inhibitor by swabbing and scrubbing with kerosene,
spare parts are protected at the Factory prior to shipment for
mineral spirits, No. 2 fuel oil aromatic xylol, or Stoddards
the following periods:
solvent in a well ventilated area.
++ Drive raised on blocks, a frame built around it if possible, and covered with
Shelter - Dry a tarpaulin. DO NOT use plastic material, and leave the bottom open for
Outdoor Outdoor  Building † ventilation.
†† A shelter closed off from rain and snow, where there is no standing water.
Open Gearing 0 Months 18 Months 30 Months ‡‡ Nox-Rust VCl-10 or Motorstor, Daubert Chemical Company.
Small Parts of Assemblies in zz Permacel Pressure Sensitive Tape, Permacel Corporation.
Corrugated, Paper or Wooden Boxes 0 Months 0 Months 24 Months
„„ Rust Veto 344, Houghton International Inc.
 Nox-Rust Water Repellent Vapor Paper No. 8OD, Daubert Chemical
Company. Listings of other manufacturer’s products and prices in Falk
literature does not constitute an endorsement or warranty of the product by
Small parts and assemblies which are packaged for shipment Rexnord. Refer to the original manufacturer for application recommendations,
service and current prices.
in corrugated, paper, or wooden boxes are only protected for 44 Mobilarma 524, Mobil Oil Company
shipment in a covered carrier and for indoor storage in a dry
building.
EXTENDED STORAGE — For storage beyond the standard
periods, the following procedures are recommended:
1. Gearing, Shafts, Metallic Coupling Components,
Gear Shaft Assemblies — Thoroughly coat all
assemblies and other metallic parts which are not
protected by painting, plating, etc. with a firm film
forming polar type rust inhibitor compound .
2. Gear Shaft Assemblies With Attached Bearings —
Grease bearings, cover bearings with Nox-Rust Vapor
Paper , cover vapor paper with plastic sheeting and
tape completely. Coat the gear shaft assembly with a
firm film forming polar type rust inhibitor compound.
DO NOT coat the plastic sheeting covering the
bearings.
3. Small Metallic Components And Hardware — Wrap
parts that are not protected by painting, plating, etc.
in water repellent vapor-phase rust inhibitor paper and
seal with pressure sensitive tape. In lieu of rust inhibitor
paper, place the hardware in plastic bags containing
vapor-phase rust inhibiting type oil ‡ at the rate of 0.3
ounce per cubic foot of space. Seal plastic bags with
pressure sensitive tape.
4. Rubber Elements — Keep out of direct sunlight and
DO NOT coat the rubber elements of couplings in any
way.
5. All Stored Components — On a monthly basis,
inspect for corrosion due to scratched coatings or ripped
plastic bags.

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200 128-014

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2012
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 01-10
Corrosion Protection Maintenance Log • Falk® Gear Drives and Open Gearing
(Page 4 of 4) All Types

CORROSION PROTECTION MAINTENANCE LOG

If this drive has been prepared for long term storage by Rexnord, this maintenance log can be used to record the maintenance of
corrosion protecton in a Falk gear drive and the steps taken to properly put the drive into service. Refer to Pages 1-3 of this Manual
128-014 for storage requirements. The information below has been provided as a supplement and does not replace or supersede the
storage or operation requirements stated in this Manual 128-014. Contact Rexnord at phone number 866-REXNORD with questions
concerning this information.

GEAR DRIVE IDENTIFICATION & SHIPMENT
STORAGE
The gear drive is provided with an internal preservation agent. To keep
the warranty intact, the drive must remain sealed during to retain the
preservation agent or the effectiveness of the preservation agent will
be compromised. DO NOT install breather or remove the dipstick,
inspection cover, etc during storage period.
Refer to Manual 128-014. The gear drive must be kept dry. Indoor
storage is recommended. If stored outdoors, cover with tarpaulin and
allow sufficient air circulation to prevent accumulation of condensation.
Refer to Manual 128-014. Internal preservation agent MUST be
replenished in this drive twelve (12) months after the Rexnord ship date
if stored in a sheltered outdoor location. (See drive nameplate for ship
date.) The internal preservation agent MUST be replenished in twenty four
(24) months after the Rexnord ship date if stored indoors. If not operated
within three (3) months, this replenishment process must be repeated.
Visually inspect the drive and, if possible, rotate the shafts every three
months. Refer to Manual 128-014.
Use this form to document this activity, retain this record.
INSPECTION
If the drive is not commissioned within the factory-prepared long term
storage period, the equipment must be inspected and prepared for
additional storage.
This procedure must be repeated every three (3) months until the drive is
commissioned.
Prior to operation, inspection by manufacturer’s rep is recommended.
Three months prior to planned operation, contact Rexnord at phone
number 866-REXNORD to schedule this inspection.
See nameplate on gearbox for the following identification information:
Rexnord order number M.O.:
Gear box identification number:
Gear drive shipped from Rexnord on ___/___/_______.
Visual inspection of unit to occur every three months during storage:
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
Replenishment of internal preservation agent occurred on:
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______________ (signature)
Storage is sheltered outdoors (12 months) or indoors (24 months) (circle
one). First inspection/preparation required on ___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY)
Dates of inspection by Rexnord representative:
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______ (signature)
for re-prep for additional storage or pre-operational inspection (circle one)
___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______ (signature)
for re-prep for additional storage or pre-operational inspection (circle one)

___/___/___ (MM/DD/YY) by _______ (signature)

for re-prep for additional storage or pre-operational inspection (circle one)
PRE-OPERATION
Oil requirements: See drive nameplate which specifies the type and Indicate oil used in gearbox.
viscosity of the operating oil required. Manufacturer: ______
After using the nameplate to determine the type of oil required, refer Brand: ____________
to the installation and maintenance manual to select an approved Type: _____________
manufacturer and brand of oil. Viscosity:__________
Contact Rexnord at phone number 866-REXNORD to determine if
manufacturers representative will be on site during start-up of drive.

OPERATION
After break in period, drain and refill drive with approved oil. See First operation of this drive occurred on ___/___/___
installation and maintenance manual.
For warranty tracking purposes, after initial operation of gearbox owner /
end-user must retain this form and send a copy to:

Rexnord Industries, LLC

3001 W. Canal St.
Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200

After initial break in period, oil replaced on ___/___/___

128-014 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200

October 2012 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
Supersedes 01-10 www.rexnord.com
Gear AirMax and AirMaxPlus Overview

Falk AirMax & AirMaxPlus

Minimize Wear and Optimize Drive Life
AirMaxPlus AM-HG
The Best Protection for Washdown and High Humidity
Applications
The AM-HG is the most advanced AirMax Plus filter, providing the highest level of moisture and
contamination control features. The AM-HG adds an expansion chamber system with diaphragm and
check valves to the high level of moisture and contaminant protection found in other AirMax filters.

AirMax Plus AM-HG breathers attack the source of contamination, allowing your gearbox and
lubricants to run longer with reduced maintenance and downtime.

Comes in two sizes for small and large volume applications.

Key Benefits
• Prevents moisture ingression into the
gear drive
• Easy to identify when filter needs to be
replaced based on color changes
• Improved lubricant performance,
reducing downtime and repair costs
• Eliminates rust-forming condensation
• Prevents sludge deposits and water-
contaminated oil
• Long life

Features
• Bi-directional controlled airflow
• Strong polycarbonate housing
• Vapor-absorbent desiccant material
• Ideal for washdown and high humidity
applications
• Check valves ensure no excess pressure
or vacuum builds
• Scheduled changeout every year or as
indicated by desiccant color change
Simple, Dependable
Lubricant Protection

How it Works: As wet, dirty air is drawn through the unit, multiple 3-micron polyester
filter elements remove solid particulate, and the color-indicating silica gel extracts moisture.

The diaphragm allows for expansion/contraction of the air within the casing as a result of
temperature variations during steady-state operations.

When air is expelled from the container, the top foam pad prevents oil mist from contacting silica
gel or entering the atmosphere. The hygroscopic agent is partially reactivated by the dry air passing
back through.

Foam Pad
Reduces oil mist that contacts
silica gel during exhalation and
ensures outgoing air is evenly
disbursed through the filters
and desiccant.
REXNORD P/N 10096606
Expansion Chamber
The diaphragm allows AM-HG-8
for expansion and
contraction of the air
within the casing as a Model Number HG-1 HG-8
Water Vapor result of temperature
variations during steady- 7.22 inches / 9.75 inches /
Adsorbent Height
Silica gel absorbs water state operations. 183 mm 247.6 mm
from incoming air. 2.52 inches / 4.1 inches /
Indicates condition by Diameter
change of color from 64 mm 104.1 mm
blue to pink.
Shipping .58 lbs 1.81 lbs
Weight (unit) .26 kg .82 kg
Amount of 0.28lbs / .125 kg .053 lbs / 0.24 kg
Desiicant
Adsorption 1.68 fl oz. / 4.05 fl oz. /
Capacity 49.6 mL 120 mL
Filter Element
Second polyester Max. Flow Rate
filter element protects
against any migration (cfm) 1.41 @ PSID 2.5 @ 1 PSID
of desiccant. (lpm) 39.93 70.5
Resilient
Filtration ( 200) 3u absolute 3u absolute
Polycarbonate Body
Shock absorbing, Operating -20° F to 200° F -20° F to 200° F
clear casing provides Temp. Range -29° C to 93° C -29° C to 93° C
reliable service and easy Quad Check Valves
maintenance breather life. Provides system Hydrophilic
pressurization, Silica Gel Silica Gel
Agent
protecting system
integrity. Plugs keep Filter Media Polyester Polyester
unit inactive until use.
3/8 inches
Connection Size 1 inch threaded
threaded
Filter Element
Patented polyester filter Body Material Polyester Polyester
element removes airborne Threaded Mounting
contamination to 3-micron Part # 2932619 2930751
Easily replaces
absolute. Unique loops allow
particles to release during
standard filler/
system exhalation, helping to breather cap with one
increase breather life. of two adapters.
Intermittent Running
Air
Washdown AirMax AirMax Plus AM-2 AirMax Plus AM-HG-1 AirMax Plus AM-HG-8
Volume
Yes √ √
> 200 ft
3
√
< 200 ft
3
High Contamination - Low Humidity √ •
No High Contamination - Average Humidity √ √ √
High Contamination - High Humidity • √ √
Normal √

√ Recommended
• Acceptable

AirMaxPlus AM-HG-8
 866-REXNORD/866-739-6673 (Within the US))
414-643-2366 (Outside the US)
www.rexnord.com

Why Choose Rexnord?

When it comes to providing highly engineered products that
improve productivity and efficiency for industrial applications
worldwide, Rexnord is the most reliable in the industry.
Commitment to customer satisfaction and superior value
extend across every business function.
Delivering Lowest Total Cost of Ownership
The highest quality products are designed to help
prevent equipment downtime and increase productivity
and dependable operation.
Valuable Expertise
An extensive product offering is accompanied by global sales
specialists, customer service and maintenance support teams,
available anytime.
Solutions to Enhance Ease of Doing Business
Commitment to operational excellence ensures the right
products at the right place at the right time.

Rexnord Corporation
Rexnord is a growth-oriented, multi-platform industrial company with leading market
shares and highly trusted brands that serve a diverse array of global end markets.

Process and Motion Control

The Rexnord Process and Motion Control platform designs, manufactures, markets
and services specified, highly engineered mechanical components used within complex
systems where our customers’ reliability requirements and the cost of failure or
downtime are extremely high.

Water Management
The Rexnord Water Management platform designs, procures, manufactures
and markets products that provide and enhance water quality, safety, flow
control and conservation.

©2014 Rexnord 111-210  Printed in USA 01/14

Falk® AirMax® Plus™ Breathers
Installation Manual

How to Use this Manual

This manual provides detailed instructions on installation and maintenance of
AirMax® Plus™ breathers for Falk® Gear Drives or other equipment.

Introduction
Breathers are required on enclosed equipment to equalize the internal housing
pressure as the drive or equipment temperature changes during operation and
idle time in relation to the ambient temperature. As air is transferred in and out to
equalize pressure, the AirMax Plus breather provides contamination and moisture
control preventing contamination of the gear drive or other equipment.

Installation Instructions
Breathers are shipped loose and must be installed prior to drive or equipment
operation. The following instructions are for Falk AirMax Plus AM-2, AM-HG-1 and
AM-HG-8 installation. See Figure 1 for reference.

1. Remove airtight cap from bottom of breather standpipe.

2. Red air vent plugs must be removed prior to operation based on air flow
requirements. Open air vents should be 180° from each other.
A. For ALL Falk/Rexnord gear drives – remove two (2) plugs from the
bottom air vents. Figure 1
B. Other equipment – See Table 1 based on air flow requirements of
equipment for plug removal.
3. Install breather on gear drive or other equipment. The breather threads Specifications
directly into a pipe tap hole or fitting. Hand-tighten only to seal o-ring against
pipe fitting. See Table 2 for breather specifications.

Table 1 – Air Vent Holes to Open Table 2 – Falk AirMax Plus Specifications
Air Flow @ 1psid Vents to Open Product Model
0 – 4 cfm / 0 – 113 lpm 2 Specification AM-2 AM-HG-1 AM-HG-8
4 – 8 cfm / 113 – 226 lpm 4 Max. Flow 16 cfm 1.41 cfm 2.50 cfm
8 – 12 cfm / 226 – 339 lpm 6 Rate @ 1 psid 453 lpm 39.9 lpm 70.5 lpm
12 – 16 cfm / 339 – 453 lpm 8 Filtration 3µ absolute, (ß3 > 200)
Connection 1” NPT 3/8” NPT 1” NPT
Falk P/N 2931427 2932619 2930751

Maintenance
Falk AirMax Plus breathers have visual indication when they need to be changed.
As the breather functions, the silica gel material changes color from blue to pink
as it absorbs moisture. When all the material has turned pink in color, it is time
to replace the breather. Life of breather is dependent on operating conditions and
ambient conditions (humidity). Breather should be changed every twelve (12)
months regardless of color.

Rexnord Corporation GR3-002

Telephone: 414-342-3131 May 2012
www.rexnord.com New
LOW-PROFILE INDUSTRIAL-GRADE
ACCELEROMETERS REXNORD P/N 10097520

⻬ Corrosion Resistant Mounting screw

included!
⻬ Reverse Wiring ACC787A
Protection
⻬ Ground Isolated
⻬ ESD Protection
The OMEGAROMETER™ Series
accelerometers are designed for
industrial vibration measurements. Connector: 2 pin, MIL-C-5015 style
Connections: ACC787A,
They feature a hermetically sealed ACC-CB7-10WP cable,
316L SS case suitable for harsh Pin A: Power/signal
Pin B: Common shown smaller than actual size.
environments. The ACC787A is a
general purpose model with a side Mating Connector:
Amphenol 97-3106A-10SL-4S type ACC787A Side View
cable exit.
Recommended Cabling: ACC-CB7-10 Dimensions: 11 (7/16) hex head
SPECIFICATIONS NOTES: 1 To minimize signal distortion when mm (in)
DYNAMIC driving long cables or high-vibration signals,
24 to 30 Vdc powering is recommended. The
Sensitivity, ±10%, 25°C (77°F): higher-level constant current source should 26.42
100 mV/g be used when driving long cables. (1.04)
Acceleration Range1: 80 g peak 2
A maximum current of 6 mA is 31.24
(1.23)
Amplitude Non-Linearity: 1% recommended for operating temperatures
above 100 °C (212°F).

DYNAMIC MEASUREMENT
Frequency Response: 2 pin connector
±10%: 1.0 to 5000 Hz 23.37 MIL-C-5015
±3 dB: 0.7 to 10,000 Hz (0.92)
TYPICAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE 6.35
Resonance Frequency: 3 (.25)
22 kHz 2 Side View
Deviation, dB

Transverse Sensitivity, 1
Max: 5% of axial 0 ACC787A Bottom View
Temperature Response: –1

See graph –2 13.97

1/4-28
–3 (0.55) R
ELECTRICAL 0.7 10 100 1k 10k mounting
Frequency, Hz thread
Power Requirement:
Voltage Source1: 25.15
18 to 30 Vdc TYPICAL TEMPERATURE RESPONSE
20 (0.99)
Current Regulating Diode1, 2:
Deviation, %

10
2 to 10 mA
Electrical Noise, Equiv.
g Nominal:
0

–10
36.58
(1.44)
53.34 (2.10)
K
Broadband: 2.5 Hz to –20
25 kHz: 700 µg –20 0 25 50 80 120

Spectral: Temperature, °C Bottom View

10 Hz: 10 µg/公Hz
100 Hz: 5 µg/公Hz IN STOCK FOR FAST DELIVERY!
1000 Hz: 5 µg/公Hz
Output Impedance, Max: 100 Ω To Order (Specify Model Number)
Bias Output Voltage, Nominal: 12 Vdc MODEL NO. PRICE DESCRIPTION
Grounding: Isolated case, ACC787A $ General purpose accelerometer with side exit connector
internally shielded
ENVIRONMENTAL ACC787A includes captive mounting screw and calibration data. Specify cable separately;
see Accessories.
Temperature Range: -50 to 120°C
(-58 to 248°F) ACCESSORIES
Vibration Limit: 500 g peak MODEL NO. PRICE DESCRIPTION
Shock Limit: 5000 g peak
ACC-CB7-10 $ 3.05 m (10') MIL/BNC twisted-pair shielded cable
Electromagnetic Sensitivity,
Equiv. g, Max: 70 µg/gauss ACC-CB7-10WP 3.05 m (10') waterproof twisted-pair shielded cable
Sealing: Hermetic to 10-8 cc/s ACC-B3-1 Magnetic mounting base for flat surfaces, 40 lbf
Base Strain Sensitivity, Max: ACC-B5 Magnetic mounting base for curved surfaces, 30 lbf
0.002 g/microstrain
PHYSICAL ACC-PS2 Rechargeable power supply with built-in amplifier
Weight: 145 g (5.1 oz) ACC-PS 115 Vac power supply
Case Material: 316L SS Note: See pages K-20 through K-22 for details on the above power supplies and cables.
Mounting: 1⁄4-28 captive hex head screw Ordering Example: ACC787A, accelerometer, ACC-CB7-10, cable, ACC-B3-1, mounting
with 1.2 mm (0.046") diameter safety base, and ACC-PS2, power supply (typical system), $245 + 60 + 125 + 530 = $960.
wire hole
K-8
One Omega Drive | Stamford, CT 06907 | 1-888-TC-OMEGA (1-888-826-6342) | info@omega.com

www.omega.com
UNITED KINGDOM
www. omega.co.uk
Manchester, England
0800-488-488

UNITED STATES FRANCE

www.omega.com www.omega.fr
1-800-TC-OMEGA Guyancourt, France
Stamford, CT. 088-466-342

CANADA CZECH REPUBLIC

www.omega.ca www.omegaeng.cz
Laval(Quebec) Karviná, Czech Republic
1-800-TC-OMEGA 596-311-899

GERMANY BENELUX
www.omega.de www.omega.nl
Deckenpfronn, Germany Amstelveen, NL
0800-8266342 0800-099-33-44

More than 100,000 Products Available!

Temperature
Calibrators, Connectors, General Test and Measurement
Instruments, Glass Bulb Thermometers, Handheld Instruments
for Temperature Measurement, Ice Point References,
Indicating Labels, Crayons, Cements and Lacquers, Infrared
Temperature Measurement Instruments, Recorders Relative
Humidity Measurement Instruments, RTD Probes, Elements
and Assemblies, Temperature & Process Meters, Timers and
Counters, Temperature and Process Controllers and Power
Switching Devices, Thermistor Elements, Probes and
Assemblies,Thermocouples Thermowells and Head and Well
Assemblies, Transmitters, Wire
Flow and Level
Air Velocity Indicators, Doppler Flowmeters, Level
Measurement, Magnetic Flowmeters, Mass Flowmeters,
Pitot Tubes, Pumps, Rotameters, Turbine and Paddle Wheel
Flowmeters, Ultrasonic Flowmeters, Valves, Variable Area
Flowmeters, Vortex Shedding Flowmeters
pH and Conductivity
Conductivity Instrumentation, Dissolved Oxygen
Instrumentation, Environmental Instrumentation, pH
Electrodes and Instruments, Water and Soil Analysis
Instrumentation
Data Acquisition
Auto-Dialers and Alarm Monitoring Systems,
Communication Products and Converters, Data
Acquisition and Analysis Software, Data Loggers
Plug-in Cards, Signal Conditioners, USB, RS232, RS485
and Parallel Port Data Acquisition Systems, Wireless
Transmitters and Receivers
Pressure, Strain and Force
Displacement Transducers, Dynamic Measurement
Force Sensors, Instrumentation for Pressure and Strain
Measurements, Load Cells, Pressure Gauges, Pressure
Reference Section, Pressure Switches, Pressure Transducers,
Proximity Transducers, Regulators,
Strain Gages, Torque Transducers, Valves
Heaters
Band Heaters, Cartridge Heaters, Circulation Heaters,
Comfort Heaters, Controllers, Meters and Switching
Devices, Flexible Heaters, General Test and Measurement
Instruments, Heater Hook-up Wire, Heating Cable
Systems, Immersion Heaters, Process Air and Duct,
Heaters, Radiant Heaters, Strip Heaters, Tubular Heaters

click here to go to the omega.com home page

EPG05
 REX P/N 10097280

Sensors with Configuration Code GP03

Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies
Connection Heads with General-Purpose Connection Heads
Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies with General-Purpose Connection Heads are designed for use with various thermowell types.
Complete assemblies can be ordered by selecting the RTD assembly below, the thermowell from the thermowell section of this catalog, and a
temperature transmitter from the back of this section. Assemblies without a thermowell can be ordered by selecting the sensor assembly from
this page and inserting the "S" length in table 2-0. These sensors are supplied with a 316 stainless steel sheath and are available in various
tolerances and temperature ranges as noted in the tables below. Note: The "S" dimension will measure 1/4" longer than specified when the spring
is in the relaxed postition. The "S" dimension is calculated when the sensor is compressed or in the installed position. This design allows 1/4"
spring compression to ensure positive contact with the bottom of the thermowell.

S
1/4"
1/4" S E

R1T185L483-S4E0461T2-SL-6HN31
ORDER CODES
1-0 1-1 1-2 2-0 3-0 4-0 4-1 4-2
Example Order Number: R1T185L 48 3 - Select Thermowell Part # or
Insert 3 Digit Length Code
- SL - 8HN 31, T- Select Type and Range
from back of section

1-0 100 Ω Platinum RTD Elements

α = 0.003 85 ºC -1 4-0 Head Mounting Fittings
CODE TOLERANCE [1] CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
LOW RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 200) ºC STEEL FITTINGS 316SS FITTINGS
SINGLE DUPLEX 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple
6HN 8HN
R1T185L R1T285L Grade B 1" length 1" length
R5T185L R5T285L (1/5) Class B 1/2" NPT pipe nipple 1/2" NPT pipe nipple
6PN3 8PN_
LOW RANGE THIN FILM (-50 to 200) ºC (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)
RBF185L RBF285L Class B 1/2" NPT union/nipple 1/2" NPT union/nipple
6PU_ [1]
8PU_ [1]

RAF185L RAF285L Class A (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)

HIGH RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 600) ºC PYROMATION

[1] 4" Minimum length required P/N: RBF185L483-S4D0608-SL-8PU422
R1T185H R1T285H Grade B 4-1 Head and Sheath Terminations
SPEC NO:
RAT185H RAT285H Class A CODE DESCRIPTION
[1] Refer to RTD tolerance information in the 22 3" IndividualFOR:
fluoropolymer leads with terminal pins
General Information section for calculations to
31 Aluminum screw-cover head PYROMATION, INC.
TOLERANCES
determine specific tolerance at temperature.
SPEC NO: TITLE: FRACTION DIM = ±1/32"
34 Cast iron screw-cover head
CATALOG PAGE GP-3, FIGURE A
1-1 Sheath Diameters DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010"
HART Field Transmitter
(4 to 20) mASIZE: ®
with
DWG. DECIMAL
NO. & aluminum
SHEET general-
NO: = ±0.005"
REV.
CODE DIAMETERS (inches) 316 SS 35T-642A DIM .XXX

A B272101
purpose housing = ±2°
38 3/16 TOLERANCES ANGULAR DIM
(4 to 20) mA dual input HART® transmitter
Thiswith digital is
document display and
PROPRIETARY to
36T82-D10
48 1/4 FRACTION DIM = ±1/32" general-purpose
DRAWNaluminum
BY: housing with glass
DATE: lidPyromation, Inc.
DECIMAL DIM .XX J. BROWN
= 49±0.010"Flip-top aluminum head 4/12/2011
2-0 DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005"
1-2 Element 63 White polypropylene screw-cover head
Select thermowellANGULAR DIM = ±2°
Connection 91 316 L stainless steel screw-cover head
part number from This document is PROPRIETARY to
CODE DESCRIPTION Pyromation,4-2
Inc. Options FORT WAYNE, INDIANA 260-484-2580
Thermowell Section,
2 2-wire element or specify 3 digit "S" W[1] Epoxy Coating
3 3-wire element length in inches if no
thermowell is required. GS Ground screw
4[1] 4-wire element
I Stainless tag
[1] Not available in duplex or NB 1/2" NPT nylon conduit reducer bushing
with 440 Series Transmitter
SB 1/2" NPT conduit reducer bushing
3-0 Element Options T-440 (4 to 20) mA head-mounted RTD transmitter
CODE DESCRIPTION T-441 (4 to 20) mA isolated head-mounted transmitter
SL [1]
Spring-loaded element T-442 (4 to 20) mA isolated HART® head-mounted transmitter

SC Self-contained spring-loaded element T82-00 (4 to 20) mA dual input HART® head-mounted transmitter
See transmitter ordering information in back of section.
Self-contained spring-loaded element with
SN [1] Available with option 31 only.
Buna-N oil seal 121°C [250°F] 100 PSI Max.
[1] Not available with option 35T-642A HART® is a registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

371-4 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GP-3
 REX P/N 10097280
Configuration Code TW01
THERMOWELLS Drilled Thermowells

The drilled thermowells listed below are those most commonly found in process applications. Other types and styles
are listed later in this section. The thermowells listed below are available as separate component wells and can
be ordered by the code numbers listed below. They can also be ordered as a part of a complete sensor assembly.
Consult factory for wells with different mounting threads, lengths, and materials.
STANDARD-DUTY WELLS STRAIGHT-SHANK, SOCKET-WELD

1/4" S 1/4" S
P
BORE SIZE Q BORE SIZE Q P
1/2 NPT 1/2 NPT

V 2 1/2" U 1 3/4" + T
U 1" T 3/4"
(OPTIONAL)

HEAVY-DUTY WELLS WELD-IN WELLS

1/4" S 1/4" S
P
BORE SIZE Q BORE SIZE P
1/2 NPT 1/2 NPT

V V U 1 3/4" + T
U 1" T 3/4"
(OPTIONAL)

R1T185L483-S4E0461T2-SL-6HN31
ORDER CODES
1-0 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6

Example Order Number: S 4 D 06 08 T2 S

PYROMATION P/N: S4D0908T2(1/2)
1-0 Well Type 1-6 Well Options
CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
S Standard-duty threaded (NPT) C8 316 stainless steel well cap and chain
FOR: F
H Heavy-duty threaded (NPT) C22 PYROMATION,
Brass well cap and chain INC.
SPEC NO: TITLE: SPEC NO: T
SW Straight-shank, socket-weld Customer specified
CATALOG part TW-2,
PAGE number marked onA
FIGURE
S
the thermowell - (10 digit maximum)
WI Weld-in SIZE: DWG. NO. & SHEET NO: REV.

1-1 Bore Size 1-2 Pipe Size "P"

TOLERANCES
±1/32"
A B276501 = ±1/32"
A
TOLERANCES
FRACTION DIM 1-5 DRAWN
= Optional
BY: "T" Lag Dimension
PYROMATION P/N: FRACTION
DATE: DIM
H4D0908T2(1/2) D
DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010" J. BROWN 4/25/2011
DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010"
CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005" DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005"
4 0.260 Dia. Bore C 1/2" Pipe [1]
ANGULAR DIM = ±2° Leave blank if No Lag is required ANGULAR DIM = ±2°
OM NPT CALLOUT A REMOVED JB INCH MARK (") FROM NPT CALLOUT & CORRECTED "V" TO "Q"
D 5/25/2011
3/4" Pipe This document is PROPRIETARY to FOR:
JB 5/25/2011 This document is PROPRIETARY to F
ON REV BY DATE DESCRIPTION
Pyromation, Inc. T2 2" LagWAYNE,
FORT standard onDATE
6" well
INDIANA
BY PYROMATION, 260-484-2580
Pyromation, Inc.
E 1" Pipe INC.
SPEC NO: T3 3" Lag
TITLE: standard on 9, 12, 15,SPEC
18, 24"
NO:wells T
[1] Only available with well type S or H CATALOG PAGE TW-2, FIGURE C
Special Lag specify "T" dimension in
1-3 Length Dimensions (inches) T__ SIZE: DWG. NO. & SHEET NO: REV.
inches

CODE
"S" "U" DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS NO LAG WITH STANDARD
TOLERANCES
±1/32"
A B276701 = ±1/32"
TOLERANCES
FRACTION DIM
LAG = 1-4 Material
DRAWN BY: FRACTION DIM
DATE: D
DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010" J. BROWN DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010"
4/26/2011
04 4 2(1/2) N/A DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005"
CODE DESCRIPTION DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005"
ANGULAR DIM = ±2° ANGULAR DIM = ±2°
06 6A 4(1/2)REMOVED
2(1/2)INCH MARK (") FROM NPT CALLOUT 8 316 stainless steel
This document is PROPRIETARY to
JB 5/25/2011 This document is PROPRIETARY to
09 9
REV 7(1/2) 4(1/2) DESCRIPTIONPyromation, Inc. 61 A105 Carbon
FORT BY Steel
WAYNE, DATE
INDIANA 260-484-2580
Pyromation, Inc.

12 12 10(1/2) 7(1/2)
15 15 13(1/2) 10(1/2)
18 18 16(1/2) 13(1/2)
24 24 22(1/2) 19(1/2)

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

TW-2 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com 90-9
 General RTD Specifications

Element Connections
Two-Wire: Provides one connection to each end of the element. This construction is suitable where the resistance of the lead
wire may be considered as an additive constant in the circuit, and particularly where the changes in lead resistance due to
ambient temperature changes may be ignored.

Three-Wire: Provides one connection to one end of the element and two to the other end of the element. Connected to
an instrument designed to accept three wire input, sufficient compensation is usually achieved for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire resistance. This is the most commonly used configuration.

Four-Wire: Provides two connections to each end of the element to completely compensate for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire. This configuration is used where highly accurate temperature measurement is vital.

2-WIRE SINGLE 2-WIRE DUPLEX 3-WIRE SINGLE 3-WIRE DUPLEX 4-WIRE SINGLE 4-WIRE DUPLEX

WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN

BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
RED RED RED BLACK BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
RED RED RED
RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED BLACK BLACK
BLACK

RED RED RED RED RED RED

RED RED RED

WHITE

Lead resistance has a large effect on RTD temperature

RED
measurement accuracy. A 2-wire circuit provides no
compensation and can provide large measurement errors.
The following table shows the effects of leadwire resistance
on temperature measurements using low-temperature RTD
RED
assemblies with copper leadwire.
Leadwire Resistance

UNCOMPENSATED
2-WIRE CIRCUITS
LEADWIRE- RESISTANCE-
WIRE OHMS PER MAX. LENGTH
ERROR IN °F
GAUGE FOOT FOR 1 °F
PER
ERROR
WHITE DOUBLE FT. FOR:FOR:
FOR:
@ 20 °C [68 °F]
PYROM
PYR
PYROMAT
30 0.133 0.81 ft 1.24 °F
28 SPEC
SPEC SPEC
NO: NO:0.0851
NO: 1.26 ft TITLE:
0.79 °F TITLE: TITLE:
RED
24 0.0333 3.2 ft 0.31 °F CATALOG
CATALOG
CATALOG PAGE
PAGE P
G
SIZE:SIZE:
SIZE: DWG.DWG.
DWG
N&
22 0.0213 5.1 ft 0.198 °F
NO.

B2
B
AAA B296
RED 20 0.0148 7.27 ft 0.14 °F
18 TOLERANCES
0.0083 TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES 13.0 ft 0.077 °F
16 0.0052 20.7 ft 0.048 °F
FRACTION
FRACTION
DIM DIM DIM = ±1/32"
= ±1/32"
= ±1/32" DRAWN
DRAWN
FRACTION DRAWN BY: BY: BY:
DECIMAL
DECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XX =
.XX
DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010" ±0.010"
= ±0.010" J. BROWN
J. BROWN
J. BROWN
DECIMAL
DECIMALDECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XXXDIM
.XXX = ±0.005"
= .XXX = ±0.005"
±0.005"
ANGULAR
ANGULAR
ANGULAR DIM DIM = ±2°= ±2°
DIM = ±2°
This This This
document
document document
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY to to to
Pyromation,
Pyromation,
Pyromation, Inc. Inc. Inc. FORT
FORT FORT
WAYNE,
WAYNE,
WAYNE, INDIA
IN
INDIANA

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

PYROMATION P/
GEN-14 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com 451-1
 General RTD Tolerances
STANDARD PLATINUM RTD ASSEMBLIES - Pyromation standard RTD assemblies are constructed
using either wire-wound platinum elements or thin-film elements with a reference resistance of 100 ohms
at 0 °C, a temperature coefficient 0.003 85 °C-1 and which are in accordance with the following standards:

1. International Standard, IEC 60751 2. American Standard, ASTM E1137

IEC CLASS B [1] ASTM GRADE B [1] IEC CLASS A [1] IEC CLASS AA [1] (1/5) IEC CLASS B [2]
TEMPERATURE ± (0.12% × RO) Ω ± (0.1% × RO) Ω ± (0.06% × RO) Ω ± (0.04% × RO) Ω ± (0.02% × RO) Ω
± (0.3 + 0.005 |t| ) °C ± (0.25 + 0.0042 |t| ) °C ± (0.15 + 0.002 |t| ) °C ± (0.1 + 0.0017 |t| ) °C ± (0.06 + 0.001 |t| ) °C
°C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F]
-200 [-328] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
-100 [-148] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
-50 [-58] .55 [0.99] 0.46 [0.83] 0.25 [0.45] 0.19 [0.34] 0.11 [0.20]
0 [32] .30 [0.54] 0.25 [0.45] 0.15 [0.27] 0.10 [0.18] 0.06 [0.11]
100 [212] .80 [1.44] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
200 [392] 1.3 [2.34] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
300 [572] 1.8 [3.24] 1.51 [2.72] 0.75 [1.35]
400 [752] 2.3 [4.14] 1.93 [3.47] 0.95 [1.71]
500 [932] 2.8 [5.04] 2.35 [4.23] 1.15 [2.07]
600 [1112] 2.77 [4.99] 1.35 [2.43]

Where: |t| = value of temperature without regard to sign, °C

[1] The equations represent values for 3- and 4-wire PRTs. Caution must be exercised with 2-wire PRTs due to lead resistance.
[2] This tolerance can only be met with a 4-wire PRT.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

452-1 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GEN-15
 REXNORD P/N 10097539
Sensors with Configuration Code GP03
Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies
Connection Heads with General-Purpose Connection Heads
Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies with General-Purpose Connection Heads are designed for use with various thermowell types.
Complete assemblies can be ordered by selecting the RTD assembly below, the thermowell from the thermowell section of this catalog, and a
temperature transmitter from the back of this section. Assemblies without a thermowell can be ordered by selecting the sensor assembly from
this page and inserting the "S" length in table 2-0. These sensors are supplied with a 316 stainless steel sheath and are available in various
tolerances and temperature ranges as noted in the tables below. Note: The "S" dimension will measure 1/4" longer than specified when the spring
is in the relaxed postition. The "S" dimension is calculated when the sensor is compressed or in the installed position. This design allows 1/4"
spring compression to ensure positive contact with the bottom of the thermowell.

S
1/4"
1/4" S E

R1T185L483-002-SNZ-6HN31
ORDER CODES
1-0 1-1 1-2 2-0 3-0 4-0 4-1 4-2
Example Order Number: R1T185L 48 3 - Select Thermowell Part # or
Insert 3 Digit Length Code
- SL - 8HN 31, T- Select Type and Range
from back of section

1-0 100 Ω Platinum RTD Elements

α = 0.003 85 ºC -1 4-0 Head Mounting Fittings
CODE TOLERANCE [1] CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
LOW RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 200) ºC STEEL FITTINGS 316SS FITTINGS
SINGLE DUPLEX 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple
6HN 8HN
R1T185L R1T285L Grade B 1" length 1" length
R5T185L R5T285L (1/5) Class B 1/2" NPT pipe nipple 1/2" NPT pipe nipple
6PN3 8PN_
LOW RANGE THIN FILM (-50 to 200) ºC (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)
RBF185L RBF285L Class B 1/2" NPT union/nipple 1/2" NPT union/nipple
6PU_ [1]
8PU_ [1]

RAF185L RAF285L Class A (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)

HIGH RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 600) ºC PYROMATION

[1] 4" Minimum length required P/N: RBF185L483-S4D0608-SL-8PU422
R1T185H R1T285H Grade B 4-1 Head and Sheath Terminations
SPEC NO:
RAT185H RAT285H Class A CODE DESCRIPTION
[1] Refer to RTD tolerance information in the 22 3" IndividualFOR:
fluoropolymer leads with terminal pins
General Information section for calculations to
31 Aluminum screw-cover head PYROMATION, INC.
TOLERANCES
determine specific tolerance at temperature.
SPEC NO: TITLE: FRACTION DIM = ±1/32"
34 Cast iron screw-cover head
CATALOG PAGE GP-3, FIGURE A
1-1 Sheath Diameters DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010"
HART Field Transmitter
(4 to 20) mASIZE: ®
with
DWG. DECIMAL
NO. & aluminum
SHEET general-
NO: = ±0.005"
REV.
CODE DIAMETERS (inches) 316 SS 35T-642A DIM .XXX

A B272101
purpose housing = ±2°
38 3/16 TOLERANCES ANGULAR DIM
(4 to 20) mA dual input HART® transmitter
Thiswith digital is
document display and
PROPRIETARY to
36T82-D10
48 1/4 FRACTION DIM = ±1/32" general-purpose
DRAWNaluminum
BY: housing with glass
DATE: lidPyromation, Inc.
DECIMAL DIM .XX J. BROWN
= 49±0.010"Flip-top aluminum head 4/12/2011
2-0 DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005"
1-2 Element 63 White polypropylene screw-cover head
Select thermowellANGULAR DIM = ±2°
Connection 91 316 L stainless steel screw-cover head
part number from This document is PROPRIETARY to
CODE DESCRIPTION Pyromation,4-2
Inc. Options FORT WAYNE, INDIANA 260-484-2580
Thermowell Section,
2 2-wire element or specify 3 digit "S" W[1] Epoxy Coating
3 3-wire element length in inches if no
thermowell is required. GS Ground screw
4[1] 4-wire element
I Stainless tag
[1] Not available in duplex or NB 1/2" NPT nylon conduit reducer bushing
with 440 Series Transmitter
SB 1/2" NPT conduit reducer bushing
3-0 Element Options T-440 (4 to 20) mA head-mounted RTD transmitter
CODE DESCRIPTION T-441 (4 to 20) mA isolated head-mounted transmitter
SL [1]
Spring-loaded element T-442 (4 to 20) mA isolated HART® head-mounted transmitter

SC Self-contained spring-loaded element T82-00 (4 to 20) mA dual input HART® head-mounted transmitter
See transmitter ordering information in back of section.
Self-contained spring-loaded element with
SNZ [1] Available with option 31 only.
Viton oil seal.
[1] Not available with option 35T-642A HART® is a registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

371-4 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GP-3
 General RTD Specifications

Element Connections
Two-Wire: Provides one connection to each end of the element. This construction is suitable where the resistance of the lead
wire may be considered as an additive constant in the circuit, and particularly where the changes in lead resistance due to
ambient temperature changes may be ignored.

Three-Wire: Provides one connection to one end of the element and two to the other end of the element. Connected to
an instrument designed to accept three wire input, sufficient compensation is usually achieved for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire resistance. This is the most commonly used configuration.

Four-Wire: Provides two connections to each end of the element to completely compensate for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire. This configuration is used where highly accurate temperature measurement is vital.

2-WIRE SINGLE 2-WIRE DUPLEX 3-WIRE SINGLE 3-WIRE DUPLEX 4-WIRE SINGLE 4-WIRE DUPLEX

WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN

BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
RED RED RED BLACK BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
RED RED RED
RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED BLACK BLACK
BLACK

RED RED RED RED RED RED

RED RED RED

WHITE

Lead resistance has a large effect on RTD temperature

RED
measurement accuracy. A 2-wire circuit provides no
compensation and can provide large measurement errors.
The following table shows the effects of leadwire resistance
on temperature measurements using low-temperature RTD
RED
assemblies with copper leadwire.
Leadwire Resistance

UNCOMPENSATED
2-WIRE CIRCUITS
LEADWIRE- RESISTANCE-
WIRE OHMS PER MAX. LENGTH
ERROR IN °F
GAUGE FOOT FOR 1 °F
PER
ERROR
WHITE DOUBLE FT. FOR:FOR:
FOR:
@ 20 °C [68 °F]
PYROM
PYR
PYROMAT
30 0.133 0.81 ft 1.24 °F
28 SPEC
SPEC SPEC
NO: NO:0.0851
NO: 1.26 ft TITLE:
0.79 °F TITLE: TITLE:
RED
24 0.0333 3.2 ft 0.31 °F CATALOG
CATALOG
CATALOG PAGE
PAGE P
G
SIZE:SIZE:
SIZE: DWG.DWG.
DWG
N&
22 0.0213 5.1 ft 0.198 °F
NO.

B2
B
AAA B296
RED 20 0.0148 7.27 ft 0.14 °F
18 TOLERANCES
0.0083 TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES 13.0 ft 0.077 °F
16 0.0052 20.7 ft 0.048 °F
FRACTION
FRACTION
DIM DIM DIM = ±1/32"
= ±1/32"
= ±1/32" DRAWN
DRAWN
FRACTION DRAWN BY: BY: BY:
DECIMAL
DECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XX =
.XX
DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010" ±0.010"
= ±0.010" J. BROWN
J. BROWN
J. BROWN
DECIMAL
DECIMALDECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XXXDIM
.XXX = ±0.005"
= .XXX = ±0.005"
±0.005"
ANGULAR
ANGULAR
ANGULAR DIM DIM = ±2°= ±2°
DIM = ±2°
This This This
document
document document
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY to to to
Pyromation,
Pyromation,
Pyromation, Inc. Inc. Inc. FORT
FORT FORT
WAYNE,
WAYNE,
WAYNE, INDIA
IN
INDIANA

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

PYROMATION P/
GEN-14 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com 451-1
 General RTD Tolerances
STANDARD PLATINUM RTD ASSEMBLIES - Pyromation standard RTD assemblies are constructed
using either wire-wound platinum elements or thin-film elements with a reference resistance of 100 ohms
at 0 °C, a temperature coefficient 0.003 85 °C-1 and which are in accordance with the following standards:

1. International Standard, IEC 60751 2. American Standard, ASTM E1137

IEC CLASS B [1] ASTM GRADE B [1] IEC CLASS A [1] IEC CLASS AA [1] (1/5) IEC CLASS B [2]
TEMPERATURE ± (0.12% × RO) Ω ± (0.1% × RO) Ω ± (0.06% × RO) Ω ± (0.04% × RO) Ω ± (0.02% × RO) Ω
± (0.3 + 0.005 |t| ) °C ± (0.25 + 0.0042 |t| ) °C ± (0.15 + 0.002 |t| ) °C ± (0.1 + 0.0017 |t| ) °C ± (0.06 + 0.001 |t| ) °C
°C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F]
-200 [-328] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
-100 [-148] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
-50 [-58] .55 [0.99] 0.46 [0.83] 0.25 [0.45] 0.19 [0.34] 0.11 [0.20]
0 [32] .30 [0.54] 0.25 [0.45] 0.15 [0.27] 0.10 [0.18] 0.06 [0.11]
100 [212] .80 [1.44] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
200 [392] 1.3 [2.34] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
300 [572] 1.8 [3.24] 1.51 [2.72] 0.75 [1.35]
400 [752] 2.3 [4.14] 1.93 [3.47] 0.95 [1.71]
500 [932] 2.8 [5.04] 2.35 [4.23] 1.15 [2.07]
600 [1112] 2.77 [4.99] 1.35 [2.43]

Where: |t| = value of temperature without regard to sign, °C

[1] The equations represent values for 3- and 4-wire PRTs. Caution must be exercised with 2-wire PRTs due to lead resistance.
[2] This tolerance can only be met with a 4-wire PRT.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

452-1 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GEN-15
 REXNORD P/N 10097541
Sensors with Configuration Code GP03
Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies
Connection Heads with General-Purpose Connection Heads
Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies with General-Purpose Connection Heads are designed for use with various thermowell types.
Complete assemblies can be ordered by selecting the RTD assembly below, the thermowell from the thermowell section of this catalog, and a
temperature transmitter from the back of this section. Assemblies without a thermowell can be ordered by selecting the sensor assembly from
this page and inserting the "S" length in table 2-0. These sensors are supplied with a 316 stainless steel sheath and are available in various
tolerances and temperature ranges as noted in the tables below. Note: The "S" dimension will measure 1/4" longer than specified when the spring
is in the relaxed postition. The "S" dimension is calculated when the sensor is compressed or in the installed position. This design allows 1/4"
spring compression to ensure positive contact with the bottom of the thermowell.

S
1/4"
1/4" S E

R1T185L483-021-SNZ-6HN31
ORDER CODES
1-0 1-1 1-2 2-0 3-0 4-0 4-1 4-2
Example Order Number: R1T185L 48 3 - Select Thermowell Part # or
Insert 3 Digit Length Code
- SL - 8HN 31, T- Select Type and Range
from back of section

1-0 100 Ω Platinum RTD Elements

α = 0.003 85 ºC -1 4-0 Head Mounting Fittings
CODE TOLERANCE [1] CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
LOW RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 200) ºC STEEL FITTINGS 316SS FITTINGS
SINGLE DUPLEX 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple
6HN 8HN
R1T185L R1T285L Grade B 1" length 1" length
R5T185L R5T285L (1/5) Class B 1/2" NPT pipe nipple 1/2" NPT pipe nipple
6PN3 8PN_
LOW RANGE THIN FILM (-50 to 200) ºC (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)
RBF185L RBF285L Class B 1/2" NPT union/nipple 1/2" NPT union/nipple
6PU_ [1]
8PU_ [1]

RAF185L RAF285L Class A (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)

HIGH RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 600) ºC PYROMATION

[1] 4" Minimum length required P/N: RBF185L483-S4D0608-SL-8PU422
R1T185H R1T285H Grade B 4-1 Head and Sheath Terminations
SPEC NO:
RAT185H RAT285H Class A CODE DESCRIPTION
[1] Refer to RTD tolerance information in the 22 3" IndividualFOR:
fluoropolymer leads with terminal pins
General Information section for calculations to
31 Aluminum screw-cover head PYROMATION, INC.
TOLERANCES
determine specific tolerance at temperature.
SPEC NO: TITLE: FRACTION DIM = ±1/32"
34 Cast iron screw-cover head
CATALOG PAGE GP-3, FIGURE A
1-1 Sheath Diameters DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010"
HART Field Transmitter
(4 to 20) mASIZE: ®
with
DWG. DECIMAL
NO. & aluminum
SHEET general-
NO: = ±0.005"
REV.
CODE DIAMETERS (inches) 316 SS 35T-642A DIM .XXX

A B272101
purpose housing = ±2°
38 3/16 TOLERANCES ANGULAR DIM
(4 to 20) mA dual input HART® transmitter
Thiswith digital is
document display and
PROPRIETARY to
36T82-D10
48 1/4 FRACTION DIM = ±1/32" general-purpose
DRAWNaluminum
BY: housing with glass
DATE: lidPyromation, Inc.
DECIMAL DIM .XX J. BROWN
= 49±0.010"Flip-top aluminum head 4/12/2011
2-0 DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005"
1-2 Element 63 White polypropylene screw-cover head
Select thermowellANGULAR DIM = ±2°
Connection 91 316 L stainless steel screw-cover head
part number from This document is PROPRIETARY to
CODE DESCRIPTION Pyromation,4-2
Inc. Options FORT WAYNE, INDIANA 260-484-2580
Thermowell Section,
2 2-wire element or specify 3 digit "S" W[1] Epoxy Coating
3 3-wire element length in inches if no
thermowell is required. GS Ground screw
4[1] 4-wire element
I Stainless tag
[1] Not available in duplex or NB 1/2" NPT nylon conduit reducer bushing
with 440 Series Transmitter
SB 1/2" NPT conduit reducer bushing
3-0 Element Options T-440 (4 to 20) mA head-mounted RTD transmitter
CODE DESCRIPTION T-441 (4 to 20) mA isolated head-mounted transmitter
SL [1]
Spring-loaded element T-442 (4 to 20) mA isolated HART® head-mounted transmitter

SC Self-contained spring-loaded element T82-00 (4 to 20) mA dual input HART® head-mounted transmitter
See transmitter ordering information in back of section.
Self-contained spring-loaded element with
SNZ [1] Available with option 31 only.
Viton oil seal.
[1] Not available with option 35T-642A HART® is a registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

371-4 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GP-3
 General RTD Specifications

Element Connections
Two-Wire: Provides one connection to each end of the element. This construction is suitable where the resistance of the lead
wire may be considered as an additive constant in the circuit, and particularly where the changes in lead resistance due to
ambient temperature changes may be ignored.

Three-Wire: Provides one connection to one end of the element and two to the other end of the element. Connected to
an instrument designed to accept three wire input, sufficient compensation is usually achieved for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire resistance. This is the most commonly used configuration.

Four-Wire: Provides two connections to each end of the element to completely compensate for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire. This configuration is used where highly accurate temperature measurement is vital.

2-WIRE SINGLE 2-WIRE DUPLEX 3-WIRE SINGLE 3-WIRE DUPLEX 4-WIRE SINGLE 4-WIRE DUPLEX

WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN

BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
RED RED RED BLACK BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
RED RED RED
RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED BLACK BLACK
BLACK

RED RED RED RED RED RED

RED RED RED

WHITE

Lead resistance has a large effect on RTD temperature

RED
measurement accuracy. A 2-wire circuit provides no
compensation and can provide large measurement errors.
The following table shows the effects of leadwire resistance
on temperature measurements using low-temperature RTD
RED
assemblies with copper leadwire.
Leadwire Resistance

UNCOMPENSATED
2-WIRE CIRCUITS
LEADWIRE- RESISTANCE-
WIRE OHMS PER MAX. LENGTH
ERROR IN °F
GAUGE FOOT FOR 1 °F
PER
ERROR
WHITE DOUBLE FT. FOR:FOR:
FOR:
@ 20 °C [68 °F]
PYROM
PYR
PYROMAT
30 0.133 0.81 ft 1.24 °F
28 SPEC
SPEC SPEC
NO: NO:0.0851
NO: 1.26 ft TITLE:
0.79 °F TITLE: TITLE:
RED
24 0.0333 3.2 ft 0.31 °F CATALOG
CATALOG
CATALOG PAGE
PAGE P
G
SIZE:SIZE:
SIZE: DWG.DWG.
DWG
N&
22 0.0213 5.1 ft 0.198 °F
NO.

B2
B
AAA B296
RED 20 0.0148 7.27 ft 0.14 °F
18 TOLERANCES
0.0083 TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES 13.0 ft 0.077 °F
16 0.0052 20.7 ft 0.048 °F
FRACTION
FRACTION
DIM DIM DIM = ±1/32"
= ±1/32"
= ±1/32" DRAWN
DRAWN
FRACTION DRAWN BY: BY: BY:
DECIMAL
DECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XX =
.XX
DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010" ±0.010"
= ±0.010" J. BROWN
J. BROWN
J. BROWN
DECIMAL
DECIMALDECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XXXDIM
.XXX = ±0.005"
= .XXX = ±0.005"
±0.005"
ANGULAR
ANGULAR
ANGULAR DIM DIM = ±2°= ±2°
DIM = ±2°
This This This
document
document document
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY to to to
Pyromation,
Pyromation,
Pyromation, Inc. Inc. Inc. FORT
FORT FORT
WAYNE,
WAYNE,
WAYNE, INDIA
IN
INDIANA

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

PYROMATION P/
GEN-14 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com 451-1
 General RTD Tolerances
STANDARD PLATINUM RTD ASSEMBLIES - Pyromation standard RTD assemblies are constructed
using either wire-wound platinum elements or thin-film elements with a reference resistance of 100 ohms
at 0 °C, a temperature coefficient 0.003 85 °C-1 and which are in accordance with the following standards:

1. International Standard, IEC 60751 2. American Standard, ASTM E1137

IEC CLASS B [1] ASTM GRADE B [1] IEC CLASS A [1] IEC CLASS AA [1] (1/5) IEC CLASS B [2]
TEMPERATURE ± (0.12% × RO) Ω ± (0.1% × RO) Ω ± (0.06% × RO) Ω ± (0.04% × RO) Ω ± (0.02% × RO) Ω
± (0.3 + 0.005 |t| ) °C ± (0.25 + 0.0042 |t| ) °C ± (0.15 + 0.002 |t| ) °C ± (0.1 + 0.0017 |t| ) °C ± (0.06 + 0.001 |t| ) °C
°C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F]
-200 [-328] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
-100 [-148] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
-50 [-58] .55 [0.99] 0.46 [0.83] 0.25 [0.45] 0.19 [0.34] 0.11 [0.20]
0 [32] .30 [0.54] 0.25 [0.45] 0.15 [0.27] 0.10 [0.18] 0.06 [0.11]
100 [212] .80 [1.44] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
200 [392] 1.3 [2.34] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
300 [572] 1.8 [3.24] 1.51 [2.72] 0.75 [1.35]
400 [752] 2.3 [4.14] 1.93 [3.47] 0.95 [1.71]
500 [932] 2.8 [5.04] 2.35 [4.23] 1.15 [2.07]
600 [1112] 2.77 [4.99] 1.35 [2.43]

Where: |t| = value of temperature without regard to sign, °C

[1] The equations represent values for 3- and 4-wire PRTs. Caution must be exercised with 2-wire PRTs due to lead resistance.
[2] This tolerance can only be met with a 4-wire PRT.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

452-1 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GEN-15
 REXNORD P/N 10098066
Sensors with Configuration Code GP03
Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies
Connection Heads with General-Purpose Connection Heads
Spring-Loaded RTD/Thermowell Assemblies with General-Purpose Connection Heads are designed for use with various thermowell types.
Complete assemblies can be ordered by selecting the RTD assembly below, the thermowell from the thermowell section of this catalog, and a
temperature transmitter from the back of this section. Assemblies without a thermowell can be ordered by selecting the sensor assembly from
this page and inserting the "S" length in table 2-0. These sensors are supplied with a 316 stainless steel sheath and are available in various
tolerances and temperature ranges as noted in the tables below. Note: The "S" dimension will measure 1/4" longer than specified when the spring
is in the relaxed postition. The "S" dimension is calculated when the sensor is compressed or in the installed position. This design allows 1/4"
spring compression to ensure positive contact with the bottom of the thermowell.

S
1/4"
1/4" S E

R1T185L483-2.25-SNZ-6HN31

ORDER CODES
1-0 1-1 1-2 2-0 3-0 4-0 4-1 4-2
Example Order Number: R1T185L 48 3 - Select Thermowell Part # or
Insert 3 Digit Length Code
- SL - 8HN 31, T- Select Type and Range
from back of section

1-0 100 Ω Platinum RTD Elements

α = 0.003 85 ºC -1 4-0 Head Mounting Fittings
CODE TOLERANCE [1] CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
LOW RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 200) ºC STEEL FITTINGS 316SS FITTINGS
SINGLE DUPLEX 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple 1/2" x 1/2" NPT hex nipple
6HN 8HN
R1T185L R1T285L Grade B 1" length 1" length
R5T185L R5T285L (1/5) Class B 1/2" NPT pipe nipple 1/2" NPT pipe nipple
6PN3 8PN_
LOW RANGE THIN FILM (-50 to 200) ºC (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)
RBF185L RBF285L Class B 1/2" NPT union/nipple 1/2" NPT union/nipple
6PU_ [1]
8PU_ [1]

RAF185L RAF285L Class A (specify "E" length in inches) (specify "E" length in inches)

HIGH RANGE WIRE WOUND (-200 to 600) ºC PYROMATION

[1] 4" Minimum length required P/N: RBF185L483-S4D0608-SL-8PU422
R1T185H R1T285H Grade B 4-1 Head and Sheath Terminations
SPEC NO:
RAT185H RAT285H Class A CODE DESCRIPTION
[1] Refer to RTD tolerance information in the 22 3" IndividualFOR:
fluoropolymer leads with terminal pins
General Information section for calculations to
31 Aluminum screw-cover head PYROMATION, INC.
TOLERANCES
determine specific tolerance at temperature.
SPEC NO: TITLE: FRACTION DIM = ±1/32"
34 Cast iron screw-cover head
CATALOG PAGE GP-3, FIGURE A
1-1 Sheath Diameters DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010"
HART Field Transmitter
(4 to 20) mASIZE: ®
with
DWG. DECIMAL
NO. & aluminum
SHEET general-
NO: = ±0.005"
REV.
CODE DIAMETERS (inches) 316 SS 35T-642A DIM .XXX

A B272101
purpose housing = ±2°
38 3/16 TOLERANCES ANGULAR DIM
(4 to 20) mA dual input HART® transmitter
Thiswith digital is
document display and
PROPRIETARY to
36T82-D10
48 1/4 FRACTION DIM = ±1/32" general-purpose
DRAWNaluminum
BY: housing with glass
DATE: lidPyromation, Inc.
DECIMAL DIM .XX J. BROWN
= 49±0.010"Flip-top aluminum head 4/12/2011
2-0 DECIMAL DIM .XXX = ±0.005"
1-2 Element 63 White polypropylene screw-cover head
Select thermowellANGULAR DIM = ±2°
Connection 91 316 L stainless steel screw-cover head
part number from This document is PROPRIETARY to
CODE DESCRIPTION Pyromation,4-2
Inc. Options FORT WAYNE, INDIANA 260-484-2580
Thermowell Section,
2 2-wire element or specify 3 digit "S" W[1] Epoxy Coating
3 3-wire element length in inches if no
thermowell is required. GS Ground screw
4[1] 4-wire element
I Stainless tag
[1] Not available in duplex or NB 1/2" NPT nylon conduit reducer bushing
with 440 Series Transmitter
SB 1/2" NPT conduit reducer bushing
3-0 Element Options T-440 (4 to 20) mA head-mounted RTD transmitter
CODE DESCRIPTION T-441 (4 to 20) mA isolated head-mounted transmitter
SL [1]
Spring-loaded element T-442 (4 to 20) mA isolated HART® head-mounted transmitter

SC Self-contained spring-loaded element T82-00 (4 to 20) mA dual input HART® head-mounted transmitter
See transmitter ordering information in back of section.
Self-contained spring-loaded element with
SNZ [1] Available with option 31 only.
Viton oil seal.
[1] Not available with option 35T-642A HART® is a registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

371-4 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GP-3
 General RTD Specifications

Element Connections
Two-Wire: Provides one connection to each end of the element. This construction is suitable where the resistance of the lead
wire may be considered as an additive constant in the circuit, and particularly where the changes in lead resistance due to
ambient temperature changes may be ignored.

Three-Wire: Provides one connection to one end of the element and two to the other end of the element. Connected to
an instrument designed to accept three wire input, sufficient compensation is usually achieved for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire resistance. This is the most commonly used configuration.

Four-Wire: Provides two connections to each end of the element to completely compensate for leadwire resistance and
temperature change in leadwire. This configuration is used where highly accurate temperature measurement is vital.

2-WIRE SINGLE 2-WIRE DUPLEX 3-WIRE SINGLE 3-WIRE DUPLEX 4-WIRE SINGLE 4-WIRE DUPLEX

WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN WHITE
WHITE GREEN
GREEN
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE GREEN
WHITE
WHITE WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN WHITE WHITE
WHITE GREEN GREEN
GREEN

BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
RED RED RED BLACK BLACK RED RED RED BLACK
RED RED RED
RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED BLACK BLACK
BLACK

RED RED RED RED RED RED

RED RED RED

WHITE

Lead resistance has a large effect on RTD temperature

RED
measurement accuracy. A 2-wire circuit provides no
compensation and can provide large measurement errors.
The following table shows the effects of leadwire resistance
on temperature measurements using low-temperature RTD
RED
assemblies with copper leadwire.
Leadwire Resistance

UNCOMPENSATED
2-WIRE CIRCUITS
LEADWIRE- RESISTANCE-
WIRE OHMS PER MAX. LENGTH
ERROR IN °F
GAUGE FOOT FOR 1 °F
PER
ERROR
WHITE DOUBLE FT. FOR:FOR:
FOR:
@ 20 °C [68 °F]
PYROM
PYR
PYROMAT
30 0.133 0.81 ft 1.24 °F
28 SPEC
SPEC SPEC
NO: NO:0.0851
NO: 1.26 ft TITLE:
0.79 °F TITLE: TITLE:
RED
24 0.0333 3.2 ft 0.31 °F CATALOG
CATALOG
CATALOG PAGE
PAGE P
G
SIZE:SIZE:
SIZE: DWG.DWG.
DWG
N&
22 0.0213 5.1 ft 0.198 °F
NO.

B2
B
AAA B296
RED 20 0.0148 7.27 ft 0.14 °F
18 TOLERANCES
0.0083 TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES 13.0 ft 0.077 °F
16 0.0052 20.7 ft 0.048 °F
FRACTION
FRACTION
DIM DIM DIM = ±1/32"
= ±1/32"
= ±1/32" DRAWN
DRAWN
FRACTION DRAWN BY: BY: BY:
DECIMAL
DECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XX =
.XX
DECIMAL DIM .XX = ±0.010" ±0.010"
= ±0.010" J. BROWN
J. BROWN
J. BROWN
DECIMAL
DECIMALDECIMAL
DIM DIM
.XXXDIM
.XXX = ±0.005"
= .XXX = ±0.005"
±0.005"
ANGULAR
ANGULAR
ANGULAR DIM DIM = ±2°= ±2°
DIM = ±2°
This This This
document
document document
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY
is PROPRIETARY to to to
Pyromation,
Pyromation,
Pyromation, Inc. Inc. Inc. FORT
FORT FORT
WAYNE,
WAYNE,
WAYNE, INDIA
IN
INDIANA

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

PYROMATION P/
GEN-14 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com 451-1
 General RTD Tolerances
STANDARD PLATINUM RTD ASSEMBLIES - Pyromation standard RTD assemblies are constructed
using either wire-wound platinum elements or thin-film elements with a reference resistance of 100 ohms
at 0 °C, a temperature coefficient 0.003 85 °C-1 and which are in accordance with the following standards:

1. International Standard, IEC 60751 2. American Standard, ASTM E1137

IEC CLASS B [1] ASTM GRADE B [1] IEC CLASS A [1] IEC CLASS AA [1] (1/5) IEC CLASS B [2]
TEMPERATURE ± (0.12% × RO) Ω ± (0.1% × RO) Ω ± (0.06% × RO) Ω ± (0.04% × RO) Ω ± (0.02% × RO) Ω
± (0.3 + 0.005 |t| ) °C ± (0.25 + 0.0042 |t| ) °C ± (0.15 + 0.002 |t| ) °C ± (0.1 + 0.0017 |t| ) °C ± (0.06 + 0.001 |t| ) °C
°C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F] °C [°F]
-200 [-328] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
-100 [-148] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
-50 [-58] .55 [0.99] 0.46 [0.83] 0.25 [0.45] 0.19 [0.34] 0.11 [0.20]
0 [32] .30 [0.54] 0.25 [0.45] 0.15 [0.27] 0.10 [0.18] 0.06 [0.11]
100 [212] .80 [1.44] 0.67 [1.21] 0.35 [0.63] 0.27 [0.49] 0.16 [0.29]
200 [392] 1.3 [2.34] 1.09 [1.96] 0.55 [0.99] 0.44 [0.79] 0.26 [0.47]
300 [572] 1.8 [3.24] 1.51 [2.72] 0.75 [1.35]
400 [752] 2.3 [4.14] 1.93 [3.47] 0.95 [1.71]
500 [932] 2.8 [5.04] 2.35 [4.23] 1.15 [2.07]
600 [1112] 2.77 [4.99] 1.35 [2.43]

Where: |t| = value of temperature without regard to sign, °C

[1] The equations represent values for 3- and 4-wire PRTs. Caution must be exercised with 2-wire PRTs due to lead resistance.
[2] This tolerance can only be met with a 4-wire PRT.

© 2006 Pyromation, Inc.

452-1 Phone (260) 484-2580 • FAX (260) 482-6805 or (800) 837-6805 • www.pyromation.com GEN-15
 REXNORD P/N 10678657
LP204 Series
Loop Power Sensor, Velocity, 4-20 mA Output, Side Exit Connector/Cable

Product Features
Continuously Monitor & Protect
Important Machinery

4-20 mA Current Proportional to Vibration

Transmit Signals Over Long Distances with No Signal Loss
Customize Your Settings to Focus on the Most
Important Frequencies

Actual Product
Size Shown

LP204-1E LP204-2E LP204-3E

Connector Pin Polarity Conductor Polarity Conductor Polarity
A (+) Loop Power mA Output Red (+) Loop Power mA Output Red (+) Loop Power mA Output
B (-) Common Black (-) Common Black (-) Common
2 Pin Connector Integral Cable Shield Cable Drain Wire Armored Integral Cable Shield Cable Drain Wire
Section 6 - PRO LINE
Loop Power Acceleration & Velocity Sensors

Specifications Standard Metric Specifications Standard Metric

Output, 4-20 mA See Selection Guide Physical
Measurement Range Sensing Element PZT Ceramic
Tolerances Sensing Structure Shear Mode
4 mA (± 5%) Weight (without cable) 4.9 oz 140 grams
20 mA (± 10%)
Case Material 316L Stainless Steel
Electrical
Mounting Hole 1/4-28
Settling Time (Turn on Time) <30 Seconds Connector (LP204-1E) 2 Pin MIL-C-5015
@ Room Temp (68ºF/20ºC) Integral Cable (LP204-2E) Polyurethane Jacketed Cable
Power Requirement (Loop Powered) 15-30 VDC Armored Cable (LP204-3E) Armor Jacketed Cable
Voltage Source
Mechanical
Electrical Case Isolation >108 ohm
Mounting Torque 2 to 5 ft. lbs. 2,7 to 6,8 Nm
Environmental
Supplied Accessories
Temperature Range -40 to 212°F -40 to 100°C
Mounting Hardware 1/4-28 Captive Bolt M6x1 Captive Bolt
Electromagnetic Sensitivity CE
Calibration Certificate Current Output @ 100 Hz
Sealing IP68
Submersible Depth (LP204-2D/3D) 200 ft. 60 m

Ordering Information
All
/LP204 - 1 P 3 - 3E Products
Are Built
To Order

Stud Type Measurement Range Range Type Frequency Range +/- 3dB Style Cable/Armor Lengths
1E = 2 Pin MIL C-5015 Component Cables Ordered Separately
M = M6x1 0 = 0-0.5 IPS (0-12,7 mm/sec) R = RMS 1 = 600-60,000 CPM (10-1000 Hz)
1 = 0-1 IPS (0-25,4 mm/sec) 2 = 180-150,000 CPM (3-2500 Hz)
P = Peak
2E = Integral Cable / -Z
(blank for 1/4-28) 2 = 0-2 IPS (0-50,8 mm/sec) 3 = 180-60,000 CPM (3-1000 Hz)
Cable Length (in Feet)
3 = 0-10 mm/sec (0-0,4 IPS) 4 = 180-300,000 CPM (3-5000 Hz)
4 = 0-20 mm/sec (0-0,8 IPS)
6 = 0-5 IPS (0-127 mm/sec)
3E = Armor Jacket / 025 / 026 - Z
Maximum Armor Length 100 ft. (30 m) Cable Length (in Feet)

Lifetime Warranty on Materials & Workmanship

www.ctconline.com Page 412
 MN ASB-20.0GM-10-700V.9-AX0WL REXNORD P/N 10657963

MAX FLOW SIZES FROM MAX LIQUID PRESSURE 300 PSI (20.69 BAR) MN SERIES
10 TO 160 GPM MAX LIQUID PRESSURE 500 PSI (34.48 BAR) MM SERIES
(60 TO 600 LPM) MAX LIQUID PRESSURE 2000 PSI (137.93 BAR) MH SERIES

MN Series, "A" style control box

Flow meters,
Flow switches and
Flow transmitters
A Medium Vane-Style
For Liquids

NIST Traceable Calibration

Certificate Available

DESCRIPTION CALIBRATION

These are variable area meters
with a spring biased semi-circular
vane that opens wider with more
flow. They are installed in-line
All flow meters are individually
calibrated for fluids with the
viscosity you specify (up to C
3000 SSU/650 Centistokes). A
F

in any position. Straight pipe We also compensate for your

D G

runs before or after the meter
are not required. The simple
mechanical connection directly
drives pointers, switches and
transmitters.
READOUTS
The flowmeter has outputs both
visual and electronic. Visual
displays are either pointer (with
inscribed scale) or numeric
(digital LCD). Electronic outputs
can be mechanical switch
closure, 4-20 mA analog, HART
or some combination of switches
with electronic outputs (for signal
redundancy). The switches can
be general purpose or rated for
hazardous locations (all classes,
groups and divisions).
fluid's specific gravity. For NIST
Traceability please consult
factory.
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
The meter body, internal moving
parts, and seals are offered in a
variety of materials to suit a wide
range of applications, such as:
water, synthetic and petroleum
based oils, paint, corrosives and
solvents. See selections in the
“How to Order” section.
LINE CONNECTION
Ports can be threaded or flanged.
See selections in the “How to
Order” section.
B
E
Fluid enters at A, passes
around the semi-circular vane
B, exits at outlet C. The vane
resists the flow because of
the spring D. The further the
vane is pushed the larger
the passageway E becomes.
This minimizes the pressure
drop. The vane shaft turns
to operate the pointer F and
remote signal devices such
as the switch G.

Viton® and Kalrez are registered trademarks

for DuPont Performance Elastomers.
MN Series MN080115 1
 HOW TO ORDER Select appropriate symbols and build a model code number, as in example shown:

EXAMPLE: MN - B S B 7ØGM - 8 - 32ØV.9 -

SERIES BY PRESSURE RATING
Normal pressure (300 PSI) = MN
Medium pressure (500 PSI) = MM
High pressure (2000 PSI) = MH

HOUSING MATERIAL WHERE USED

Aluminum with nylon flow chamber Lube oil = A

MN only MN or MM
Brass with nylon flow chamber Water = B
Naval bronze with nylon flow chamber Specialty = W
Aluminum Lube oil = D
Aluminum (hard coated) Lube oil with exterior
corrosion protection = E
Brass Water = F
Naval bronze Sea water = U
Stainless steel (316) Chemicals, corrosives = I
Cast iron Oil = C

MH, MM or MN
Cast iron, nickel plated Water, oil with exterior
corrosion protection = N
Carbon steel Oil = M
Carbon steel, nickel plated Water, oil with exterior
corrosion protection = J

INTERNAL MOVING PARTS

Stainless steel (300 series) Standard for water, oil = S
Stainless steel (316 series) Chemicals and corrosives = I
Titanium Sea water = T
Monel Corrosives = L

SEAL MATERIAL
Buna N Water, oil = B
EPR Hot water, caustics = E
Viton Acids, some caustics synthetic oil = F
Kalrez Corrosives, solvents = J
Kalrez (dynamic) & Buna N (static) Specialty = A
Kalrez (dynamic) and EPR (static) Specialty = H
Kalrez (dynamic) and Viton (static) Specialty = K
Kalrez (dynamic) and Teflon (static) Corrosives, solvents
Not available with A, B or W "Housing Materials" = T

CHOOSE FROM THE MAXIMUM FLOW RATES SHOWN HERE

GPM 1Ø, 15, 2Ø, 3Ø, 4Ø, 5Ø, 6Ø, 7Ø, 8Ø, 9Ø, 1ØØ, 11Ø, 12Ø, 13Ø, 14Ø, 15Ø, 16Ø = GM
LPM 4Ø, 5Ø, 6Ø, 7Ø, 8Ø, 9Ø, 1ØØ, 15Ø, 2ØØ, 25Ø, 3ØØ, 35Ø, 4ØØ, 5ØØ, 6ØØ = LM
CMH 2.25, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 1Ø, 15, 2Ø, 25, 3Ø = CMH
This is a dual scale that has both the gallons per minute and liters per minute scales = GLM
This option has two scales for two viscosities with flow shown in GPM = DGM

Hand operated globe valve integral to flowmeter body (MN series only)
No Valve = No Symbol
Valve (brass) = V
Not available on carbon steel or stainless steel housings.
Restricted to port sizes to 1-inch and flows to 30 GPM (50 GPM in 1-1/2-inch port housings)

THREADED ATTACHMENT
Pipe Size NPT SAE BSPP BSPT Max Flow
attachment method

In Inches In GPM
Pipe size and

1/2 4 8T 8BP 8BT 25

3/4 6 12T 12BP 12BT 50
1 8 16T 16BP 16BT 70
1 1/4 1Ø 20T 2ØBP 2ØBT 70
1 1/2 12 24T 24BP 24BT 100
2 16 32BP 32BP 160

FLANGED
Ex: 4FTCS150RF = 1/2" threaded, Carbon Steel, Class 150, Raised Face flange
Pipe Size In Inches Attachment Material Class Style
4 = 1/2" FW=Welded, FT=Threaded CS=Carbon Steel 15Ø RF=Ansi raised face
6 = 3/4" S=316 Stainless 3ØØ
8 = 1" 6ØØ
10 = 1 1/4"
12 = 1 1/2"
16 = 2"
NOTE: Manual Override Option (E) is required (by UFM manufacturing) on welded medium flanged vane meters.
FLUID CHARACTERISTICS 700V0.9
Viscosity number followed by a ‘V’ (for SSU), ‘C’ (for centipoise), or ‘CS’ (for centistokes) followed by the specific gravity. Example: 32ØV.9
would indicate a fluid with a viscosity of 320 SSU with a specific gravity of .9. For dual viscosities (where there is a start up viscosity or
where there may be a range) put in both values with a slash. Example: 32Ø/15ØV.9.
2 MN Series MN080115
 A1 W L - E - 1ØD

SERVICE
Oil and dust tight (Type 12) Available on "A", "L" and "Z" only = N SPECIAL OPTIONS (See explanations below)
Weatherproof (Type 4) Available on all boxes = W High-temp- 400°F, 300°F for transmitter options = HT
Weatherproof, corrosion proof (Type 4X) Available on all boxes = X Stainless steel ID tag for customer supplied information = ST
CSA enclosure / PVC window = C
FLOW DIRECTION Safety Glass window ref. page 4 = TG
Left to right = R Manual override ref. page 4 = E
Right to left = L Dual spring for reading lower flow rates on high flow units = DS
Up = U (see "Flow and pressure drop" section page 4)
Down = D Clearance vane for ≥ 16 GPM (for better particulate tolerance) = Z86
316 SS external bolts on MH-I but limits pressure max to 1500 PSI = Z67MH

SWITCH SETTING
No symbol = Lowest possible setting (usually 10% of maximum flow)
Desired set point is assumed to be in flow units already selected (GPM). Give flow rate 1ØD
followed by a “D” for flow going down (flow failure) or a “U” for flow going up.
Example, 1ØD indicates a setting of 10 GPM in declining flow.

CONTROL BOX & READOUT

“A”, “L” and “Z” Boxes “R” Box

"A". "L" and "Z" boxes are small, “R” box is selected for greater
simple and cost effective. Available visual resolution.
with analog display, mechanical It holds switches (general
switches or transmitters (HART or purpose and hazardous
4-20mA). location all classes, groups
and divisions) and transmitters
(HART or 4-20 mA). Switch
(standard service) and
transmitter are offered in this
A Box L Box Z Box control box together when
A, L and Z small control box in the signal redundancy is desired.
following configurations and materials: Polysulfone Aluminum 316 SS R Box
4-20 mA transmitter (Intrinsically safe with Flow rate display plus:
approved barriers) AXØ LXØ ZXØ Display only RØ
HART with programmable switch points AHØ LHØ ZHØ One SPDT (3 wire) R1
Display only AØ LØ ZØ One high vibration SPDT (3 wire) R1B
One SPDT (3 wire) A1 L1 Z1 Two SPDT (3 wire) R2
One high vibration SPDT (3 wire) A1B L1B Z1B Two high vibration SPDT (3 wire) R2B
Two SPDT (3 wire) A2 L2 Z2 One SPDT (4 wire) R3
Two high vibration SPDT (3 wire) A2B L2B Z2B Two SPDT (4 wire) R4
One SPDT (4 wire) A3 L3 Z3 One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature R61
Two SPDT (4 wire) A4 L4 Z4 Two SPDT (3 wire) high temperature R62
One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature A61 L61 Z61 One SPDT (3 wire) gold contact R71
Two SPDT (3 wire) high temperature A62 L62 Z62 Two SPDT (3 wire) gold contact R72
One SPDT (3 wire) gold contact A71 L71 Z71
Two SPDT (3 wire) gold contact A72 L72 Z72 Flow rate display, Hazardous location switches as follows:
One SPDT (3 wire) hermetically sealed A53 L53 Z53 For > 5 amp circuits
Two SPDT (3 wire) hermetically sealed A54 L54 Z54 One SPDT hazardous location R7
One DPDT hazardous location R17
T Box Two SPDT hazardous location R18
Two DPDT hazardous location R19
“T” Box For < 1 amp circuits
“T” box always has a transmitter One SPDT hazardous location R20
(4-20 mA or HART) and can be in One DPDT hazardous location R21
combination with a mechanical switch Two SPDT hazardous location R22
for redundancy. It has two junction Two DPDT hazardous location R23
boxes to separate wiring for switches
One SPST hazardous location proximity R30
and transmitters. The display can be
analog or digital LCD. Two SPST hazardous location proximity R31
Pointer, scale and 4-20 mA plus option:
No switches (Intrinsically safe with Flow rate display, 4-20 mA transmitter plus options as follows:
approved barriers) TXØ Display and transmitter only
One SPDT (3 wire) TX1 (Intrinsically safe with approved barriers) RXØ
Two SPDT (3 wire) TX2 One SPDT (3 wire) RX1
One SPDT (4 wire) TX3 Two SPDT (3 wire) RX2
Two SPDT (4 wire) TX4 One SPDT (4 wire) RX3
One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature TX61 Two SPDT (4 wire) RX4
One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature RX61
LCD readout, 4-20mA plus option: HART, pointer, scale plus option:
No switches (Intrinsically safe with Two programmable HART switches THØ Flow rate display, HART output plus options as follows:
approved barriers) TXLØ One SPDT (3 wire) TH1 HART output only RHØ
One SPDT (3 wire) TXL1 Two SPDT (3 wire) TH2 One SPDT (3 wire) RH1
One SPDT (4 wire) TXL3 One SPDT (4 wire) TH3 Two SPDT (3 wire) RH2
One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature TXL61 Two SPDT (4 wire) TH4 One SPDT (4 wire) RH3
One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature TH61 Two SPDT (4 wire) RH4

MN Series MN080115 3
 ENGINEERING DATA

Maximum fluid temperature: 200°F (95°C)

Optional max. fluid temperature: 300 & 400°F (150 & 205°C) (option HT)
Maximum ambient temperature: 150°F (65°C)
Readout accuracy, full scale: ±2%
Series MN max. operating pressures: (3:1 safety factor): 300 PSI (20.69 BAR)
Series MM max. operating pressures: (3:1 safety factor): 500 PSI (34.48 BAR)
Series MH max. operating pressures: (3:1 safety factor): 2,000 PSI (137.93 BAR)
Repeatability of switches 1% of actual flow rate

MAX BYPASS ONLY DUAL SPRING*

FLOW & PRESSURE DROP FLOW Minimum Max Minimum Max
RATE Flow Pressure Flow Pressure
Units with max flows to 80 GPM GPM/LPM GPM/LPM Drop GPM/LPM Drop
(300 LPM) impose a pressure drop that PSI PSI
increases with flow from 1.9 to 3.8 PSI. 90/340 20/75 4.5 10/40 6.0
Higher flow-rated models are made 100/380 30/100 4.5 10/50 8.0
possible by having either a partial by- 110/400 30/100 5.0 20/90 6.8
pass (which raises minimum indicated 120/450 40/150 5.8 20/90 6.8
flow), dual springs (which raises the 130/500 40/150 5.8 20/90 6.8
140/550 50/170 6.5 20/90 6.8
pressure drop), or both. The table
150/570 50/170 6.5 30/100 6.8
shows minimum flow rates and pres- 160/600 50/170 6.5 30/100 7.5
sure drops (PSI) (at max flow rates) for
models rated from 100 to 160 GPM. *When dual-spring is ordered you must specify
special option DS. Some dual-spring units also
have partial bypass to achieve high flow ranges.

SPECIAL OPTIONS

High temperature: (option HT) re-
quires all-metal construction of housing/
orifice cover with seals of Viton, EPR,
Kalrez or Teflon (compatible with fluid).
A thermal barrier (heat-resistant cloth)
is added between the housing and the
control box, which must be used with
service option "W" (weatherproof) or
"X" (corrosion resistant). A metal scale
is provided.
Identification tag: (option ST) custom-
er-supplied information is stamped on
a stainless steel tag that is attached to
the nameplate.
Safety Glass window:
(option TG) replaces the standard
window with "Laminated Safety Glass"
ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 1601 CFR
1201.
Manual override: (option E) provides
an extended shaft you can manipulate
to clear debris, simulate flow, adjust
switch settings, etc. Same material as
internals specified.
Clearance vane: (option Z86) the swing
vane is modified to provide extra clear-
ance for liquids that contain particulate.
Available for maximum flow range of
16 GPM or greater, this reduces the
turndown to a minimum of 4 GPM.

4 MN Series MN080115
 CONTROL BOX INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

“A”, “L” and “Z” Boxes 5.50 [140mm]

PORT TO PORT

3/4" NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION

6.12 [155mm] APPROX.

SWING RADIUS
Maximum installation dimensions

“R” Box
SECONDARY JUNCTION BOX LOCATION

5.50 [140mm]
PORT TO PORT

PRIMARY JUNCTION BOX LOCATION

1/2" NPT CONDUIT CONNECTION.

ROUND ENCLOSURE JUNCTION BOX OPTIONS RX2 R9.63 [245mm]

No Junction Box Pointer Only, No Electrical Components. APPROXIMATE SWING RADIUS
FOR 2 SWITCHES & 2 JUNCTION BOXES.
1 Junction Box One type of Electrical item Only–
Primary Location 1 or 2 Switches or Transmitter, but NOT both.
2 Junction Boxes Transmitter AND 1 or 2 Switches. RX1 R9.29 [236mm]
APPROXIMATE SWING RADIUS
FOR ALL OTHER OPTIONS.

Maximum installation dimensions

MN Series MN080115 5
 ® Horizontal/Vertical Steelflex Couplings with Straight Bores • Dimensions
a good name in industry Type T10 • Sizes 1020 thru 1140 (Page 1 of 1)

TAG: 2130-CV-002

GRID
HUB
os r s
da in a ishe ase re in

u u
yo ise
u

. itio for adv

fur d, p gs. act
sh ay r s are uire win nuf

t
int q dr a

le
d

S GAP
pr re e h m

lc
te ng ord s are thes wit T
d ch Rec nge ith ding PRIN

na
a

A
n

C C
- A ile. nce y ch nceroce ORD

te dd

D
f t o an rda p EC
. a w e
a If o re R

ing ult
- c a D
ac We TIFIE

ipp es
- ER

ing m
C

nd es
ex a
an ny

LUBE
PLUGS
J

Torque Allow Max † Cplg Wt DIMENSIONS – Inches

SIZE Min Lube Wt
Rating Speed Bore With No
H Bore l lb A B C D J S Gap
(lb-in) rpm (Sq Key) Bore-lb
1020T 422
460 4500 1.125 .500 4.2 .06 4.00 3.88 1.88 1.56 2.62 1.54 .125
1030T 1,200
1320 4500 1.375 .500 5.7 .09 4.38 3.88 1.88 1.94 2.69 1.54 .125
1040T 2,000
2200 4500 1.625 .500 7.4 .12 4.62 4.12 2.00 2.25 2.75 1.58 .125
1050T 3,500
3850 4500 1.875 .500 12 .15 5.44 4.88 2.38 2.62 3.12 1.76 .125
1060T 5,500
6050 4350 2.125 .750 16 .19 5.94 5.12 2.50 3.00 3.62 2.06 .125
1070T 8,000
8800 4125 2.500 .750 23 .25 6.38 6.12 3.00 3.44 3.75 2.12 .125
1080T 16,500
18150 3600 3.000 1.062 39 .38 7.62 7.12 3.50 4.12 4.56 2.54 .125
1090T 30,000
33000 3600 3.500 1.062 56 .56 8.38 7.88 3.88 4.88 4.81 2.82 .125
1100T 50,500
55550 2440 4.000 1.625 93 .94 9.88 9.69 4.75 5.59 6.12 ... .188
1110T 75,000
82500 2250 4.500 1.625 120 1.12 10.62 10.19 5.00 6.31 6.36 ... .188
1120T 110,000
121000 2025 5.000 2.375 179 1.62 12.12 12.00 5.88 7.06 7.54 ... .250
1130T 160,000
176000 1800 6.000 2.625 266 2.0 13.62 13.00 6.38 8.56 7.68 ... .250
1140T 230,000
253000 1650 7.250 ‡ 2.625 392 2.5 15.12 14.75 7.25 10.00 7.92 ... .250
H Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change without notice unless certified.
† Maximum bores are LESS than shown above for hubs with an INTERFERENCE FIT and a set screw OVER the keyway; Refer to Manual 427-105 for details. For the
above Max Bores, Sizes 1020 thru 1090 will be furnished for CLEARANCE FIT with a set screw OVER the keyway. Sizes 1100 and larger will be furnished for
INTERFERENCE FIT without set screw. Falk standards apply unless otherwise specified.
‡ Maximum bore is for hub with keyway for rectangular key.
l Minimum bore is the smallest bore to which a RSB (rough stock bore) hub can be bored. Depending upon coupling size, rough stock bore hubs have only a blind
centering hole or a small through hole that will permit remachining of the hubs to the minimum bores specified. RSB hubs are not drilled and tapped for set screws.

130 P7 ONE HUB 5.125" OTHER HUB

SIZE
& TYPE Bore Keyway Overhang Fitted To Fitted By Bore Keyway Overhang Fitted To Fitted By

1140T10 5.1154 32 x 7.4 0.00" H.S.S. REXNORD 5.1210 1.25 x 0.625 0.00" MOTOR REXNORD
5.1170 Js9 5.1225

PRELIMINARY CERTIFIED PRINT OF FALK COUPLING FOR . . . .TERRA

. . . . . . .NOVA
. . . . . . TECHNOLOGIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO.

DRAWN J. SADOWSKI DATE 03-01-2018

CHECKED J. SADOWSKI NO. REQ’D. 2 (1 PER LINE ITEM)
DRAWING NO. FOR UNIT ON M.O. 897316-10 & 20
P.O. 17129-207
425-112
425-112K
COUPLING M.O. 897316-10 & 20

The Falk Corporation, P.O. Box 492, Zip 53201-0492

425-112K
425-112J
September 2008
3001 W. Canal St., Zip 53208-4200, Milwaukee, WI USA Telephone: 414-342-3131 April 1994
Fax: 414-937-4359 e-mail: falkinfo@falkcorp.com web: www.falkcorp.com Supersedes 425-112H
 Falk® Steelflex® Couplings • Installation & Maintenance
Type T10  •  Sizes 1020–1140 & 20–140 (Page 1 of 6)

How To Use This Manual are furnished with a pre-measured amount of grease for
each coupling. The grease can be ordered for larger size
This manual provides detailed instructions on maintenance,
couplings.
lubrication, installation, and parts identification. Use the
table of contents below to locate required information. The use of general purpose grease requires re-lubrication
of the coupling at least annually.
Table of Contents
Introduction................................................................. Page 1 TYPE T10 STEELFLEX COUPLING
Lube Fittings................................................................ Page 1
Limited End Float ........................................................ Page 1
Lubrication ............................................................. Pages 1-2
Installation & Alignment Instructions...................... Pages 2-4
Annual Maintenance, Relube & Disassembly............. Page 4
Installation & Alignment Data...................................... Page 5
Parts Identification & Parts Interchangeability............ Page 6

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS

MANUAL FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE AND
TROUBLE FREE SERVICE.

INTRODUCTION
This manual applies to Sizes 1020T thru 1140T and 20T
thru 140T10 Falk SteelfIex Tapered Grid Couplings. Unless
otherwise stated, information for Sizes 1020T thru 1140T
applies to Sizes 20T thru 140T respectively, e.g. 1020T =
20T, 1100T = 100T, etc. These couplings are designed to
operate in either the horizontal or vertical position without
modification. Beginning in year 1994 through 2003, these
couplings were being suppliedwithone setofinchseries
fasteners and one set of Metric fasteners. Beginning in
year 2004 only Metric fasteners are being supplied. Refer
to Page 6 for part interchangeability.
The performance and life of the couplings depend largely
upon how you install and service them.
CAUTION: Consult applicable local and national safety
codes for proper guarding of rotating members. Observe
all safety rules when installing or servicing couplings.
WARNING: Lockout starting switch of prime mover and
remove all external loads from drive before installing or
servicing couplings.
LUBE FITTINGS
Cover halves have1/8 NPT Iube holes. Use a standard
grease gun and Iube fitting as instructed on Page 4.
LIMITED END FLOAT
When electric motors, generators, engines, compressors
and other machines are fitted with sleeve or straight roller
bearings, limited axial end float kits are recommended for
protecting the bearings. Falk Steelflex couplings are easily
modified to limit end float; refer to Manual 428-820 for
instructions.
LUBRICATION
Adequate lubrication is essential for satisfactory
operation. Page 2 provides a list of typical lubricants
and specifications for general purpose and long term
greases. Because of its superior lubricating characteristics
and low centrifuge properties, Falk Long Term Grease
(LTG) is highly recommended. Sizes 1020T to 1090T10
Long Term Grease (LTG)
The high centrifugal forces encountered in couplings
separate the base oil and thickener of general purpose
greases. Heavy thickener, which has no lubrication
qualities, accumulates in the grid-groove area of Steelflex
couplings resulting in premature hub or grid failure unless
periodic lubrication cycles are maintained.
Falk Long Term Grease (LTG) was developed specifically
for couplings. It resists separation of the oil and thickener.
The consistency of Falk LTG changes with operating
conditions. As manufactured it is an NLGI #1/2 grade.
Working of the lubricant under actual service conditions
causes it to become semifluidwhile thegreasenear the seals
will set to a heavier grade, helping to prevent leakage.
LTG is highly resistant to separation, easily out performing
all other lubricants tested. The resistance to separation
allows the lubricant to be used for relatively long periods of
time.
Steelflex couplings initially lubricated with LTG will not
require re-lubrication until the connected equipment
is stopped for servicing. If a coupling leaks grease, is
exposed to extreme temperatures, excessive moisture, or
experiences frequent reversals, more frequent lubrication
may be required.
Although LTG grease is compatible with most other
coupling greases, the mixing of greases may dilute the
benefits of LTG.
USDA Approval
LTG has the United States Department of Agriculture Food
Safety & Inspection Service approval for applications where
there is no possibility of contact with edible products. (H-2
ratings).
CAUTION: Do not use LTG in bearings.

Rexnord 428-110
5555 S. Moorland Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151-7953 March 2014
Telephone: 262-796-4060 Fax: 262-796-4064 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-04
Falk Steelflex Couplings • Installation & Maintenance
(Page 2 of 6) Type T10  •  Sizes 1020–1140 & 20–140

Specifications — Falk LTG INSTALLATION OF TYPE T10

The values shown are typical and slight variations are
permissible.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE — -20°F (-29°C) to
250°F (121°C). Min. Pump = 20° F (-7° C).
MINIMUM BASE OIL VISCOSITY — 3300SSU (715cST) @
100°F (38°C).
THICKENER — Lithium & soap/polymer.
CENTRIFUGE SEPARATION CHARACTERISTICS — ASTM
#D4425 (Centrifuge Test) — K36 = 2/24 max., very high
resistance to centrifuging.
NLGI GRADE (ASTM D-217) —1/2
CONSISTENCY (ASTM D-217) — 60 stroke worked
penetration value in the range of 315 to 360 measured at
77°F (25°C)
MINIMUM DROPPING POINT — 350°F (177°C) minimum
MINIMUM TIMKEN O.K. LOAD — 40 lbs.
ADDITIVES — Rust and oxidation inhibitors that do not
corrode steel or swell or deteriorate synthetic seals.
Packaging
14 oz. (0,4 kg ) CARTRIDGES — Individual or case lots of
10 or 30.
35 lb. (16 kg )PAIL, 120 lb. (54 kg ) KEG & 400 lb. (181 kg)
DRUMS.
General Purpose Grease
Annual Lubrication — The following specifications and
lubricants for general purpose grease apply to Falk
Steelflex couplings that are lubricated annually and operate
within ambient temperatures of 0°F to 150°F (-18°C to
66°C). For temperatures beyond this range, consult the
Factory.
If a coupling leaks grease, is exposed to extreme
temperatures, excessive moisture or experiences frequent
reversals, more frequent lubrication may be required.
STEELFLEX GRID COUPLINGS
Installation
Only standard mechanics tools, wrenches, a straight edge
and feeler gauges are required to install Falk Steelflex
couplings. Coupling Sizes 1020T thru 1090T are generally
furnished for CLEARANCE FIT with setscrew over the
keyway. Sizes 1100T and larger are furnished for an
INTERFERENCE FIT without a setscrew.
CLEARANCE FIT HUBS — Clean all parts using a non-
flammable solvent. Check hubs, shafts and keyways for
burrs. Do not heat clearance fit hubs. Install keys, mount
hubs with flange face flush with shaft ends or as otherwise
specified and tighten setscrews.
INTERFERENCE FIT HUBS — Furnished without setscrews.
Heat hubs to a maximum of 275°F (135°C) using an
oven, torch, induction heater or an oil bath. To prevent
seal damage, DO NOT heat hubs beyond a maximum
temperature of 400°F (205°C).
When an oxy-acetylene or blow torch is used, use an
excess acetylene mixture. Mark hubs near the center
of their length in several places on hub body with
a temperature sensitive crayon, 275°F (135°C) melt
temperature. Direct flame towards hub bore using constant
motion to avoid overheating an area.
WARNING: If an oil bath is used, the oil must have a flash
point of 350°F (177°C) or higher. Do not rest hubs on the
bottom of the container. Do not use an open flame in a
combustible atmosphere or near combustible materials.
Heat hubs as instructed above. Mount hubs as quickly as
possible with hub face flush with shaft end. Allow hubs to
cool before proceeding. Insert setscrews (if required) and
tighten.

Specifications — General Purpose Coupling

Lubricants
The values shown are typical and slight variations are
permissible.
DROPPING POINT — 300°F (149°C) or higher.
CONSISTENCY — NLGI No. 2 with 60 stroke worked
penetration value in the range of 250 to 300.
SEPARATION AND RESISTANCE — Low oil separation rate
and high resistance to separation from centrifuging.
LIQUID CONSTITUENT — Possess good lubricating
properties equivalent to a high quality, well refined
petroleum oil.
INACTIVE — Must not corrode steel or cause swelling or
deterioration of synthetic seals.
CLEAN — Free from foreign inclusions.

428-110 Rexnord
March 2014 5555 S. Moorland Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151-7953
Supersedes 5-04 Telephone: 262-796-4060 Fax: 262-796-4064 www.rexnord.com
 Falk Steelflex Couplings • Installation & Maintenance
Type T10  •  Sizes 1020–1140 & 20–140 (Page 3 of 6)

Maximize Performance And Life 3 — Offset Alignment

The performance and life of couplings depend largely
upon how you install and maintain them. Before installing
couplings, make certain that foundations of equipment to
be connected meet manufacturers’ requirements. Check for
soft foot. The use of stainless steel shims is recommended.
Measuring misalignment and positioning equipment
within alignment tolerances is simplified with an alignment
computer. These calculations can also be done graphically
or mathematically.
Alignment is shown using spacer bar and straight edge.
This practice has proven to be adequate for many industrial
applications. However, for superior final alignment, the use
of dial indicators (see Manual 458-834 for instructions),
lasers, alignment computers or graphical analysis is
Align so that a straight edge rests squarely (or within the
recommended.
limits specified in Table 1) on both hubs as shown above
1— Mount Seals And Hubs and also at 90° intervals. Check with feelers. The clearance
must not exceed the PARALLEL OFFSET installation limits
MOUNT
specified in Table 1. Tighten all foundation bolts and repeat
SEAL Steps 2 and 3. Realign coupling if necessary.
FIRST
4 — Insert Grid

Lock out starting switch of prime mover. Clean all metal

parts using a non-flammable solvent. Lightly coat seals with
grease and place on shafts BEFORE mounting hubs. Heat
interference fit hubs as previously instructed. Seal keyways
to prevent leakage. Mount hubs on their respective shafts
so the hub face is flush with the end of its shaft unless
otherwise indicated. Tighten setscrews when furnished.

2 — Gap and Angular Alignment

Pack gap and grooves with specified lubricant before

inserting grid. When grids are furnished in two or more
segments, install
them so that all cut ends extend in the same direction
(as detailed in the exploded view picture above); this will
assure correct grid contact with non-rotating pin in cover
halves. Spread the grid slightly to pass over the coupling
Use a spacer bar equal in thickness to the gap specified
teeth and seat with a soft mallet.
in Table 1, Page 5. Insert bar as shown below left, to same
depth at 90° intervals and measure clearance between bar
and hub face with feelers. The difference in minimum and
maximum measurements must not exceed the ANGULAR
installation limits specified in Table 1.

Rexnord 428-110
5555 S. Moorland Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151-7953 March 2014
Telephone: 262-796-4060 Fax: 262-796-4064 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-04
Falk™ Steelflex® Couplings • Installation & Maintenance
(Page 4 of 6) Type T10  •  Sizes 1020–1140 & 20–140

5 — Pack With Grease And Assemble Covers ANNUAL MAINTENANCE

For extreme or unusual operating conditions, check
coupling more frequently.
1. Check alignment per steps on Page 3. If the maximum
op-erating misalignment limits are exceeded, realign the
cou-pling to the recommended installation limits. See
Table 1 for installation and operating alignment limits.
2. Check tightening torques of all fasteners.
3. Inspect seal ring and gasket to determine if
replacement is required. If leaking grease, replace.
4. When connected equipment is serviced, disassemble
the coupling and inspect for wear. Replace worn parts.
Clean grease from coupling and repack with new
grease. Install coupling using new gasket as instructed
in this manual.
MATCH MARK
Periodic Lubrication

MATCH MARK

Pack the spaces between and around the grid with as

much lubricant as possible and wipe off excess flush with
The required frequency of lubrication is directly related to
top of grid. Position seals on hubs to line up with grooves
the type of lubricant chosen, and the operating conditions.
in cover. Position gaskets on flange of lower cover half
Steelflex couplings lubricated with general purpose
and assemble covers so that the match marks are on the
coupling greases, should be relubed annually. The use of
same side (see above). If shafts are not level (horizontal)
Falk Long Term Grease (LTG) will allow relube intervals
or coupling is to be used vertically, assemble cover halves
to be extended to beyond five years. When relubing,
with the lug and match mark UP or on the high side. Push
remove both lube plugs and insert lube fitting. Fill with
gaskets in until they stop against the seals and secure
recommended lubricant until an excess appears at the
cover halves with fasteners, tighten to torque specified
opposite hole.
in Table 1. Make sure gaskets stay in position during
tightening of fasteners. CAUTION: Make certain all plugs have been inserted after
lubricating.
MATCH MARKLUG UP
Coupling Disassembly And Grid Removal

VERTICAL COUPLINGS
Whenever it is necessary to disconnect the coupling,
remove the cover halves and grid. A round rod or
CAUTION: Make certain lube plugs are installed before
screwdriver that will conveniently fit into the open loop ends
operating.
of the grid is required. Begin at the open end of the grid
CAUTION: section and insert the rod or screwdriver into the loop ends.
Use the teeth adjacent to each loop as a fulcrum and pry
the grid out radially in even, gradual stages, proceeding
alternately from side to side.

428-110 Rexnord
March 2014 5555 S. Moorland Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151-7953
Supersedes 5-04 Telephone: 262-796-4060 Fax: 262-796-4064 www.rexnord.com
 Falk Steelflex Couplings • Installation & Maintenance
Type T10  •  Sizes 1020–1140 & 20–140 (Page 5 of 6)

TYPE T COUPLING INSTALLATION &
ALIGNMENT DATA
Maximum life and minimum maintenance for the coupling
and connected machinery will result if couplings are
accurately aligned. Coupling life expectancy between initial
alignment and maximum operating limits is a function of
load, speed and lubrication. Maximum operating values
listed in Table 1 are based on cataloged allowable rpm.
Values listed are based upon the use of the gaps listed,
standard coupling components, standard assemblies and
cataloged allowable speeds.
ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT
Values may be combined for an installation or operating
condition.
Example: 1060T max. operating misalignment is .016"
parallel plus .018" angular.
NOTE: For applications requiring greater misalignment,
refer application details to the Factory.
Angular misalignment is dimension X minus Y as illustrated
below. Parallel misalignment is distance P between the hub
center lines as illustrated below.
End float (with zero angular and parallel misalignment)
is the axial movement of the hubs(s) within the cover(s)
measured from “0” gap.
PARALLEL OFFSET MISALIGNMENT END FLOAT

Y FF
P

X GAP

Table 1 — Misalignment & End Float

Installation Limits Operating Limits Cover Fastener
Tightening
End Float Torque Values
Parallel Angular Hub Gap Parallel Angular Allow Lube Wt
Physical Limit Inch or
Size Offset-P (x-y) 10% Offset-P (x-y) Metric Series Speed
(Min) 2 x F (rpm)
Fasteners
Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Inch mm (lb-in) (Nm) lb kg
Inch mm Inch mm Inch mm Inch mm Inch mm
1020T .006 0,15 .003 0,08 .125 3 .012 0,30 .010 0,25 .210  5,33 100 11,3 4500  .06 0,03
1030T .006 0,15 .003 0,08 .125 3 .012 0,30 .012 0,30 .198  5,03 100 11,3 4500  .09 0,04
1040T .006 0,15 .003 0,08 .125 3 .012 0,30 .013 0,33 .211  5,36 100 11,3 4500  .12 0,05
1050T .008 0,20 .004 0,10 .125 3 .016 0,41 .016 0,41 .212  5,38 200 22,6 4500  .15 0,07
1060T .008 0,20 .005 0,13 .125 3 .016 0,41 .018 0,46 .258  6,55 200 22,6 4350  .19 0,09
1070T .008 0,20 .005 0,13 .125 3 .016 0,41 .020 0,51 .259  6,58 200 22,6 4125  .25 0,11
1080T .008 0,20 .006 0,15 .125 3 .016 0,41 .024 0,61 .288  7,32 200 22,6 3600  .38 0,17
1090T .008 0,20 .007 0,18 .125 3 .016 0,41 .028 0,71 .286  7,26 200 22,6 3600  .56 0,25
1100T .010 0,25 .008 0,20 .188 5 .020 0,51 .033 0,84 .429 10,90 312 35 2440  .94 0,43
1110T .010 0,25 .009 0,23 .188 5 .020 0,51 .036 0,91 .429 10,90 312 35 2250 1.1 0,51
1120T .011 0,28 .010 0,25 .250 6 .022 0,56 .040 1,02 .556 14,12 650 73 2025 1.6 0,74
1130T .011 0,28 .012 0,30 .250 6 .022 0,56 .047 1,19 .551 14,00 650 73 1800 2.0 0,91
1140T .011 0,28 .013 0,33 .250 6 .022 0,56 .053 1,35 .571 14,50 650 73 1650 2.5 1,14

Table 2 — Coupling Cover Fastener Identification

Inch Series Fasteners
Size Metric Fasteners
Old Style New Style

1020-1070T10 SAE Grade 8  SAE Grade 8

10.9
Property Class 10.9

1080-1090T10 SAE Grade 8 SAE Grade 8 Property Class 10.9

10.9

1100-1140T10 SAE Grade 5 SAE Grade 5 Property Class 8.8

8.8


★★ Older style covers, Sizes 1020T10 thru 1070T10 must utilize socket head cap screws and locknuts held by the cover.

Rexnord 428-110
5555 S. Moorland Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151-7953 March 2014
Telephone: 262-796-4060 Fax: 262-796-4064 www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-04
Falk Steelflex Couplings • Installation & Maintenance
(Page 6 of 6) Type T10  •  Sizes 1020–1140 & 20–140

PARTS IDENTIFICATION CAUTION: Blue or non-painted grids may be used in all

All coupling parts have identifying part numbers as shown
below. Parts 3 and 4 (Hubs and Grids), are the same for
both
Type T10 and T20 couplings. All other coupling parts are
unique to
Type T10. When ordering parts, always SPECIFY SIZE and
TYPE shown on the COVER.
PARTS INTERCHANGEABILITY
Parts are interchangeable between Sizes 20T and 1020T,
30T and 1030T, etc. except as noted.
GRIDS — Size 1020T thru 1140T Steelflex couplings use
blue or non-painted grids. Older models, 20T thru 140T, use
orange grids.
applications, but DO NOT substitute orange grids for blue
or nonpainted.
CAUTION: COVERS — DO NOT mix cover halves of
different designs. Sizes 1020T thru 1070T10 covers have
been manufactured in several different two-rib designs and
80T thru 140T covers have been manufactured with two
and three ribs.
HARDWARE — Older style covers, Sizes 1020T10 thru
1070T10, utilized socket head cap screws with captured
locknuts. The new style covers use hex head cap screws
(either inch or metric from year 1994 through 2003 and only
Metric beginning in 2004). Specify the style cover when
ordering replacement parts.

PART NUMBER LOCATION

PART DESCRIPTION
1. Seal (T10)
(2.) COVER
(7.) 1030 T 10 B 2. Cover (T10)
COUPLING TYPE MODEL 3. Hub (Specify bore and keyway)
SIZE
4. Grid
PRODUCT 5. Gasket (T10)
CLASSIFICATION
6. Metric Fasteners (T10).
SIZE & (1.) SEAL 7. Lube Plug
(4.) GRID SIZE
PART (3.) HUB
NUMBER

SIZE, PART
ORDER INFORMATION
(5.) GASKET
NUMBER & 1. Identify part(s) required by name
BORE PART NUMBER
above.
SIZE
2. Furnish the following information.
EXAMPLE:
PART NUMBER   Coupling Size: 1030
  Coupling Type: T10 Model: B
(6.)
  Bore: 1.375
  Keyway: .375 x .187
3. Contact your Rexnord
DistributororRexnord for price and
availability.

428-110 Rexnord
March 2014 5555 S. Moorland Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151-7953
Supersedes 5-04 Telephone: 262-796-4060 Fax: 262-796-4064 www.rexnord.com
 Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C-1.6.7.2.2
November 1, 1992
Prepared by: Bill Busser
Approved by: Glenn Pokrandt
Revised: February 20,1998
December 17,1999
November 18, 2004

Instructions For Installation and Maintenance

MCF Couplings SIZES 1045 - 1120

This manual applies to rigid moment couplings (MCF type) used to shaft mount gear units.
Use these instructions plus any instructions on the coupling or unit assembly drawings.

Warning

Do not service the coupling without first completely reading these instructions. The
compressive fit between the shaft and hub provides both support for the speed reducer
assembly and transmits the torque to power the conveyor. For this reason it is very
important to fully follow the installation and alignment instructions, and maintenance
procedures set forth. Failure to achieve correct fit between the shaft and hub, and
between the two hubs can result in damage to the system components and has the
potential to cause serious harm and /or injury to personnel in the immediate vicinity.
It is possible to have visual movement of the reducer and assembly. The movement is due

Page 1 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

to shaft and coupling connection runout. DO NOT restrain this movement; to do so will
adversely load the reducer low speed shaft and the connected shaft, and may result in
shaft or hub failures.

Identification

All coupling components have identification part numbers. Refer to these part numbers
when ordering parts. Refer to the sketch above for description of parts.

Application

The couplings are designed to shaft mount a gear unit to a shaft. The couplings will
generally be mounted horizontally but they can be mounted vertically as well.

Installation

Caution, lock out starting switch of prime mover.

1) Thoroughly clean, degrease, and dry coupling hub flange mounting faces, reducer and
driven shafts. Clean with a non-flammable solvent (see also 6.3.4).

2) Check both shafts for runout to insure shafts are not bent (refer to figure, section 6.3.9).

3) Shaft ends must be chamfered to provide a lead for hub mounting.

4) Shafts and bores must be free of burrs, and any rust or corrosion in the interference area
must be removed before assembly.

5) If a keyway is present, the edges of the keyway should be broken with a file and free of
burrs.

6) Mount hubs on shafts

6.1 Straight bored interference fit hubs with key.

6.1.1 Clean all parts. Heat hubs to between 350 F (177 C) and 450 F (232 C)
using an oven, torch, or an induction heater. Warning, an oil bath should not
be used to heat the hubs, because of the high heating temperatures
required.

When an oxy-acetylene or blow torch is used, use an excess acetylene mixture.

Mark hubs near the center of their length in several places on hub body with
temperature sensitive crayons, one 350 F (177 C) and one 450 F (232 C)
melt temperature. Direct flame toward hub bore using constant motion to avoid
overheating an area.

Page 2 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

6.1.2 Heat hubs as instructed above. Mount hubs as quickly as possible as shown on
the figure on page 1. Allow hubs to cool before proceeding. Insert setscrews, if
required, and tighten.

6.1.3 Mount other hub if required (See step 6.2 or 6.3). Otherwise proceed to step 7
for installation of coupling.

6.2 Straight bored interference fit hubs without key

6.2.1 To obtain the highest coefficient of friction between the hub bore and shaft, clean
the hub bore and shaft as follows:

6.2.1.1 Wash bore of coupling hub and outside diameter of the shaft with clean
chlorothene, acetone or equivalent. Use clean rags or bristle brushes.

6.2.1.2 Rinse with clean, unused chlorothene, acetone or equivalent.

6.2.1.3 Dry using “Kim Wipes” (#34256) by Kimberly-Clark (phone 1-800-241-

2739) or equivalent, being careful not to touch the surface with bare
hands. Rags or cloth are not to be used. Lint or dirt on mating
surfaces can cause a significant loss of torque capacity.

6.2.1.4 Refer to installation instructions provided with the coupling for correct
coupling assembly sequence.

6.2.1.5 Apply heat to hubs uniformly, preferably in a furnace or with an induction

heater coil. Hubs must be heated to at least 400 °F (205 °C), but must
not exceed 700 °F (370 °C). DO NOT USE OIL BATH.

6.2.1.6 Clean coupling bore of all dirt, soot, etc., which may have occurred
during heating.

6.2.1.7 Assemble hub to shaft. Do not use lubricant when assembling.

6.2.1.8 Allow hubs to cool to room temperature before proceeding with coupling
assembly.

6.2.2 Mount other hub if required (See step 6.1 or 6.3). Otherwise proceed to step 7
for installation of coupling.

6.3 Hubs with Shrink Discs (Follow these and any instructions supplied with the shrink
disc).

Important: Never tighten shrink disc locking screws before shaft is inside the hub,
otherwise plastic deformation of the hub barrel may occur.

Page 3 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

6.3.1 Remove shipping spacers, which were used to provide protection during
transportation. Do not remove axial spacers if so equipped.

6.3.2 Check if supplied locking screw threads, screw head bearing area and tapers of
the inner ring are lubricated. If not, lubricate them with molybdenum disulfide
grease such as Molykote Gn paste or similar.

Note: It is very important for the Shrink Disc to be lubricated properly. If the correct
lubricant is not used the coupling capacity can be reduced 50% or more.

6.3.3 Position the shrink disc on the coupling hub. The hub outside diameter can be
greased to aid assembly. Make sure the shrink disc is fully seated on the hub
and is not jammed in the radius in the corner.

If the shrink disc is supplied with the optional axial positioning spacers, position
spacers against hub face. Spacers will move away from hub face after
tightening shrink disc.

Page 4 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

6.3.4 Degrease hub bore and shaft seat.

6.3.5 Slide both hub and shrink disc into place on the shaft. Mount hub as shown
below, so that each hub face is flush with the end of its shaft.

Page 5 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

6.3.6 Take any 3 or 4 of the shrink disc locking screws equally spaced and snug them
up to establish a parallel condition of the collar faces, and a perpendicular
position of the shrink disc collar(s) relative to the shaft. This will properly seat
the collars on the taper of the inner ring and avoid cocking of the collars. The
following gap parallelism tolerance values are recommended for the various size
shrink disc.

Sizes 24 - 100 .015" max. deviation in gap

Sizes 110 - 260 .032" max. deviation in gap
Sizes 280 - 540 .062" max. deviation in gap

6.3.7 Using a torque wrench, tighten all locking screws gradually one after another all
around in a clockwise or counterclockwise sequence (not in diametrically
opposite sequence). Depending on size of shrink disc it can take as many as
10-15 complete passes before the specified tightening torque (Ma) is reached. It
is imperative that the locking screws be tightened properly, since this affects
coupling capacity.

SHRINK DISC LOCKING SCREW TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES - Ma

Screw size
(Metric) DIN 931 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M27
Grade 10.9
Distance across
flats of head 8 10 13 17 19 24 30 36 41
(mm)
Ma (Nm) 5 12 30 59 100 250 490 840 1250
Ma (lb-ft) 3.6 8.7 22 44 74 185 362 620 922

Page 6 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

6.3.8 Check and make sure that no screws will turn anymore by applying specified
torque (Ma). Only then is the installation complete. Make sure that both collars
are still parallel (see 6.2.6), correct if not.

6.3.9 Check that the hub is correctly positioned on the shaft, and using dial indicators
check hub runout as illustrated below. Checking the hub runout insures
correctness of hub mounting and will reduce unit movement (wobble).

Make sure runout values don't exceed limits listed below.

MAXIMUM RUNOUTS (TIR)

FOR DIAL INDICATORS,
INCHES (mm)
#1 #2 #3
ALL SIZES .001 (.02) .005 (.13) .005 (.13)

If runout is excessive reverse the hub assembly procedure and carefully

reassemble, and recheck hub runout. As a final check, recheck all fasteners to
be sure they are torqued to specify value (Ma).

6.3.10 Mount other hub if required (See step 6.1 or 6.2). Otherwise proceed to step 7
for installation of coupling.

Page 7 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

7) With suitable lifting equipment, move the gearbox/motor assembly into position
approximately parallel and in line with the driven shaft using hub flanges as a guide. Align
bolt holes, and install and hand tighten, one flange bolt. Align hub registers and flange bolt
holes. Install all flange bolts finger tight.

8) Use a precision torque wrench and equally tighten all opposing bolts (star pattern) while
allowing the reducer assembly to move as required to draw the flanges together (flexible
support). Continue tightening until flanges are mated and all flange bolts are torqued to
values specified in table below. Hydraulic powered torque wrenches supplied by such
companies as, BMF of Huntington Beach, Ca., may assist in tightening the largest bolts.

FLANGE BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES

COUPLING FLANGE BOLT SIZE FLANGE BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUE
SIZE SAE GRADE 8 OR ASTM Tolerance (+/-) 5%
A354 GRADE .BC (Nm) (lb-ft)
INCHES
1045MCF 1.125-7UNC x 4.00 1320 970
1055MCF 1.125-7UNC x 4.00 1320 970
1060MCF 1.250-7UNC x 4.50 1850 1360
1065MCF 1.250-7UNC x 5.00 1850 1360
1075MCF 1.500-6UNC x 6.00 3180 2340
1080MCF 1.500-6UNC x 7.00 3180 2340
1090MCF 1.500-6UNC x 7.00 3180 2340
1095MCF 1.500-6UNC x 8.00 3180 2340
1110MCF 1.750-5UNC x 9.00 4350 3200
1115MCF
1120MCF 2.250-4.5UNC x 10.00 9380 6900

9) Fasten the torque arm to the bed frame and remove the lifting equipment. Falk
recommends that a "loose" (don't restrain unit) safety sling be attached to the bed plate
and support structure, or a support structure under the bed plate not directly attached to
the bed plate, to support the drive unit in case of an emergency.

Page 8 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

10) Using dial indicators per sketch below, on driving and driven shafts, measure assembly
runout. Runout values should be within .004" TIR to minimize unit wobble.

11) Run the drive for a short period of time, and then shut off and lockout motor. Recheck
all fasteners for specified torque.

12) The coupling installation is now complete.

13) WARNING, install the warning nameplate supplied with the coupling on the
coupling guard or on some other support structure near the coupling.

Page 9 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

REMOVAL
1) Do not disconnect torque arm or tie rod until the low speed coupling
is completely disconnected.
2) With suitable equipment, remove the weight of the reducer assembly from the coupling
and driven shafts. It is necessary to make fine adjustments of position at each of the
bed plate lugs, and the lifting slings should have appropriate provisions for adjustment.

3) Lift the unit by the lifting lugs on the bedplate or wrap slings around the assembly when a
bedplate is not used. Balance loads so unit is level and will not swing down when the
coupling is disconnected.

4) Loosen flange bolts in sequence until all bolts have at least a .125" clearance under the
bolt heads. Remove all but one bolt near the top of the flange. Separate the two flanges
using four (4) 1/2 - 13UNC bolts (not supplied with coupling) inserted in the four
jackscrew holes in the male register flange. Continue backing off the last flange bolt as
the flanges are separated. When completely separated, adjust the weight of the reducer
assembly until the weight is off the last bolt, and carefully remove the last bolt.

5) Adjust the reducer assembly position until all the weight of the assembly is balanced.
Slowly move the reducer assembly out and away from underneath the tie rod. When the
reducer assembly is not directly above the tie rod, and the tie rod is no longer bearing
any of the weight, disconnect the tie rod. Slowly lower the assembly to the ground.

6) When removing the shrink disc, first clean all debris from between the hub flange and
shrink disc clamping flange to insure the flange can move axially when loosened. Then
gradually loosen the locking screws in sequence using 90 turns to avoid tilting and
jamming the collars. Do not completely unscrew the screws, otherwise the collars may
spring off. Remove any rust from in front of the hub, and pull hub from shaft.

7) For removal of thermal interference fit hubs with hydraulic assist removal refer to
supplemental instructions.

MAINTENANCE
1) Whenever the equipment is down for general maintenance or service, recheck the
tightening torque of the shrink disc and flange fasteners. Re-torque fasteners if
necessary.

Page 10 of 11
Specification No: 6.9.1.2.2
File No: C - 1.6.7.7.2

SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS
FOR REMOVAL OF HUBS WITH
HYDRAULIC ASSIST REMOVAL

“CAUTION”
This procedure uses high pressure equipment. All safety
precautions must be carefully observed and followed.
Lock out starting switch of prime mover.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Three hand operated high pressure pumps, having a minimum capacity of 40,000 psi.,
each with a pressure gauge, high pressure pipe with quick connectors and an adapter
nipple for 0.75" BSP pipe thread. Do not use American Standard tapered pipe thread.
These thread types are unable to sustain the high pressures required for hydraulic removal.
Also one hub puller having a minimum 200 ton capacity.

1) Prepare hub for disassembly.

Connect oil pumps to the oil feed holes located in hub outside diameter. Assemble hub
puller to hub using a heavy bar and the puller holes in the hub face. Use Grade 8 bolts
for attaching the bar to the puller holes.

2) Expand the hub.

Pump oil between the hub and shaft by using the high pressure pumps. Continue to
pump until oil emerges around hub bore. Then remove hub quickly, using hub puller.
Do not exceed 30,000 psi on high pressure pumps. If hub is not free after reaching
30,000 psi, maintain pressure and wait for oil to work through bore fit.

Page 11 of 11
 Elektrim® Premium Efficient Motors

8,45

45°
45°

1,77
0,25 3,13

,14
11
2,55
7,25

0,312
0,312

8,90

10,46
1,201
8,50
1,375
1/2

5,25
0,60
-13
1

5,50 3,50 3,38 0,41 2,20

9,60 8,50

20,66 10,24



SIE213TC
213TC C-Face
Data is for reference only, and is subject to change. Elektrim Motors • www.elektrimmotors.com • 855-Go-Elektrim • 847-524-1074
 
 Elektrim® 20N NEMA Premium®
40NFC Crusher and 40N Design C
Series Motors

CONNECTION DIAGRAM NEMA 213T up to 100HP

Data is for reference only, and is subject to change. Elektrim Motors • www.elektrimmotors.com • 855-Go-Elektrim • 847-524-1074
PART WINDING STARTING / ON 230V ONLY

 
 

Note: Contacts 1 are closed first, followed shortly by contacts. The current rating of the overload
heaters should be one half the motor F. L.C. for part winding starting.

MAINTENANCE
Elektrim NEMA standard motors are designed and built for maximum
reliability and low maintenance requirements. Following these
recommendations will assure you of full service life from your motor and
minimize downtime:
1. Keep the motor clean and provide adequate ventilation.
2. Make sure all screens, covers and safety guards are in place.
3. Shut off power and discharge capacitors (except as indicated) NEMA 140 up to 280 Frame
before working or performing maintenance on the motor.
INSTALLATION AND
ASSEMBLY OF THE MOTOR
The permissible value of the screw-down torque for motor fixing screws. MAINTENANCE
140 30 ft. lbs. 250 45 ft. lbs. INSTRUCTIONS
180 40 ft. lbs. 280 45 ft. lbs.
210 40 ft. lbs.
INTRODUCTION
Please report any conclusions arising from use of the motors to Elektrim
where they will be considered in order to better the quality and utility The purpose of this booklet is to help you install, operate and maintain
advantages of the motors. ELEKTRIM Motors to assure that you will get full advantage of their
built-in efficiency and reliability. Following the recommended
ELEKTRIM MOTORS installation and maintenance procedures will extend the service life of
2015 S. Mitchell Blvd., Schaumburg, IL 60193 the motor and minimize downtime.
855-Go-Elektrim or 847-524-1074 │ Fax 847-524-9996
www.elektrimmotors.com│ support@elektrimmotors.com
UPON DELIVERY Starting controls and overload protection relays must be sized according
Upon receipt of your ELEKTRIM motor, visually inspect it for damage to the motor ratings, National Technical Code, and recommendations of
that may have occurred in shipment or storage. Turn the shaft manually the control manufacturer.
to be sure that it runs freely, and check the nameplate data to be sure that
specifications are in accordance with your order. Before installing the
motor, inspect the windings for moisture. CONNECTING DATA AND METHODS OF STARTING
Insulation resistance lower than 20 MOHMS - for 143T through 184T SIZE 143T -184T ACROSS THE LINE STARTING
frame motors, and 2 MOHMS - for 213T through 286T (S) frame
motors as measured with a 500V magneto - resistance control device
between each phase and frame indicates excess moisture requiring that
the windings be dried before installation.

MOUNTING
ELEKTRIM motors may be mounted horizontally or vertically provided
that there is free movement of air for cooling. Ambient temperatures
must not exceed 104°F (40°C). The motors are designed for NEMA F-1,
W-2, W-3, W-6, W-8, and C-2 mounting assemblies. F1 assembly is
standard. Motors should be mounted on a firm, flat base using the TO REVERSE ROTATION INTERCHANGE
largest bolts that will fit the bracket holes. ELEKTRIM motors may be ANY TWO LINES
used with any type of drive provided that the motor is accurately aligned
SIZE 213T - 286T (S) ACROSS THE LINE STARTING
and within capacity parameters. Tighten belt sufficiently to prevent
slippage, but avoid over-tightening which can lead to bearing damage.
When mounting the motor make sure drain plugs are removed and drain
holes are positioned to allow condensed moisture to drain off.

TO REDUCE MAINTENACE REQUIREMENTS

To reduce maintenance requirements and extend motor life, protect your
Elektrim motor from:

a) Excessive moisture,

b) Excessive dirt which can reduce cooling effectiveness, WYE - DELTA Starting
CONNECT AS BELOW
c) Overheating due to ambient temperature in excess of 104°C,
blocked ventilation, and frequent or prolonged starting, Voltage Connect to Starter Link Together
460V T1, T2, T3, T10, T11, T12 T4-T7; T5-T8; T6-T9
d) Inaccessible position that makes regular maintenance difficult. 230V T1, T2, T3, T10, T11, T12 T1-T7; T2-T8; T3-T9
T10-T4; T11-T5; T12-T6
POWER SUPPLY AND CONNECTIONS
Power supply voltage should not vary more than ± 10% from the
nominal voltage on the nameplate.
Operating, Maintenance,
and Instruction Manual

Baker Manufacturing Company

133 Enterprise Street
Evansville, WI 53536
Toll Free: (800) 871-9250
Phone: (608) 882-5100
Fax: (608) 882-3777
E-mail: haight@baker-mfg.com
Webstie: www.haightpump.com

HPOM 1/12
1
Pre-Installation
1. Choose a location that is easily accessible for pump servicing. Ensure adequate electrical service is
available.

2. Locate the pump for direct piping. Special attention should be given to the suction piping which should
be as large, or larger, than the pump intake port. For efficient operation, it is essen¬tial the suction
side of a gear pump not be restricted. Avoid tees, elbows, valves, and other flow devices within 12 pipe
diameters of the pipe inlet. Provide adequate support for the piping. The pump should not be used to sup-
port piping.

3. Pumps are shipped with the suction port marked - IN; the discharge port marked -OUT. On 1-9 GPM
pumps, the suction port on pumps with relief valves is the port nearest to the relief valve adjusting screw.
This is opposite on 10-240 GPM pumps.

4. Pumps will operate in either direction. However, the relief valve will only function in one direction.
Relief valve components are symmetrical and can be installed to operate with either clockwise or counter-
clockwise shaft rotation.

5. Have an electrician connect the motor using sound practice. Provide adequate overload protection.
Note: When checking the direction of rotation, the pump must be full of liquid. Pumps fitted with
mechanical seals must not run dry, not even momentarily. Determine the direction of rotation by
watching the motor fan.

6.The motor selected meets the requirements of the specified operating conditions. Changed condi-
tions, for example, higher viscosity, higher specific gravity, or lower head losses, can over¬load the motor.
When changing operating conditions, or whenever there is any doubt, please contact your local distributor
with the full details.

Installation
1. Provide a solid foundation free from excessive vibration.

2. Shim to prevent distortion of the pump mount base. Securely anchor the pump and motor to the foun-
dation.

3. All pipe connections on the suction side of the pump must be air tight. An air leak on the suc¬tion side
of the pump will result in the loss of prime.

4. Provide priming tee on the discharge line of the pump.

5. If the media pumped contains solids, a suction strainer is recommended to exclude solid particles from
the pump. Contact Haight Pump for a recommendation.

6. Support the piping independent of the pump. Excessive strain on the pump casing can interfere with
gear alignment.

7. When the piping is complete, loosen the bracket set screws and allow the pump to align with the piping.
Tighten the bracket set screws and re-check the shaft alignment. Make sure there is no metal to metal
contact of the coupling halves. Do not over tighten the pipe/pump connections, as damage can result.

8. A vacuum gauge can be installed in the pipe plug on the relief valve nearest the adjustment screw (1-9
GPM). A pressure gauge can be installed in the opposite pipe plug (1-9 GPM). 10-80 GPM relief vales
are designed to incorporate a vacuum gage only.

9. Check the shaft rotation to ensure it is correct. Normal rotation is clockwise as viewed from the shaft
side of the pump.

2
Precautionary Notes
1. Prior to performing any service on the pump or motor:
(a) Disconnect and lockout the power source to the motor (refer to OSHA 1910.147.)
(b) Shut off any liquid heating source.
(c) If the unit operates at elevated temperatures, allow it to cool to room temperature before per
forming any service.

2. Drain the pump and piping of excess liquid. Caution: Handle and dispose of liquids in accor¬dance
to the manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets.

Disassembly for Inspection Purposes Only

1. Remove the bolts from the drive plate.

2. Carefully separate the drive cover and housing. Rotate the pump shaft by hand. It should turn freely. If
resistance is present, check for built up residue.

3. Use a soft marker to mark the rotor/pinion location. Remove the rotor from the housing.

4. Inspect the housing, shaft/pinion, rotor, and drive plate for signs of wear or damage. Excessive wear
will decrease pump performance.

5. Inspect the O-rings, gaskets, and bearings for chipping, splitting, or missing sections.

6. Inspection of the pump seal requires complete removal of the pump from the motor and bracket.

Complete Disassembly for Repair or Replacement

1. Complete precautionary steps 1 and 2.

2. Loosen the support bracket screws that secure the pump to the bracket.
(a) Size 1-9 GPM pumps: 3 set screws
(b) Size 10-80 GPM pumps: 4 cap screws
(c) Size 120-240 GPM pumps: 8 cap screws

3. Remove the coupling and shaft key. Inspect the shaft end for burrs or other damage.

4. Rotate the pump shaft by hand. It should rotate freely. Cheater bar needed for large flow pumps (44-
240 GPM).

5. Remove the bolts from the drive plate.

6. Carefully separate the drive cover and housing.

7. Use a soft marker to mark the rotor/pinion location. Remove the rotor from the housing.

8. Remove the shaft/pinion assembly from the housing.

9. Carefully pry the cover off the housing.

10. Inspect, repair, or replace all damaged parts.

Note: If significant damage is evident to the major pump components, it is best to replace the pump. If
possible, determine the cause of the damage and correct the identified problem.

3
Reassembly
1. Pump reassembly is the reverse of disassembly. However, care should be exercised in three areas:
(a) It is good practice to replace elastomer sealing devices and gaskets every time the pump is
reassembled. This is mandatory for Teflon o-rings and lip seals. Gently stretch the o-rings
before placing them in the o-ring groove.
(b) Place the rotor into position with your mark facing out.
(c) Use a cross bolt tightening pattern to re-assemble the housing and covers. Periodically turn
the pump shaft. Check for unusual noise. Improper tightening will cause the pump to bind.

2. The pump will function best if primed first. Return the pump to service and check for leaking and loose
connections. Air leaks on the suction side of the pump will reduce pump performance.

Relief Valve Components

1. See precautionary notes.

2. To change the relief valve for reverse rotation:

(a) Loosen the locknut on the adjusting screw while holding the adjusting screw stationary.
(b) Remove the bonnet and bonnet washer.
(c) Remove the adjusting screw, spring, and poppet.
(d) Remove the cap and cap washer.

3. Reassemble in reverse order. Remember the spring and adjusting screw must be on the suction side
of the pump for the relief valve to operate.

4. Unbolt reliefe valve from pump (4 bolts) and reverse assembly. Note: venting needs to be reversed
also.

Special Seal Components

1. Standard 1-240 U/UR pumps use a lip seal as the main shaft seal. These seals are available in Buna-
N, Viton, Neoprene, Silicon, Kalrez, PTFE materials.

2. Packed pumps use 4 or 5 element V-cup Teflon shaft seals. Shaft seals are also available in Graphite
rope, Graphfoil, and virgin Teflon. A gland is included to provide tension for the packing.

3. Type 21, Type 2, Type 2B, and Type 9 mechanical seals are available. Contact Haight Pumps for spe-
cial drawings for pumps with mechanical seals.

Maintenance Parts or Factory Repair

1. When ordering parts, for pumps from 1998 and earlier, locate the pump serial number stamped on the
machined face of the cover or body of the pump housing. For pumps from 1999 and later, the serial num-
ber tag is located on the pump body.

2. Haight Pump maintains a repair service shop that will rebuild, test, and return pumps promptly.

3. Remove pipes, coupling, and mounting bracket before returning the pump to the factory.

4. Contact Haight Pumps for a Return Good Authorization number before sending the pump to the factory.
Material Safety Data Sheets are required on all returns.

4
General Information
The following is general information about Haight rotary gear pumps. Due to the variety of options
and configurations available, it is not possible to provide detailed information in this manual. Detailed
drawings and bill of materials will be provided upon request.

Never operate a pump with the discharge line closed or plugged. Severe damage to the pump
and/or system will result.

Haight Pumps does not accept responsibility or liability for damage or injury resulting from
improper application and/or operation of the pump and/or system.

Direction of Rotation Haight pumps are designed to operate in either direction by simply changing the
shaft rotation. Pumps supplied with relief valves are the exception to this rule. Failure to reverse the
relief valve components will render the relief valve inoperable. The procedure for reversing the flow
direction in the relief valve is covered in the Assembly and Disassembly instructions.

Pump Alignment Bedplate mounted pumps and motor combinations are aligned and tested at the
factory. Vibration during shipment and/or poor bedplate mounting conditions can cause premature
failure or unacceptable noise and vibration.

Simple alignment checks can be performed by placing a straight edge on the top and side of the
cou¬pling. Improper alignment is indicated by a separation between the coupling and straight edge.
Ad¬just the motor and pump location until any separation disappears in both planes.

Bedplate Mounting Install nuts on the foundation bolts to provide location adjustment. Loosely place
the bedplate on the foundation bolts. Adjust the bedplate height and location to meet the inlet and
outlet piping. Ensure the bedplate is level and true. Fasten in place with lock washers or lock nuts.
Check coupling alignment.

Piping Improper suction piping is the leading cause of poor pump performance, including cavitation,
noisy operation, inadequate performance, and premature pump failure. Particular care should be
taken to avoid long, restricted pipe runs, the use of elbows, tees, valves, or other flow devices within
twelve (12) pipe diameters of the pump inlet. Inlet piping should be at least equal to the pump inlet
size.

The discharge piping arrangement is somewhat less critical than the inlet side, however, good
engi¬neering practice, as defined by the Hydraulic Institute, should be followed.

Pumps are not designed to be used as piping system support devices. Piping systems should have
adequate, independent hangers to provide support. Again, the Hydraulic Institute offers guidelines for
proper pipe support design.

Seals Haight Pump offers three standard type seals, each with specific operating characteristics.

Lip seals: Available in Buna-N, Viton, Teflon, Silicone, Neoprene, and Kalrez seals. Lip seals
are inexpensive, but have certain limitations, which include:

Expected operating life of 2,000 - 3,000 hours

Should not be used with system pressures over 50 PSI
Should not be used in vacuum applications over 3" HG

5
General Information: Seals (continued)

Packing gland Available in Graphfoil, or Teflon, and other materials upon request. Packing glands
are useful at high temperatures and pressures, resist shock and vibration, and can be adjusted to
accommodate wear. However, packing glands must weep to function properly and require adjust-
ment during the start-up operation.

During start-up, or after repacking, run the pump to pressurize the stuffing box. Steady weepage
should occur in less than ten (10) minutes. If steady weepage has not begun within ten (10) minutes,
stop the pump and allow it to cool. Overheating the gland will damage the packing gland and shaft.
Do not loosen the gland adjustment screws. Repeat this process until steady weepage is estab-
lished.

Adjust the packing gland screws 1/6th of a turn in a cross bolt tightening pattern. Allow to run ten
(10) minutes. Continue this process until the weepage rate is approximately one (1) drop per minute.
Periodic inspection and adjustment will be required. Do not over tighten the packing gland as dam-
age to the gland and shaft will result.

Bearings and Rotor/Pinion Shaft

DU & Carbon Graphite Bearings Recommended for applications over 100 PSI and for thin fluids.

Teflon Rotor Do not use Teflon rotors in applications exceeding 100 PSI, and 200 F. The pump is
provided with open tolerances. Increased slip will reduce efficiency with fluids below 200 SSU.

Delrin Rotor Do not use above 80 PSI and 120 F. Delrin rotors provide better abrasion resistance
than Teflon rotors. The pump is provided with open tolerances. Increased slip will reduce efficiency
with fluids below 200 SSU.

Note: For applications above 75 PSI, vent both shaft bearings to the suction side of pump.

Spares and Repairs

Haight Pumps operates a repair service for all pumps for which records exist. To ensure the correct
parts are supplied, the pump serial number is required. The serial number is stamped into the metal
of the pump body or cover, in a prominent position on the top area of the pump.

We advise customers whose pumps are custom fabricated to have spare pumps or parts on hand.
Custom fabricated pumps and parts generally have long delivery times for replacement.

6
 Troubleshooting
Problem Probable Cause

No liquid delivered •Pump not primed

•Suction lift too high; check with a gauge at the pump suction
•Wrong direction of rotation
•Pump not rotating (failure of drive from prime mover)

Not enough liquid •Air leaks in suction line or through stuffing box
delivered •Speed too low
•Suction lift too high, or not enough suction head (for hot liquids)
•Foot valve too small or obstructed
•Foot valve or end of suction pipe not immersed deeply enough
•Piping improperly installed, permitting air or gas to pocket in pump
•Mechanical defects:
•Pump damaged
•Pump badly worn
•Packing defective
•Relief valve not sealing or jammed by foreign matter

Pump works for awhile, •Leaky suction lines

then loses suction •Suction lift too high
•Air or gases in liquid
•Plugged lines or filter

Pump takes too •Speed too high

much power •Liquid heavier or more viscous than design condition
•Suction or discharge line obstructed
•Mechanical defects:
•Shaft bent
•Rotating element binds
•Stuffing boxes too tight
•Misalignment due to improper connection of pipe lines or driver
•Poor piping conditions
•Check pressure is being measured at the pump and not some distance
away from the pump, thus ignoring pressure losses in piping, valves, etc.

Noisy pump •Speed too high

•Suction lift or viscosity too high (piping diameter too small)
•Wrong direction of rotation (recesses in the pump covers to prevent hy
draulic noise operate only in one direction)
•Badly supported pipe or bedplates causing resonant vibration
•Relief valve chattering
•Pressure too low; an increase in pressure can prevent gear noise in low
pressure applications
•Cavitation due to inlet or outlet conditions

Gland leakage •Packing hard and shaft scored

•Pressure on pump too high or pressure relief passage blocked
•Shaft run out excessive
•When re-packing a gland, all the old packing must be removed; it is not
good enough to just add extra rings as the original packing becomes com
pressed

7
HAIGHT 3E & 5E STANDARD HOT OIL PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS

HAIGHT® 3E and 5E Hot Oil Replacement Parts

5
2
16
7
11 10

1 16A
8

Item Description Style Part Number Qty

No
1 E Style Casing 3E & 5E ED53F5 1
2 3E Cover 3E ED330F 1
5E Cover 5E ED530F 1
5 Cover Bolts 3E & 5E E90HC.6 4
7 Cover O-Ring 3E & 5E E28V1 1
8 Lip Seal 3E & 5E E18V 1
10 Rotor 3E D326F1 1
10 Rotor 5E D526F1 1
11 Pinion 3E & 5E N/A 1
16 Shaft - Tang 3E & 5E N/A 1
16A Tang Shaft-Pinion Assy 3E ED3C13BC 1
16A Tang Shaft-Pinion Assy 5E RED5C13BC 1
17 Keyed Shaft 3E & 5E N/A 1
17A Keyed Shaft-Pinion Assy (Not Shown) 3E DU3C13PK 1
17A Keyed Shaft-Pinion Assy (Not Shown) 5E DU5C13PK 1

8
 6G & 8G6G
HAIGHT ®
& 8G Hot Oil
GEROTOR Gerotor Pump Replacement Parts
PUMP
**Obsolete pump since
REPLACEMENT 2004 - some parts no longer available**
PARTS

16A 3

10

16

Item No Description Style Part Number Qty

1 G Style Casing 6G EG63F7D 1
8G EG83F7A 1
2 6G Cover 6G & 8G EG830F 1
3 Vent Set Screw 6G & 8G E49G 2
5 Cover Bolts 6G & 8G E90HC.6 4
6 Bearing 6G & 8G E11F 2
7 Cover O-Ring 6G & 8G SE2151V76 1
8 Lip Seal 6G & 8G E18V 2
10 Gerotor Set 6G HJ169A 1
8G HJ89A 1
16 Shaft-Tang 6G F18C50 1
8G ED524BC 1
16A Shaft/Spacer/Key Assy 6G DU6C13BC 1
16A Tang Shaft-Pinion Assy 8G DU8C13BC 1

9
1U through 5U HAIGHT® Pumps with or without Relief Valve

10
 1U - 5U STANDARD PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS
Item# Description Part No Qty Item# Description Part No Qty

1 Screw-Cover E90HC.6 4 11 Shaft Bearing 1

2 Cover Iron E11F2
1U Standard ED130A 1 Bronze E11B2
Hatrided ED130AH Carbon Graphite E11G2
X-Hard ED130AXH Du-Iron Sleeve E11UFA2
3U Standard ED330A 1 12 Set Screw, Vent E49F 1
Hatrided ED330AH 13 Case 1/2” ports ED56A5 1
X-Hard ED330AXH Hatrided ED56AH5
5U Standard ED530A 1 X-Hard ED56AXH5
Hatrided ED530AH Case 3/4” ports ED56A7 1
X-Hard ED530AXH Hatrided ED56AH7
3 Shaft Bearing 1 X-Hard ED56AXH7
Iron E11F 14 O-ring Gland 1
Bronze E11B Buna E24SE
Carbon Graphite E11G Viton® E24SV
DU-Iron Sleeve E11UFA Neoprene E24SN
4 Wiper Seal 1 Teflon E24ST
Buna E21E Silicone E24SZ
Viton® E21V Kalrez® E24SK
Neoprene E21N 15 Lip Seal
5 O-Ring Cover 1 15A Mechanical T-21 Seal
Buna E28E 16 Washer E25C3 2
Viton® E28V1 17 Mechanical Seal
Neoprene E28N 18 Thrust Bearing E11TB2 1
Teflon E28T 19 Gland E22SS3F4 1
Silicone E28Z 20 O-ring For Cover/Relief Valve 2
Kalrez® E28K Buna SE2018N90
6 Rotor Neoprene SE2018C90
1U Standard D126F1 Kalrez® SE2018K75
Hatrided D126H Teflon SE2018J60
X-Hard D126XH Silicone SE2018S90
Teflon D126T1 Viton® SE2018V90
Delrin D126D1 21 Cover Plate ED530CP 1
Open Clearance D126NF 22 Screw-Cover Plate E90HC.5 4
Ni-Resist D126N1 23 Locking Nut E64C 1
3U Standard D326F1 24 Adjustment Screw E55C 1
Hatrided D326H 25 Sealing Washer Std. E68C 1
X-Hard D326XH Buna E25N1
Teflon D326T1 Neoprene E25C2
Delrin D326D1 Viton® E25V1
Open Clearance D326NF 26 Bonnet E57C
Ni-Resist D326N1 27 O-ring, Relief Valve 1
5U Standard D526F1 Buna SE2020N70
Hatrided D526H Neoprene SE2020C70
X-Hard D526XH Viton® SE2020V76
Teflon D526T1 Tefon Consult Factory
Delrin D526D1 Silicone Consult Factory
Open Clearance D526NF Kalrez® Consult Factory
Ni-Resist D526N1 28 Spring
7 Shaft & Pinion Assembly 40 - 180 PSI E52S 1
1U DU1C13PK 1 100 - 250 PSI E52H
3U DU3C13PK 1 29 Poppet E51C 1
5U DU5C13PK 1 30 Cap E50C 1
7A Tanged Shaft & Pinion Assy 31 Relief Valve Body ED55A 1
1U DU1C13BC 1 32 Pipe Plug ZA285 2
3U DU3C13BC 1 33 Screw, Valve Body E90SC.8 4
5U DU5C13BC 1
7B Outboard Bearing Shaft & Pinion Assy (Not shown)
1U DU1C13LPK 1
3U DU3C13LPK 1
5U DU5C13LPK 1
8 Shaft Keyed (Not sold separately)
8A Shaft-Tang (Not sold separately)
9 Pinion-Steel (Not sold separately)
10 Key 1/8 sq. x 1/2” Long E13C50 1

Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers

11
 HAIGHT® 6U & 8U Gerotor Pumps with or without Relief Valve
**Obsolete pump since 2004 - some parts no longer available**

12
 6U - 8U GEROTOR PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS
**Obsolete pump since 2004 - some parts no longer available**
Item# Description Part No Qty Item# Description Part No Qty

1 Screw-cover E90HC.6 4 21 Cover Plate ED530CP 1

2 Cover EG830A 1 22 Screw, Cover Plate E90HC.5 4
3 Shaft bearing 2 23 Locking Nut E64C 1
Iron E11F 24 Adjustment Screw E55C 1
Bronze E11B 25 Sealing Washer 1
Carbon Graphite E11G Buna E25N1
DU-Iron Sleeve E11UFA Neoprene E25C2
4 Wiper Seal 1 Viton® E25V1
Buna E21E Sealing Gasket E68C 1
Viton® E21V 26 Bonnet E57C 1
Neoprene E21N 27 O-ring, Relief Valve 2
5 O-Ring Cover 1 Buna SE2020N70
Buna SE2151N70 Neoprene SE2020C70
Viton® SE2151V76 Viton® SE2020V76
Neoprene SE2151C70 28 Spring
Teflon SE2151J60 40 - 180 PSI E52S 1
Kalrez® SE2151K75 100 - 250 PSI E52H
Silicone SE2151S70 29 Poppet E51C 1
6 Gerotor Set 1 30 Cap E50C 1
6U Pump 31 Relief Valve Body ED55A 1
Keyed Shaft HJ169A 32 Pipe Plug ZA285 2
8U Pump 33 Screw, Valve Body E90SC.8 4
Keyed Shaft HJ89A
7 & 7A Shaft & Gear Set Assembly 1
6U Pump
Standard DU6C13PK
Outboard Bearing DU6C13LPK
Tang DU6C13BC
8U Pump
Standard DU8C13PK
Outboard Bearing DU8C13LPK
Tang DU8C13BC
8 Shaft-Keyed (Not sold separately)
8A Shaft-Tang (Not sold separately)
10 Key E13C50 1
12 Set Screw, Vent E49G 1
13 Case 3/4” ports 1
6U Pump EG66A7
8U Pump EG86A7
14 O-ring Gland 1
Buna E24SE
Viton® E24SV
Neoprene E24SN
Teflon E24ST
Silicone E24SZ
Kalrez® E24SK
15 Lip Seal
15A Mechanical Seal Package
16 Washer E25C3 1
17 Mechanical Seal
18 Thrust Bearing E11TB2 1
19 Gland E22SS3F4 1
20 O-Ring,Cover Plate or RV Body 2
Buna SE2018N90
Neoprene SE2018C90
Kalrez® SE2018K75
Teflon SE2018J60
Silicone SE2018S90
Viton® SE2018V90

Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers

13
6EU through 9EU HAIGHT® Pumps with or without Relief Valve
After February 1, 2008

14
 6EU - 9EU STANDARD PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS
After February 1, 2008
Item# Description Part No Qty Item# Description Part No Qty

1 Screw-Cover E90HC.6 4 7A Tanged Shaft & Pinion Assy 1

2 Cover 1 6EU ED6C13BCU
6EU Standard ED630A 7EU ED7C13BCU
Hatrided ED630AH 8EU ED8C13BCU
X-Hard ED630AXH 9EU ED9C13BCU
7B Outboard Bearing Shaft & Pinion Assy 1 (Not shown)
7EU Standard ED730A 1
6EU ED6C13LPK 1
Hatrided ED730AH 7EU ED7C13LPK 1
X-Hard ED730AXH 8EU ED8C13LPK 1
8EU Standard ED830A 1 9EU ED9C13LPK 1
Hatrided ED830AH 8 Shaft Keyed (Not sold separately)
X-Hard ED830AXH 8A Shaft-Tang (Not sold separately)
9EU Standard ED930A 1 9 Pinion-Steel (Not sold separately)
Hatrided ED930AH 10 Key 1/8 sq. x 1/2” Long E13C50 1
X-Hard ED930AXH
3 Shaft Bearing 1 11 Shaft Bearing 1
Iron E11F Iron E11F2
Bronze E11B Bronze E11B2
Carbon Graphite E11G Carbon Graphite E11G2
Du-Iron Sleeve E11UFA2
DU-Iron Sleeve E11UFA
12 Set Screw, Vent E49F 1
4 Wiper Seal 1 13 Case 1/2” Ports ED86A5 1
Buna E21E Hatrided ED86AH5
Viton® E21V X-Hard ED86AXH5
Neoprene E21N Case 3/4” Ports ED86A7 1
5 O-Ring Cover 1 Hatrided ED86AH7
Buna SE2041N70 X-Hard ED86AXH7
Viton® SE2041V76 14 O-ring Gland 1
Neoprene SE2041C70 Buna E24SE
Teflon SE2041J70 Viton® E24SV
Silicone SE2041S70 Neoprene E24SN
Teflon E24ST
Silicone E24SZ
6 Rotor 1
Kalrez® E24SK
6EU Standard ED626F1
15 Lip Seal
Hatrided ED626H
15A Mechanical T-21 Seal
X-Hard ED626XH 16 Washer E25C3 2
Teflon ED626T1 17 Mechanical Seal
Delrin ED626D1 18 Thrust Bearing E11TB2 1
Open Clearance ED626NF 19 Gland E22SS3F4 1
Ni-Resist ED626N1 20 O-ring for Cover/Relief Valve 2
7EU Standard ED726F1 Buna SE2018N90
Hatrided ED726H Neoprene SE2018C90
X-Hard ED726XH Kalrez® SE2018K75
Teflon ED726T1 Teflon SE2018J60
Delrin ED726D1 Silicone SE2018S90
Open Clearance ED726NF Viton® SE2018V90
21 Cover Plate ED530CP 1
Ni-Resist ED726N1
22 Screw-Cover Plate E90HC.5 4
8EU Standard ED826F1 23 Locking Nut E64C 1
Hatrided ED826H 24 Adjustment Screw E55C 1
X-Hard ED826XH 25 Sealing Washer Std. E68C 1
Teflon ED826T1 Buna E25N1
Delrin ED826D1 Neoprene E25C2
Open Clearance ED826NF Viton® E25V1
Ni-Resist ED826N1 26 Bonnet E57C
9EU Standard ED926F1 27 O-ring, Relief Valve 1
Hatrided ED926H Buna SE2020N70
X-Hard ED926XH Neoprene SE2020C70
Teflon ED926T1 Viton® SE2020V76
Delrin ED926D1 Tefon Consult Factory
Silicone Consult Factory
Open Clearance ED926NF
Kalrez® Consult Factory
Ni-Resist ED926N1 28 Spring
7 Shaft & Pinion Assembly 1 40 - 180 PSI E52S 1
6EU EU6C13PK 1 100 - 250 PSI E52H
7EU EU7C13PK 1 29 Poppet E51C 1
8EU EU8C13PK 1 30 Cap E50C 1
9EU EU9C13PK 1 31 Relief Valve Body ED55A 1
32 Pipe Plug ZA285 2
33 Screw, Valve Body E90SC.8 4
Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers
15
 10U through 40U HAIGHT® Pumps with or without Relief Valve

Item# Description Part No. Qty. Item# Description Part No. Qty..
1 Screw on Plug SAE16 1 6&6A Bearing 2
2 O-Ring 1 Iron F11F
Buna SE3916N70 Bronze F11B
Viton® SE3916V76 Graphite F11G
Neoprene SE3916C70 DU F11UFA
Kalrez® SE3916K75 7 Wiper Seal 2
Teflon SE3916J60 Buna F21E
Silicone SE3916S70 Neoprene F21N
3 Thrust Washer Kit RRKT001 1 Viton® F21V
4 Screw PC262 8 8 O-Ring-Cover 1
5 Cover 1 Buna F28E
10U D1030A11 Viton® F28V
Hatrided D1030AH11 Neoprene F28N
X-Hard D1030AXH11 Kalrez® F28K
15U D1530A11 Teflon F28T
Hatrided D1530AH11 Silicone F28Z
X-Hard D1530AXH11
20U D2030A11
Hatrided D2030AH11
X-Hard D2030AXH11 Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers

16
 10U - 20U STANDARD PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS

Item# Description Part No. Qty. Item# Description Part No Qty

9 Shaft & Pinion Assy-Std.
10U Standard DU10C13MC3 1 21 O-Ring, Gland 1
OBB Shaft DU10C13MC4 Buna SE2137N70
Hatrided Pinion DU10C13MH3 Viton® SE2137V76
Hatrided/OBB Shaft DU10C13MH4 Neoprene SE2137C70
X-Hard DU10C13MX3 Silicone SE2137S70
X-Hard/OBB Shaft DU10C13MX4 Kalrez® SE2137K75
Open Clearance DU10C13MO3 Teflon SE2137J60
Open Clearance/OBB DU10C13MO4 22 O-Ring, Cover Plate, Valve Body 2
15U Standard DU15C13MC3 1 Buna SE2122N90
OBB Shaft DU15C13MC4 Viton® SE2122V90
Hatrided Pinion DU15C13MH3 Neoprene SE2122C90
Hatrided/OBB Shaft DU15C13MH4 Teflon SE2122J60
X-Hard DU15C13MX3 Silicone SE2122S90
X-Hard/OBB Shaft DU15C13MX4 Kalrez® SE2122K75
Open Clearance DU15C13MO3 23 Screw, Cover Plate E90HC.6 4
Open Clearance/OBB DU15C13MO4 24 Cover Plate D1030CP 1
20U Standard DU20C13MC3 1 25 Valve Body FD55A 1
OBB Shaft DU20C13MC4 26 Screw, Valve Body E90SC2.5 4
Hatrided Pinion DU20C13MH3 27 Pipe Plug F65C 2
Hatrided/OBB Shaft DU20C13MH4 28 Lock Nut E64C 1
X-Hard DU20C13MX3 29 Washer 1
X-Hard/OBB Shat DU20C13MX4 Steel E68C
Open Clearance DU20C13MO3 Teflon E68T
Open Clearance/OBB DU20C13MO4 Optional HP/Vacuum Thread Sealing Gasket 1
Buna E25N1
10 Pinion (Not sold separately. Must order Item #9) Neoprene E25C2
11 Shaft (Not sold separately. Must order Item #9) Viton® E25V1
12 Drive Key 3/16 Sq x 3/4” L F18C75 1 Silicone E25S1
13 Rotor 1 30 Adjustment screw F55C 1
10U Standard D1026F1 31 Retaining ring F59C 2
Hatrided D1026H 32 Bonnet F57C 1
X-Hard D1026XH 33 O-ring, Valve-Buna F56E 3
Delrin D1026D1 Neoprene F56N
Teflon D1026T1 Viton® F56V
Open Clearance D1026NF Teflon F56T
Ni-Resist D1026N1 Silicone F56Z
15U Standard D1526F1 34 Spring-Std H52S 1
Hatrided D1526H Heavy duty H52C
X-Hard D1526XH Light duty H52D
Delrin D1526D1 35 Poppet F51C 1
Teflon D1526T1 36 Cage H50C 1
Open Clearance D1526NF 38 Set Screw, Gland E49D 1
Ni-Resist D1526N1 39 Washer F25C2 1
20U Standard D2026F1 40 Thrust Bearing F11TB2 1
Hatrided D2026H 41 Washer F25C3 1
X-Hard D2026XH 42 Spherical Washer F25C5 1
Delrin D2026D1 43 Spherical Washer F25C4 1
Teflon D2026T1 44 Nut ZA532A 1
Open Clearance D2026NF 45 Pin F41C 1
Ni-Resist D2026N1 55 Pipe Plug 3/4” NPT DP20S 1
14 Case 1 56 Screw E90HC1.2 4
1” ports D203A11K 57 Valve Body FD55SA 1
1-1/4” Ports D203A11L 58 Pipe Plug F65C 1
1-1/2” Ports D203A11M 59 Piston RVP05 1
Case - Hatrided 60 O-Ring 1
1” ports D203AH11K Buna F92B 1
1-1/4” Ports D203AH11L Neoprene F92N 1
1-1/2” Ports D203AH11M Viton F92V 1
Case - X-Hard Silicone F92Z 1
1” ports D203AXH11K 61 Spring
1-1/4” Ports D203AXH11L 20-40 PSI H52L 1
1-1/2” Ports D203AXH11M 50-80 PSI H52M 1
90-130 PSI H52N 1
15 Lip Seal 170-220 PSI H52P 1
15A Mechanical Seal 62 Bonnet F56A 1
15B Packing Seal 63 Nut E64JN 1
16 Washer F25C3 1 64 Adjustment Screw F55C 1
16A Washer F25C2 1
17 Gland F22SS2A 1
18 Thrust Bearing F11TB2 1
19 Set Screw, Vent E49E 1
20 Pin F43C1 1

Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers

17
 24U - 40U STANDARD PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS
Item# Description Part No Qty Item# Description Part No Qty
1 Screw on Plug SAE16 1 Open Clearance DU30C13MO7
2 O-Ring 1 Open Clearance/OBB DU30C13MO8
Buna SE3916N70 40U Standard DU40C13MC7 1
Viton® SE3916V76 OBB Shaft DU40C13MC8
Neoprene SE3916C70 Hatrided Pinion DU40C13MH7
Kalrez® SE3916K75 Hatrided/OBB Shaft DU40C13MH8
Teflon SE3916J60 X-Hard DU40C13MX7
Silicone SE3916S70 X-Hard/OBB Shaft DU40C13MX8
3 Thrust Washer Kit RRKT001 1 Open Clearance DU40C13MO7
4 Screw KR364 8 Open Clearance/OBB DU40C13MO8
5 Cover 1 10 Pinion (Not sold separately. Must order Item #9)
24U D2230A11 11 Shaft (Not sold separately. Must order Item #9)
Hatrided D2230AH11 12 Drive Key 3/16 Sqx3/4” L F18C75 1
X-Hard D2230AXH11 13 Rotor
30U D3030A11 24U Standard D2226F1 1
Hatrided D3030AH11 Hatrided D2226H
X-Hard D3030AXH11 X-Hard D2226XH
40U D4030A11 Delrin D2226D1
Hatrided D4030AH11 Teflon D2226T1
X-Hard D4030AXH11 Open Clearance D2226NF
6 & 6A Bearing 24U & 30U 2 Ni-Resist D2226N1
Iron H11F 30U Standard D3026F1 1
Bronze H11B Hatrided D3026H
Graphite H11G X-Hard D3026XH
DU H11UFA Delrin D3026D1
6A Bearing 40U Teflon D3026T1
Iron H11F10 1 Open Clearance D3026NF
Bronze H11B10 1 Ni-Resist D3026N1
Graphite H11G10 1 40U Standard D4026F1 1
6 Bearing 40U Hatrided D4026H
Iron H11F 1 X-Hard D4026XH
Bronze H11B 1 Delrin D4026D1
Graphite H11G 1 Teflon D4026T1
DU H11UFA 2 Open Clearance D4026NF
7 Wiper Seal 2 Ni-Resist D4026N1
Buna H21E 14 Case 1
Neoprene H21N 1-1/4” Ports D403A11L
Viton® H21V 1-1/2” Ports D403A11M
8 O-Ring-Cover 1 Case - Hatrided 1
Buna H28E 1-1/4” Ports D403AH11L
Viton® H28V 1-1/2” Ports D403AH11M
Neoprene H28N Case - X-Hard 1
Kalrez® H28K 1-1/4” Ports D403AXH11L
Teflon H28T 1-1/2” Ports D403AXH11M
Silicone H28Z 15 Lip Seal
9 Shaft & Pinion Assy-Std. 15A Mechanical Seal
24U Standard DU22C13MC7 1 15B Gland H22SS2A
OBB Shaft DU22C13MC8 16 Washer H25C2 1
Hatrided Pinion DU22C13MH7 16A Washer H25C2 1
Hatrided/OBB Shaft DU22C13MH8 17 Shaft Seal (See Seal Kits)
X-Hard DU22C13MX7 18 Thrust Bearing F11TB2 1
X-Hard/OBB Shaft DU22C13MX8 19 Set Screw, Vent E49E 1
Open Clearance DU22C13MO7 20 Pin F43C1 1
Open Clearance/OBB DU22C13MO8 21 O-Ring, Gland 1
30U Standard DU30C13MC7 1 Buna SE2137N70
OBB Shaft DU30C13MC8 Viton® SE2137V76
Hatrided Pinion DU30C13MH7 Neoprene SE2137C70
Hatrided/OBB Shaft DU30C13MH8
X-Hard DU30C13MX7
X-Hard/OBB Shaft DU30C13MX8

Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers

18
 24U - 40U STANDARD PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS
Item# Description Part No. Qty
Silicone SE2137S70
Kalrez® SE2137K75
Teflon SE2137J60
22 O-Ring, Cover Plate, Valve Body 2
Buna SE2122N90
Viton® SE2122V90
Neoprene SE2122C90
Teflon SE2122J60
Silicone SE2122S90
Kalrez® SE2122K75
23 Screw, Cover Plate E90HC.6 4
24 Cover Plate D.I. D1030CP 1
25 Valve Body FD55A 1
26 Screw, Valve Body E90SC2.5 4
27 Pipe Plug F65C 2
28 Lock Nut E64C 1
29 Washer 1
Steel E68C
Teflon E68T
Optional HP/Vacuum Thread Sealing Gasket 1
Buna E25N1
Neoprene E25C2
Viton® E25V1
Silicone E25S1
30 Adjustment Screw F55C 1
31 Retaining Ring F59C 2
32 Bonnet F57C 1
33 O-ring, Valve-Buna F56E 3
Neoprene F56N
Viton® F56V
Teflon F56T
Silicone F56Z
34 Spring-Std H52S 1
Heavy Duty H52C
Light Duty H52D
35 Poppet F51C 1
36 Cage H50C 1
38 Set Screw, Gland E49D 1
39 Washer F25C2 1
40 Thrust Bearing F11TB2 1
41 Washer F25C3 1
42 Spherical Washer F25C5 1
43 Spherical Washer F25C4 1
44 Nut ZA532A 1
45 Pin F41C 1
55 Pipe Plug 3/4” NPT DP20S 1
56 Screw E90HC1.2 4
57 Valve Body FD55SA 1
58 Pipe Plug F65C 1
59 Piston RVP05 1
60 O-Ring 1
Buna F92B 1
Neoprene F92N 1
Viton F92V 1
Silicone F92Z 1
61 Spring
20-40 PSI H52L 1
50-80 PSI H52M 1
90-130 PSI H52N 1
170-220 PSI H52P 1
62 Bonnet F56A 1
63 Nut E64JN 1
64 Adjustment Screw F55C 1

Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers

19
HAIGHT® 44 through 80 GPM Double Pump

20
 44 - 80 GPM DOUBLE PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS
Item# Description Part No Qty Item# Description Part No Qty
1 Screw .375 x .875 UNC HSCS H90SC.8 12 25 O-ring-Gland 2
2 Drive Key .188 x .75 F18C75 1 Buna SE2137N70
3 Set Screw 10-32x1/4 SH CP E49E 2 Viton® SE2137V76
4 Shaft Bearing .877 x 1.5 x 1.128 3 Neoprene SE2137C70
Iron H11F Kalrez® SE2137K75
Bronze H11B Silicone SE2137S70
Carbon Graphite H11G Teflon SE2137J60
5 Eyebolt EYB1 1 26 Gland Cap-Shaft H22SS2A 1
6 O-ring 2 27 Gland Cap F22SM2A 1
Neoprene H28N 28 Mechanical Shaft Seal
Buna N H28E 29 Set Screw 10-32x1/4 SH CP E49D 1
Viton® H28V 30 Washer .656x1.66x.094 F25C7 1
Kalrez® H28K 31 Roll Pin F43C1 1
Teflon H28T 32 O-ring 4
Silicone H28Z Buna SE2122N90
7 Casing D403A4 1 Viton® SE2122V90
8 Shaft & Pinion Assembly 1 Neoprene SE2122C90
44 GPM RSK001 Kalrez® SE2122K75
54 GPM RSK002 Teflon SE2122J60
60 GPM RSK003 Silicone SE2122S90
70 GPM RSK004 33 Cover Plate D8030CP 1
80 GPM RSK005 34 Screw, Cover Plate E90SC.9 4
9 Standard Pinion (Not sold separately. See Item #8) 35 Valve Body RVB03 1
9A Keyed Pinion (Not sold separately. See Item #8) 36 Pipe Plug F65C 2
10 Shaft (Not sold separately. See Item #8) 37 Screw, Valve Body E90SC2.0 4
11 Key, Pinion - .188x 1.0 F18C100 1 38 Valve Piston RVP04 1
12 Rotor 1 39 O-ring, Valve Piston 1
44 GPM D2226F1 Buna SE2327N70
54 GPM D2226F1 Viton® SE2327V76
60 GPM D3026F1 Neoprene SE2327C70
70 GPM D4026F1 Silicone SE2327S70
80 GPM D4026F1 Kalrez® SE2327K75
12A Mating Rotor 1 40 Spring 1
44 GPM D2226F1 40 - 80 PSI H52E
54 GPM D3026F1 80 - 130 PSI H52F
60 GPM D3026F1 130 - 220 PSI H52G
70 GPM D3026F1 41 O-ring, Valve Cover 1
80 GPM D4026F1 Buna SE2160N70
13 Drive Plate 1 Viton SE2160V76
44 GPM D2230A8 Neoprene SE2160C70
54 GPM D3030A8 Silicone SE2160S70
60 GPM D3030A8 Kalrez® SE2160K75
70 GPM D3030A8 42 Valve Cover RVC30 1
80 GPM D4030A8 43 Screw, Valve Cover E90SC1.0 4
13A Cover 1 44 Pipe Plug H65C 1
44 GPM D2230A8 45 Adjustment Screw F55C 1
54 GPM D2230A8 46 Lock Nut E64C 1
60 GPM D3030A8
70 GPM D4030A8
80 GPM D4030A8
14 Roll Pin .156x1.13 F41C1 2
15 Seal Kit
16 Washer .625x1.12x.094 H25C2 2
18 Thrust Bearing (Keyed end) (.875) H11TB2 1
19 Washer (1.12 x .63 x .09 hard steel) F25C2 1
20 Thrust Washer (.625) F11TB2 1
21 Washer (1.12 x .63 x .03 hard steel) F25C3 1
22 Washer F25C5 1
23 Locking Nut ZA532A 1
24 Washer F25C4 1

Viton® and Kalrez® are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers

21
HAIGHT® 120 GPM Large Flow Pump

22
 120 GPM LARGE FLOW PUMP REPLACEMENT PARTS

Item# Description Part No Qty

1 Screw H90SC1.2 16
2 Drive Key, 5/16 Sq X 1.50 Lg J31C15A 1
3 Set Screw, Vent J49E 2
4 Bearing J11GF 2
5 Eyebolt EYB5 1
6 O-ring, Cover SE2366N70 2
7 Case D2403A 1
8 Shaft & Pinion Assembly D60C13D1 1
9 Standard Pinion (Not sold separately. See Item #8)
9A Keyed Pinion (Not sold separately. See Item #8)
10 Shaft (Not sold separately. See Item #8)
11 Key, 5/16 Sq X 1.150 Lg J31C15A 1
12 Rotor D6026F 1
12A Rotor D6026F 1
13 Cover D6030A 1
13A Cover D6030A 1
14 Pin F41C5 2
15 Washer J25C2 1
16 Thrust Bearing J11TB2 1
17 Washer J25C2 1
18 O-ring,Gland SE2151N70 2
19 Gland J22SS2A 1
20 Gland J22SS2AS 1
21 Shaft Seal J18AMS 1
22 Sleeve 240CPSLV 2
23 Top Cover D24030CP 1
24 Top Cover Screws KL84 4
25 Eye Bolt Nut PC433W 1
26 Pipe Plug UK50 1
27 O-ring, Top Cover F28E 2
28 Bearing J11CGF 2

23
 Falk™ Type NRT Low Speed Backstop • Metric Dimensions
Sizes 1075 thru 1185 Horizontal

TAG: 2130-CV-002
MOUNTING POSITIONS: The backstop rotational axis must be horizontal within 5°. The
backstop and torque arm may be mounted at any desired angle, but the position must be
specified to permit furnishing of oil lines to suit the mounting.
90°
PURCHASER: The purchaser is responsible for assembling the backstop retaining collar (when MOUNT IN ANY POSITION

furnished), oil line, oil level sight gauge, air vent and for furnishing the oil and the torque arm
stirrup per the Falk service manual. A 3.2 micro meter (or finer) shaft finish is recommended. 180° 0°

AXIAL RETAINING COLLAR POSTITIONS (MOUNT ON EITHER SIDE)

D
270°
G F E

25 mm TO 3 8 mm CLEARANCE
P
os r s
da in a ishe ase re in

u u
na r yo ise
u

C
o v

B L
fur d, p gs. act

d
d a
sh ay r s are uire win nuf

t
f
int q dr a

n le
pr re e h m

lc
te ng ord s are thes wit T
d ch Rec nge ith ding PRIN

. itio
- . ce ch ce ce RD

te dd

J
file t on any rdan pro ECO

PURCHASER TO
. a w e

AIRMAX BREATHER FURNISH STOPS

a If o re R

ing ult
- c a D

TA
ac We TIFIE

ipp es
- ER

ing m
C

nd es

KEY W H
ex a

A
an Any

M
OIL LINE &
OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GAGE BORE

DRAIN
N
O

Dimensions — Millimeters ★
Max† Bore‡
Torque Over-
Backstop J TA Wt
Rating running A B C D E F◊ G K L M N O P
Size Min Max Max Max kg
(Nm) Speed
(rpm)
1075NRT 13 550 450 60 100 295 213 193 127  10 101 18 61 71 71 102 914 1062 200 403 70
1085NRT 21 680 350 80 130 358 213 193 165  10 132 18  92 66 76 127 1219 1400 200 625 122
1095NRT 37 940 300 95 150 391 269 249 183  10 150 20  81 89 91 152 1372 1567 260 653 177
1105NRT 60 975 180 125 200 490 269 249 234  10 216 25  69 81 104 203 1676 1923 250 645 281
1115NRT 101 625 150 155 225 546 295 269 267  13 235 32 76 89 117 254 1829 2103 280 696 395
1125NRT 142 275 135 180 240 622 310 284 308 § 13 279 32 80 91 127 305 1981 2294 295 752 513
1135NRT 203 250 125 215 270 686 356 330 345 13 267 32 66 109 140 305 2083 2426 325 828 662
1145NRT 287 260 115 240 300 787 356 330 379 13 305 32 41 107 142 381 2235 2629 345 937 853
1155NRT 337 395 100 280 350 889 363 338 442 13 337 38 49 104 152 457 2388 2832 351 1071 1211
1165NRT 468 830 85 320 405 945 422 396 503 13 394 51 65 122 160 508 2540 3012 409 1546 1415
1175NRT 703 245 80 375 465 1107 442 417 564 13 445 51 66 130 185 610 3048 3602 430 1297 2177
1185NRT 1 012 185 70 445 510 1270 457 432 632 13 509 51 62 102 257 691 3048 3683 445 1325 3005

 Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change without notice (one on each side), or one collar with a step in the shaft. Check usable shaft
unless certified. length if two (2) collars are used.
† Refer to the Factory for higher maximum overrunning speeds.  Size 1075 with bores over 90 mm, D = 165 mm.
‡ Backstops are provided with standard metric keys and keyways per ISO 773  Size 1085 with bores over 120 mm, D = 183 mm, G =20 mm.
and DIN 6885-1 Standard D10 clearance fit.  Size 1095 with bores over 135 mm, D= 234 mm, G=25 mm.
 Weight shown is for backstop with minimum bore and without oil.  Size 1105 with bores over 175 mm, D = 267 mm, G = 32 mm.
 Dimension P is minimum required shaft engagement. Dimension G is the  Size 1115 with bores over 200 mm D = 308 mm.
retaining collar thickness for one collar. Size 1075 bores over 90 mm, size 1085
bores over 121 mm, size 1095 over 140 mm, size 1105 bores over 180 mm, size § Size 1125 with bores over 230 mm, D = 345 mm.
1115 bores over 205 mm, and size 1125 bores over 230 mm require two collars ◊ Counterbore is for manufacturing.

Backstop Data
No. Bore Keyway Mtg. Pos. Over-Running Axial Retaining Collar
Size Key Size (W x H)
Req’d (mm) (mm) Degrees Rotation Required Not Req’d
1155 2 320.000 / 70 x 14.4 70 x 36 180° CW ONE PER
320.057 Js9 BACKSTOP

PRELIMINARY - CERTIFIED PRINT FOR:

TERRA NOVA TECHNOLOGIES
Purchaser ...................................................................... 17129-207
Purchaser Order No. ............................................................ 01-11-2018
Dated ..................................
For .................................................................................................................................. Fitted by Rexnord - Purchaser................................................
Remarks................................. J. SADOWSKI
Signed .......................................................................... 897316-15 & 25
M.O. Number ......................................................................

Rexnord Industries, LLC, Gear Group, P.O. Box 492, Zip 53201-0492 M565-110M
3001 W. Canal St., 53208-4200, Milwaukee, WI USA Telephone: 414-342-3131 April 2011
Fax: 414-937-4359 e-mail: info@rexnord.com web: www.rexnord.com Supersedes M565-110L
 Falk™ Axial Retention Collar • Backstops Horizontial Shaft
Type NRT • All Sizes (Page 1 of 1)

Material Specifications: AISI 1045 TABLE 1 — Bore Chamfer Dimensions

All Surface Finishes: 6,3 Microns
Bore Range M ± 0,3

TAG: 2130-CV-002 49mm – 75mm 2mm x 45°

76mm – 191mm 2mm x 45°
over 191mm 3mm x 45 °
os r s
da in a ishe ase re in

u u
yo ise
u

. itio for adv

fur d, p gs. act
sh ay r s are uire win nuf

t
int q dr a

n le
d
pr re e h m

lc
te ng ord s are thes wit T
d ch Rec nge ith ding PRIN

na
a

2 - HOLES EQUALLY SPACED 4 - HOLES EQUALLY SPACED

- A ile. nce y ch nceroce ORD

te dd

FOR C - DIA. TAP THRU FOR C - DIA. TAP THRU

f t o an rda p EC
. a w e

(4 - HOLES EQUALLY SPACED

a If o re R

ing ult
- c a D

FOR SIZES 1130 THRU 1175)

ac We TIFIE

ipp es
- ER

ing m
C

nd es

G
ex a

45º
B
an ny

75º

A - DIA. A - DIA.
D
F M - CHAMFER
SEE TABLE ABOVE

E - DIA. DRILL THRU E - DIA. DRILL THRU 1,5 BREAK

J - DIA. COUNTERBORE J - DIA. COUNTERBORE
H - DEEP H - DEEP
K - SIZE SOCKET K - SIZE SOCKET
HEAD CAPSCREW HEAD CAPSCREW

SIZES 1075 THRU 1175 SIZE 1185 ONLY ALL SIZES

TABLE 2 — Dimensions – Millimeters H

Backstop B C D G K
Size A ±0,8 UNC-2B Inches ±0,8 E F ±0,8 H J UNC Inches
1075 † 107 9 .375-16 127 ‡ .4375 18 11 16 .375-16 x .750
1085 † 145 9l .375-16 165 l .4375 18 l 11 16 .375-16 x .750
F = Nominal Shaft Dia.

1095 160 10 .375-16 183 .4375 20 11 16 .375-16 x .750

1105 † 206 13 n .500-13 n 234 n .5625 25 n 14 21 .500-13 x 1.250
+0,25 to 1,78l

1115 † 235 16 .625-11 267 t .6875 31 18 25 .625-11 x 1.500

1125 267 16 .625-11 308 .6875 31 17 25 .625-11 x 1.500
1135 305 16 .625-11 345 .8750 31 20 32 .750-10 x 1.250
1145 343 16 .625-11 379 .8750 31 21 32 .750-10 x 1.250
1155 387 19 .750-10 442 .8750 38 21 32 .750-10 x 2.000
1165 451 25 1.000-8 503 1.1250 51 27 41 1.000-8 x 2.500
1175 518 25 1.000-8 584 1.4375 51 34 51 1.250-7 x 2.500
1185 572 25 1.000-8 632 1.4375 51 34 51 1.250-7 x 2.500
H Unless otherwise noted, dimensions are held to a tolerance of ± 0,25. dimensions for Size 1105 and Size 1125 dimensions for Size 1115.
All dimensions are in millimeters unless otherwise shown. Dimensions are for When manufacturing axial retention collars use dimensions and tolerances
reference and are subject to change without notice unless certified. shown in table. Mounting holes “E” are not required
† Retaining collars fasten to the inner cam except for Size 1075 bores over 90mm, ‡ Size 1075 with bores over 89mm, D = 165mm.
Size 1085 bores over 121mm, Size 1105 bores over 178mm and Size 1115 l Size 1085 with bores over 121mm, B = 10mm, D = 183mm & G = 20mm.
bores over 203mm. These sizes require two collars (one on each side) or one n Size 1105 with bores over 178mm, B = 16mm, C = 0,625-11, D = 267mm &
collar with a step in the shaft. When purchasing Falk collars, use Size 1085 G = 31mm.
dimensions for Size 1075, Size 1095 dimensions for Size 1085, Size 1115 t Size 1115 with bores over 203mm, D=308mm..

PRELIMINARY – CERTIFIED PRINT FOR:

Purchaser . . . . . .TERRA
. . . . . . . .NOVA
. . . . . . .TECHNOLOGIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Order No . . . . . . .17129-207
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dated . .01-11-2018
............

For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No. Req’d. . .2. .(1

. . .PER
. . . . .BACKSTOP)
..

Date . . . 03-21-2018
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signed . . . . J.
. . .SADOWSKI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. O . . . 897316-15
. . . . . . . . . . . .&. .25
.......

Rexnord Industries, LLC, Geared Products, P.O. Box 492, Zip 53201-0492 M565-810F
3001 W. Canal St., Zip 53208-4200, Milwaukee, WI USA Telephone: 414-342-3131 December1996
Fax: 414-937-4359 email: info@rexnord.com web: www.rexnord.com Supersedes 565-810E
 Falk™ Type NRT Low Speed Backstop • Metric Dimensions
Sizes 1075 thru 1185 Horizontal

MOUNTING POSITIONS: The backstop rotational axis must be horizontal within 5°. The
backstop and torque arm may be mounted at any desired angle, but the position must be
specified to permit furnishing of oil lines to suit the mounting.
90°
PURCHASER: The purchaser is responsible for assembling the backstop retaining collar (when MOUNT IN ANY POSITION

furnished), oil line, oil level sight gauge, air vent and for furnishing the oil and the torque arm
stirrup per the Falk service manual. A 3.2 micro meter (or finer) shaft finish is recommended. 180° 0°

AXIAL RETAINING COLLAR POSTITIONS (MOUNT ON EITHER SIDE)

D
270°
G F E
os r s
da in a ishe ase re in

u u
na r yo ise
u

K
o v
fur d, p gs. act

25 mm TO 3 8 mm CLEARANCE
P
d a
sh ay r s are uire win nuf

C
f
int q dr a

B L
n le
pr re e h m

lc
te ng ord s are thes wit T
d ch Rec nge ith ding PRIN

. itio
- A ile. nce y ch nceroce ORD

te dd
f t o an rda p EC
. a w e
a If o re R

ing ult
- c a D

J
ac We TIFIE

ipp es

PURCHASER TO
AIRMAX BREATHER
- ER

BREATHER FURNISH STOPS

ing m
C

TA
nd es
ex a
an ny

KEY W H

A M
OIL LINE &
OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GAGE BORE

DRAIN
N
O

Dimensions — Millimeters ★
Max† Bore‡
Torque Over-
Backstop J TA Wt
Rating running A B C D E F◊ G K L M N O P
Size Min Max Max Max kg
(Nm) Speed
(rpm)
1075NRT 13 550 450 60 100 295 213 193 127  10 101 18 61 71 71 102 914 1062 200 403 70
1085NRT 21 680 350 80 130 358 213 193 165  10 132 18  92 66 76 127 1219 1400 200 625 122
1095NRT 37 940 300 95 150 391 269 249 183  10 150 20  81 89 91 152 1372 1567 260 653 177
1105NRT 60 975 180 125 200 490 269 249 234  10 216 25  69 81 104 203 1676 1923 250 645 281
1115NRT 101 625 150 155 225 546 295 269 267  13 235 32 76 89 117 254 1829 2103 280 696 395
1125NRT 142 275 135 180 240 622 310 284 308 § 13 279 32 80 91 127 305 1981 2294 295 752 513
1135NRT 203 250 125 215 270 686 356 330 345 13 267 32 66 109 140 305 2083 2426 325 828 662
1145NRT 287 260 115 240 300 787 356 330 379 13 305 32 41 107 142 381 2235 2629 345 937 853
1155NRT 337 395 100 280 350 889 363 338 442 13 337 38 49 104 152 457 2388 2832 351 1071 1211
1165NRT 468 830 85 320 405 945 422 396 503 13 394 51 65 122 160 508 2540 3012 409 1546 1415
1175NRT 703 245 80 375 465 1107 442 417 564 13 445 51 66 130 185 610 3048 3602 430 1297 2177
1185NRT 1 012 185 70 445 510 1270 457 432 632 13 509 51 62 102 257 691 3048 3683 445 1325 3005

 Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change without notice (one on each side), or one collar with a step in the shaft. Check usable shaft
unless certified. length if two (2) collars are used.
† Refer to the Factory for higher maximum overrunning speeds.  Size 1075 with bores over 90 mm, D = 165 mm.
‡ Backstops are provided with standard metric keys and keyways per ISO 773  Size 1085 with bores over 120 mm, D = 183 mm, G =20 mm.
and DIN 6885-1 Standard D10 clearance fit.  Size 1095 with bores over 135 mm, D= 234 mm, G=25 mm.
 Weight shown is for backstop with minimum bore and without oil.  Size 1105 with bores over 175 mm, D = 267 mm, G = 32 mm.
 Dimension P is minimum required shaft engagement. Dimension G is the  Size 1115 with bores over 200 mm D = 308 mm.
retaining collar thickness for one collar. Size 1075 bores over 90 mm, size 1085
bores over 121 mm, size 1095 over 140 mm, size 1105 bores over 180 mm, size § Size 1125 with bores over 230 mm, D = 345 mm.
1115 bores over 205 mm, and size 1125 bores over 230 mm require two collars ◊ Counterbore is for manufacturing.

Backstop Data
No. Bore Keyway Mtg. Pos. Over-Running Axial Retaining Collar
Size Key Size (W x H)
Req’d (mm) (mm) Degrees Rotation Required Not Req’d
1125NRT ONE 240 (H7) 56 x 12.4 56 x 32 180 CW TWO

PRELIMINARY - CERTIFIED PRINT FOR:

TERRA NOVA TECHNOLOGIES
Purchaser ...................................................................... 17129-208
Purchaser Order No. ............................................................ 01/11/2018
Dated ..................................
SACRIFICIAL CONVEYOR
For .................................................................................................................................. Fitted by Rexnord - Purchaser................................................
R. BAKER 04/02/2018
Remarks................................. Signed .......................................................................... 944661-10
M.O. Number ......................................................................

Rexnord Industries, LLC, Gear Group, P.O. Box 492, Zip 53201-0492 M565-110M
3001 W. Canal St., 53208-4200, Milwaukee, WI USA Telephone: 414-342-3131 April 2011
Fax: 414-937-4359 e-mail: info@rexnord.com web: www.rexnord.com Supersedes M565-110L
 Falk™ Axial Retention Collar • Backstops Horizontial Shaft
Type NRT • All Sizes (Page 1 of 1)

Material Specifications: AISI 1045 TABLE 1 — Bore Chamfer Dimensions

All Surface Finishes: 6,3 Microns
Bore Range M ± 0,3
49mm – 75mm 2mm x 45°
76mm – 191mm 2mm x 45°
over 191mm 3mm x 45 °

2 - HOLES EQUALLY SPACED 4 - HOLES EQUALLY SPACED

FOR C - DIA. TAP THRU FOR C - DIA. TAP THRU
(4 - HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
FOR SIZES 1130 THRU 1175)

G
45º
B

os r s
da in a ishe ase re in

u u
yo ise
u
75º

. itio for adv

fur d, p gs. act
sh ay r s are uire win nuf

t
int q dr a

n le
d
pr re e h m

lc
te ng ord s are thes wit T
d ch Rec nge ith ding PRIN
A - DIA.

na
A - DIA.

a
- A ile. nce y ch nceroce ORD
D

te dd
f t o an rda p EC
. a w e
F M - CHAMFER

e R

ing ult
SEE TABLE ABOVE

- If cco e ar IED

ipp es
a W TIF
- ER

ing m
C

nd es
ex a
a
an ny

E - DIA. DRILL THRU E - DIA. DRILL THRU 1,5 BREAK

J - DIA. COUNTERBORE J - DIA. COUNTERBORE
H - DEEP H - DEEP
K - SIZE SOCKET K - SIZE SOCKET
HEAD CAPSCREW HEAD CAPSCREW

SIZES 1075 THRU 1175 SIZE 1185 ONLY ALL SIZES

TABLE 2 — Dimensions – Millimeters H

Backstop B C D G K
Size A ±0,8 UNC-2B Inches ±0,8 E F ±0,8 H J UNC Inches
1075 † 107 9 .375-16 127 ‡ .4375 18 11 16 .375-16 x .750
1085 † 145 9l .375-16 165 l .4375 18 l 11 16 .375-16 x .750
F = Nominal Shaft Dia.

1095 160 10 .375-16 183 .4375 20 11 16 .375-16 x .750

1105 † 206 13 n .500-13 n 234 n .5625 25 n 14 21 .500-13 x 1.250
+0,25 to 1,78l

1115 † 235 16 .625-11 267 t .6875 31 18 25 .625-11 x 1.500

1125 267 16 .625-11 308 .6875 31 17 25 .625-11 x 1.500
1135 305 16 .625-11 345 .8750 31 20 32 .750-10 x 1.250
1145 343 16 .625-11 379 .8750 31 21 32 .750-10 x 1.250
1155 387 19 .750-10 442 .8750 38 21 32 .750-10 x 2.000
1165 451 25 1.000-8 503 1.1250 51 27 41 1.000-8 x 2.500
1175 518 25 1.000-8 584 1.4375 51 34 51 1.250-7 x 2.500
1185 572 25 1.000-8 632 1.4375 51 34 51 1.250-7 x 2.500
H Unless otherwise noted, dimensions are held to a tolerance of ± 0,25. dimensions for Size 1105 and Size 1125 dimensions for Size 1115.
All dimensions are in millimeters unless otherwise shown. Dimensions are for When manufacturing axial retention collars use dimensions and tolerances
reference and are subject to change without notice unless certified. shown in table. Mounting holes “E” are not required
† Retaining collars fasten to the inner cam except for Size 1075 bores over 90mm, ‡ Size 1075 with bores over 89mm, D = 165mm.
Size 1085 bores over 121mm, Size 1105 bores over 178mm and Size 1115 l Size 1085 with bores over 121mm, B = 10mm, D = 183mm & G = 20mm.
bores over 203mm. These sizes require two collars (one on each side) or one n Size 1105 with bores over 178mm, B = 16mm, C = 0,625-11, D = 267mm &
collar with a step in the shaft. When purchasing Falk collars, use Size 1085 G = 31mm.
dimensions for Size 1075, Size 1095 dimensions for Size 1085, Size 1115 t Size 1115 with bores over 203mm, D=308mm..

PRELIMINARY – CERTIFIED PRINT FOR:

Purchaser . . . TERRA
. . . . . . . .NOVA
. . . . . .TECHNOLOGIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dated . 01/11/2018
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Order No . . . . . . .17129-208 .............

For . . . . . . .SACRIFICIAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . .CONVEYOR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No. Req’d. . . . TWO
...........

Date . . . . . . . . 04/02/2018
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signed . . . . . . . R.
. . .BAKER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. O . . . . . . 944661-10
..................

Rexnord Industries, LLC, Geared Products, P.O. Box 492, Zip 53201-0492 M565-810F
3001 W. Canal St., Zip 53208-4200, Milwaukee, WI USA Telephone: 414-342-3131 December1996
Fax: 414-937-4359 email: info@rexnord.com web: www.rexnord.com Supersedes 565-810E
 Falk® Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E (Page 1 of 12)
How to Use this Manual
The following instructions and recommendations apply to
all standard Falk™ Type NRT backstops.
Their performance and life depend largely upon how they
are installed and serviced. Drawings are representative of
this series of backstops and may not agree in exact detail
with all backstop sizes.
When requesting information, specify the M.O. number,
backstop size, model number, maximum running rpm,
torque rating, torque arm angle degrees, and date
stamped on the backstop nameplate.
This manual provides detailed instructions on installation,
maintenance, and parts identification. Use the following
Table of Contents to locate required information.
Table of Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Codes & General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Application Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Dismantling, Repair & Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . 11
Stored or Inactive Backstops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Part Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS
MANUAL FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE AND
TROUBLE FREE SERVICE.
Introduction
IMPORTANT: Mount the backstop ONLY at the torque
arm angle degrees (±5°), stated on the nameplate and as
described in Figure 4, page 5. Lubrication lines and oil level
will be incorrect for other angles; refer revised specifications
to the Factory.
WARRANTY — Rexnord Industries, LLC (the “Company”)
warrants that NRT backstops (I) conform to Company’s
published specifications, and (II) are free from defects of
material for three years from the date of shipment.
Company does not warrant any non-Company branded
products or components (manufacturer’s warranty applies)
or any defects in, damage to, or failure of products caused
by: (I) dynamic vibrations imposed by the drive system in
which such products are installed unless the nature of such
vibrations has been defined and accepted in writing by
Company as a condition of operation; (II) failure to provide
suitable installation environment; (III) use for purposes other
than those for which designed, or other abuse or misuse; (IV)
unauthorized attachments, modifications or disassembly, or
(V) mishandling during shipping.
Safety Codes & General Precautions
WARNING: Consult applicable local and national safety
codes for proper guarding of rotating members. Lock out
Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-111
Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
power source and remove all external loads from drive
before servicing drive or accessories.
DISMANTLING, REPAIR, & PARTS REPLACEMENT — See
page 11. The backstop and normal associated equipment
(shaft, pulleys, etc.), involve moving parts, therefore consult
local, state, OSHA, and ANSI safety codes for proper
guarding of revolving parts and possible pinch points.
(A pinch point occurs at the contact point between the
backstop torque arm and end covers, and between the
torque arm and stirrup. See Figs. 2, 3, and 5).
Carefully read and follow all supplementary instructions
and tags attached to the backstop and then file for future
reference.
Operate the backstop within the torque rating, overrunning
speed, temperature range, and torque arm angle listed
on the nameplate. Follow lubrication instructions in this
manual.
When removing backstop from shaft, do not apply heat to
the backstop. Apply axial force to the hub of the backstop
only.
Damage may occur to the backstop if it remains under full
load for extended periods of time. Remove the load before
shutting down the equipment.
If the shaft was accidentally rotated in the wrong
direction of rotation at start-up, the backstop may have
been damaged. Return the backstop to the Factory for
inspection.
Application Requirements
BACKSTOP APPLICATION — The Falk NRT backstop
is designed to prevent reverse rotation in applications
such as inclined conveyors, bucket elevators, fans,
rotary pumps, and kilns. If local safety codes permit, the
backstop may be used as a backup for a brake on these
applications, but NOT in people conveying systems such
as elevators, manlifts, ski tows or ski lifts. Also, DO NOT
use the backstop as a substitute for a brake.
OPERATING TEMPERATURES — Enclosure of the
backstop may cause overheating. Provide adequate
ventilation. Backstop operating temperatures, at maximum
overrunning speed, may reach 200°F (93°C). Determine
the effect of this temperature on the driven equipment and
provide cooling if necessary.
If a backstop operates in the sun at ambient temperatures
over 100°F (38°C), then special measures should be taken to
protect the backstop from solar energy. This protection can
consist of a canopy over the backstop or reflective paint on
the backstop. If neither is possible, a cooling device such as
a fan may be required to prevent the sump temperature from
exceeding the allowable maximum of 200°F (93°C).
INDEXING — Falk NRT backstops can be used for
indexing service. Refer application data to the Factory
for selection. Indexing is defined as continuous cyclic or
periodic application of the backstop as encountered in
the conversion of reciprocating or oscillating motion into
intermittent linear motion.
JOGGING — Defined as start/stop movement with jerking
or jolting motion is permissible. NOTE: There must be
at least one complete overrunning revolution between
backstop operations or it is considered an indexing
application.
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 2 of 12) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E

EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES — The purchaser is
responsible for taking adequate precautions to prevent
spark generation in explosive atmospheres. Consideration
should be given to spark generation that may occur when
the torque arm strikes the stirrup.
CHEMICAL ATMOSPHERES — The backstop may be
damaged if exposed to certain types of chemicals or
vapors; for example, potash dust, chlorine gas, carbon
tetrachloride, etc. These materials may cause deterioration
of the seals or aluminum roller cage rings.
AXIAL RETAINING COLLARS — Axial retention of the
backstop is required to prevent the backstop from moving
on the shaft (either off the shaft or toward the headshaft
bearing), causing increased loads on the backstop
bearings. Rexnord offers axial retaining collars as an
optional extra charge accessory for all applications. The
collars are manufactured to fit the backstop and the shaft
and can be mounted on either side of the backstop. This
allows the retaining collars to be mounted on the shaft
inside of the backstop if the application requirements so
dictate. If two collars were furnished with the backstop,
mount one collar on each side of the backstop (so
backstop is sandwiched between the collars).
LUBRICATION LINES, SIGHT GAUGE & BREATHER — Do
not assemble to backstop until backstop is mounted on the
shaft.
General Instructions
BACKSTOP–SHAFT FITS — The shaft must have a 125
micro-inch (or finer) finish and clearance fits specified in
Table 2 (page 6).
KEYS & KEYWAYS — Keys to be used with Falk NRT
backstops are furnished by the Factory. They are either cold
drawn 1045 steel or heat-treated alloy steel (310-350 HB).
DO NOT USE SLED RUNNER TYPE KEYWAY. IT MAY
INDUCE UNDUE FORCES ON BACKSTOP.
TORQUE ARM STOPS (OR STIRRUP) — The torque arm
stops must be designed to resist the force developed by
the actual torque applied to the backstop. The minimum
recommended distance to the torque arm stop is
0.9 x Length (N) as illustrated in Figure 2, page 5, and
Table 3, page 6. Use torque arm stops capable of
withstanding the loads tabulated in Table 3, page 6.
Where shorter than recommended torque arms are
required, the stirrup should be designed to withstand the
increased reaction forces of the shorter torque arm.
Actual Retention Force = Actual Peak Backstopping Torque
Actual Application Dimension N
The torque arm must be free to move within the stirrup.
Provide clearance on three sides per Figure 3, page 5. DO
NOT restrict torque arm movement by welding or securing
the torque arm to any supporting structure.
Locate the torque arm support surface parallel (±1/2°) to the torque
arm surface.
Prevent accumulation of any foreign material or ice around
torque arm and torque arm stirrup which could restrict free
movement of the torque arm.
LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS — See Figure 5, page 5. Cotter
pins must be locked to prevent axial movement of torque
arm pin. Sling torque arm as shown. Use clamps or similar
device to prevent sling from slipping.

Figure 1

BACKSTOP MOUNTING POSITIONS — The backstop

rotational axis must be horizontal (±5°) for all applications.
The NRT backstop is capable of being mounted at any
desired angle, per Figures 2 and 4, page 5; however,
a horizontal mounting at 0° or 180° is preferred. The
mounting angle must be specified at the time of purchase.
This enables Rexnord to custom fit the lubrication lines
and establish and mark the proper static oil level for the
specified mounting angle. The lubrication lines, sight
gauge and breather are removed for shipping purposes.
Furnished lubrication lines and oil level will be incorrect
for mounting angles deviated from the mounting angle
stamped on the nameplate (±5°) — refer revised
specifications to the Factory.

568-111 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

October 2014 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
NEW www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E (Page 3 of 12)

TABLE 1 — Shaft and Keyway Dimensions – Inch

Nominal Shaft Shaft Keyway Backstop Keyway Key
Size Diameter Key Length Minimum Key Key
Width Depth Width Depth Width x Height
(Over-Thru) Furnished Engagement Material†
2.3125 - 2.7500 .625 .313 .625 .313 .625 x .625 7.25 6.50 2
2.7500 - 3.2500 .750 .375 .750 .375 .750 x .750 7.00 6.00 1
1075NRT 3.2500 - 3.5625 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 5.50 4.50 1
3.5625 - 3.7500 .875 .313 .875 .323 .875 x .625 7.25 5.50 1
3.7500 - 3.9375 1.000 .500 1.000 .250 1.000 x .750 7.00 6.50 1
2.9375 .750 .375 .750 .375 .750 x .750 7.50 7.00 2
2.9375 - 3.2500 .750 .375 .750 .375 .750 x .750 7.50 7.00 2
1085NRT 3.2500 - 3.7500 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 6.00 4.50 2
3.7500 - 4.5000 1.000 .500 1.000 .500 1.000 x 1.000 7.00 5.50 1
4.5000 - 4.7500 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.00 4.00 1
4.7500 - 5.1875 1.250 .625 1.250 .250 1.250 x .8750 7.00 7.00 1
3.4375 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 9.50 9.00 2
3.4375 - 3.7500 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 9.50 9.00 2
1095NRT 3.7500 - 4.5000 1.000 .500 1.000 .500 1.000 x 1.000 9.00 8.50 1
4.5000 - 5.0000 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.00 6.00 1
5.0000 - 5.5000 1.250 .625 1.250 .500 1.250 x 1.125 7.00 6.50 1
4.9375 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.50 7.00 2
1105NRT 4.9375 - 5.5000 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.50 7.00 2
5.5000 - 6.5000 1.500 .750 1.500 .750 1.500 x .1.500 8.00 6.50 1
6.5000 - 7.4375 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 9.00 5.50 1
5.9375 1.500 .750 1.500 .750 1.500 x 1.500 8.75 8.00 2
5.9375 - 6.5000 1.500 .750 1.500 .750 1.500 x 1.500 8.75 8.00 2
1115NRT 6.500 - 7.5000 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 9.00 8.50 1
7.500 - 8.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 9.00 8.00 1
8.000 - 8.4375 2.000 .750 2.000 .500 2.000 x 1.250 10.50 10.50 1
7.2500 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 11.00 10.50 1
1125NRT 7.250 - 7.5000 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 11.00 10.50 1
7.500 - 9.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 11.00 10.50 1
8.5000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 11.00 10.00 2
1135NRT 8.500 - 9.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 11.00 10.00 2
9.000 -10.5000 2.500 .875 2.500 .875 2.500 x 1.750 12.00 11.00 1
9.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 13.00 12.50 2
1145NRT 9.0000 -11.0000 2.500 .875 2.500 .875 2.500 x 1.750 12.00 11.50 2
11.0000 -12.0000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 13.00 11.00 1
10.5000 2.500 1.250 2.500 1.250 2.500 x 2.500 12.00 11.00 2
1155NRT 10.500 -11.0000 2.500 1.250 2.500 1.250 2.500 x 2.500 12.00 11.00 2
11.000 -13.0000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 13.00 12.50 2
13.000 -13.2500 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 12.00 9.00 2
12.5000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 15.50 12.00 2
1165NRT 12.500 -13.0000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 15.50 12.00 2
13.000 -15.0000 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 12.00 12.00 2
15.000 -15.5000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 13.00 9.00 2
13.5000 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 16.00 15.50 2
1175NRT 13.500 -15.0000 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 16.00 15.50 2
15.000 -17.5000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 13.00 12.50 2
15.5000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 17.00 16.50 2
1185NRT 15.500 -18.0000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 17.00 16.50 2
18.000 -20.0000 5.000 1.750 5.000 1.750 5.000 x 3.500 14.00 13.50 2
++ Keys are furnished by Rexnord to suit shaft and backstop keyways. Keys are either cold drawn 1045 material or heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB).
†† #1 Keys are cold-drawn 1045 steel.
#2 Keys are heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB).

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-111

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 4 of 12) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E

TABLE 1A — Shaft and Keyway Dimensions – Metric (Millimeters)

Nominal Shaft Shaft Keyway Backstop Keyway KeyH
Size Diameter Key Length Minimum Key Key
Width Depth Width Depth Width x Height
(Over-Thru) Furnished Engagement Material✝
58 - 65 18.0 7.0 18.0 4.4 18 x 11 210 210 2
65 - 75 20.0 7.5 20.0 4.9 20 x 12 200 185 2
1075NRT 75 - 85 22.0 9.0 22.0 5.4 22 x 14 180 160 2
85 - 95 25.0 9.0 25.0 5.4 25 x 14 150 140 2
95 - 100 28.0 10.0 28.0 4.9 28 x 14.5 180 140 2
75 - 85 22.0 9.0 22.0 5.4 22 x 14 210 210 2
1085NRT 85 - 95 25.0 9.0 25.0 5.4 25 x 14 210 210 2
95 - 110 28.0 10.0 28.0 6.4 28 x 16 180 170 2
110 - 130 32.0 11.0 32.0 7.4 32 x 18 150 120 2
95 - 110 28.0 10.0 28.0 6.4 28 x 16 265 265 2
1095NRT 110 - 130 32.0 11.0 32.0 7.4 32 x 18 230 225 2
130 - 150 36.0 12.0 36.0 7.4 36 x 19 180 160 2
120 - 130 32.0 11.0 32.0 7.4 32 x 18 265 265 2
1105NRT 130 - 150 36.0 12.0 36.0 8.4 36 x 20 265 265 2
150 - 170 40.0 13.0 40.0 9.4 40 x 22 220 210 2
170 - 200 45.0 15.0 45.0 10.4 45 x 25 170 165 2
150 - 170 40.0 13.0 40.0 9.4 40 x 22 290 290 2
1115NRT 170 - 200 45.0 15.0 45.0 10.4 45 x 25 290 280 2
200 - 225 50.0 17.0 50.0 11.4 50 x 28 220 220 2
180 - 200 45.0 15.0 45.0 10.4 45 x 25 305 305 2
1125NRT 200 - 230 50.0 17.0 50.0 11.4 50 x 28 305 305 2
230 - 240 56.0 20.0 56.0 12.4 56 x 32 280 250 2
210 - 230 50.0 17.0 50.0 11.4 50 x 28 350 350 2
1135NRT 230 - 260 56.0 20.0 56.0 12.4 56 x 32 350 350 2
260 - 280 63.0 20.0 63.0 12.4 63 x 32 330 315 2
260 56.0 20.0 56.0 12.4 56 x 32 350 350 2
1145NRT 260 - 290 63.0 20.0 63.0 12.4 63 x 32 350 350 2
290 - 300 70.0 22.0 70.0 14.4 70 x 36 350 340 2

1155NRT 290 - 330 70.0 22.0 70.0 14.4 70 x 36 360 360 2

330 - 350 80.0 25.0 80.0 15.4 80 x 40 360 330 2
320 - 330 70.0 22.0 70.0 14.4 70 x 36 415 395 2
1165NRT 330 - 380 80.0 25.0 80.0 15.4 80 x 40 415 395 2
380 - 405 90.0 28.0 90.0 17.4 90 x 45 380 365 2
1175NRT 380 - 440 90.0 28.0 90.0 17.4 90 x 45 430 415 2
440 - 465 100.0 31.0 100.0 19.5 100 x 50 430 415 2
1185NRT 440 - 500 100.0 31.0 100.0 19.5 100 x 50 450 430 2
++ Keys are furnished by Rexnord to suit shaft and backstop keyways. Keys are either cold drawn 1045 material or heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB)
†† #1 Keys are cold-drawn 1045 steel.
#2 Keys are heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB).

568-111 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

October 2014 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
NEW www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E (Page 5 of 12)

THE BACKSTOP ROTATIONAL AXIS (ie.-Bore Axis) MUST BE HORIZONTAL (±5°)

N
90°
SEE END
VIEW
HORIZONTAL BELOW
0°
PREFERRED POSITION

STIRRUP
180° 0°
HORIZONTAL
0.9N
VERTICAL

BACKSTOP TORQUE
ARM CAN BE
MOUNTED AT
ANY ANGLE
270°
315° Figure 4
A BOOT OR HOOD IS RECOMMENDED
FOR ALL MOUNTING POSITIONS TO
PREVENT ACCUMULATION OF MATERIAL Use the above diagram to interpret the mounting angle
AROUND STIRRUP & MAINTAIN CLEARANCE specified on the backstop nameplate. View the backstop
FOR FREE MOVEMENT
270° assembly from the shaft extension end as shown above.
FLOOR SLOT
Figure 2 DO NOT exceed the mounting angle position of the
backstop to the angle specified on the backstop
nameplate (±5°).

1” to 1 ½ ”
(25.4 mm to 38.1 mm)
CLEARANCE
1” to 1 ½”
COTTER PIN
(25.4 mm to 38.1 mm)
CLEARANCE TORQUE ARM PIN
NYLON SLING
END COVER

INNER CAM HUB FACE-

PUSH ON THIS FACE
WHEN INSTALLING
BACKSTOP ON SHAFT
(25.4 mm to 38.1 mm)
CLEARANCE

NYLON
1” to 1 ½”

SLING

Figure 3
END VIEW
CLAMPS TO PREVENT
SLING FROM SLIPPING
OFF "I" BEAM

TORQUE ARM

BALANCE
POINT

Figure 5

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-111

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 6 of 12) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E

TABLE 2 — Backstop – Shaft Fits (InchH)

Nominal Diameter Nominal Shaft Nominal Bore Bore–Shaft† PUSH ON INNER CAM FACE ONLY
(From-Includes) Tolerance Diameter Tolerance Min–Max Clearance
OUTER GREASE FITTING
1.9375 – 2.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0005, + .0015 .0005 – .0025
3.0000 – 7.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0010, + .0025 .0010 – .0035
8.0000 – 11.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0015, + .0035 .0015 – .0045
12.0000 – 14.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0020, + .0045 .0020 – .0055
15.0000 – 20.0000 +.0000, – .0020 +.0020, + .0045 .0020 – .0065
++ Backstops for metric shafts are supplied with E7 bore and D10 keyway tolerance assuming
m6 shaft diameter and h9 keyway tolerance.
†† A 125 micro-inch (or finer) shaft finish and clearance fit specified above are recommended.
MINIMUM SHAFT
ENGAGEMENT

Figure 6

TABLE 3 — Backstop Reaction Force at Torque Arm Stirrup (Inch & Metric)
N Torque Arm Length
Backstop Catalog Torque Rating 0.9 X N (rounded) Torque Arm Reaction Force‡
(See Figure 2)
Size
lb-ft Nm Inch mm Inch mm lb N
1075NRT 10,000 13,600 36.00 914 32.50 822 5,550 24,700
1085NRT 16,000 21,700 48.00 1219 43.00 1097 6,700 29,800
1095NRT 28,000 38,000 54.00 1372 48.50 1235 10,500 46,700
1105NRT 45,000 61,000 66.00 1676 59.50 1508 13,600 60,500
1115NRT 75,000 102,000 72.00 1829 65.00 1646 20,800 92,550
1125NRT 105,000 142,000 78.00 1981 70.00 1788 27,000 120,100
1135NRT 150,000 203,000 82.00 2083 74.00 1875 36,500 162,400
1145NRT 212,000 287,000 88.00 2235 79.00 2011 48,300 214,850
1155NRT 249,000 338,000 94.00 2386 84.50 2146 53,300 237,100
1165NRT 346,000 469,000 100.00 2540 90.00 2286 69,200 307,850
1175NRT 519,000 704,000 120.00 3048 108.00 2743 86,500 384,850
1185NRT 747,000 1,013,000 120.00 3048 108.00 2748 124,500 553,800
‡‡ Reaction force is based on 0.9 X N torque arm length and 1.5 catalog rating:

Force (lb)= 1.50 x Catalog Torque Rating (lb-ft) x 12 (inch per foot)
0 .9 X Length (N) (in)

Force (N) = 1.50 x Catalog Torque Rating (Nm) x 1000 (mm per m)
0 .9 X Length (N) (mm)

For special length torque arms, substitute actual N dimension in

above formula.

568-111 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

October 2014 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
NEW www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E (Page 7 of 12)

Installation TABLE 5 — Axial Retaining Collar Fastener

MOUNT BACKSTOP — CAUTION: Before installing Tightening TorqueH — lb-in/Nm
backstop, check direction of shaft-free rotation and (All Fasteners are UNC)
required rotation of motor. The backstop overrunning (or
Fastener Size Tightening Torque (lb-in) Tightening Torque (Nm)
free rotation) direction is indicated by a rotation arrow on
each side of the backstop. .375"-16 440 50
.500"-13 1,025 116
1. Clean the shaft and remove burrs. .625"-11 2,050 232
2. Slide the axial retaining collar onto the shaft ONLY if .750"-10 3,475 393
the bore size or application requires a collar to be on 1.000"- 8 7,875 890
the shaft inside of (or ahead of) the backstop. 1.250"- 7 13,750 1 550
++ Do not oil fasteners.
3. Coat shaft and key with oil or anti-seize compound to
ease installation of key, as well as backstop. Mount the
heat-treated key furnished with the backstop. MOUNT TORQUE ARM
4. Refer to Figure 5, page 5. Lift backstop and slide it 1. Lift torque arm as shown in Figure 5, page 5, and
onto shaft. Apply axial force only to the inner cam face attach it to the backstop with torque arm pins and
of the backstop. The backstop must be positioned cotter pins supplied with backstop. Lock cotter pins.
to meet certain minimum engagement requirements
which vary with backstop and bore size. Minimum 2. Place torque arm in torque arm support and then
required engagement is determined by the GREATER complete construction of the torque arm support as
distance of: previously described under TORQUE ARM STOPS (OR
STIRRUP) on page 2.
A. Minimum required backstop key engagement as
shown in Tables 1 and 1A, pages 3 and 4, or CAUTION: Check to see that backstop is not axially
B. Minimum shaft/inner cam engagement as shown in restrained through the torque arm and that accumulation
Figure 6 and Table 4. If two axial retention collars of foreign material or ice cannot restrict movement of the
are required, provide adequate shaft length to torque arm.
permit mounting the collars.

TABLE 4 — Minimum Shaft Engagement

Unit
Size 1075 1085 1095 1105 1115 1125 1135 1145 1155 1165 1175 1185
Inches 6.2 6.2 8.1 8.1 9.0 9.6 11.4 11.4 11.5 13.8 14.3 14.7
mm 158 158 206 206 229 244 290 290 292 351 363 373

5. In all cases where a Rexnord axial retaining collar is

used (other than the applications referred to in Step 2
above), mount the collar to the backstop. First tighten
the fasteners to the backstop and then the fasteners to
the shaft. Torque to the value given in Table 5. For bore
sizes requiring the use of two axial retention collars,
mount collars (one on each side) on the shaft and
tighten fasteners to the shaft.

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-111

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 8 of 12) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E

INSTALL LUBRICATION LINES, SIGHT GAUGE, &

BREATHER
1. As previously stated, Rexnord custom fits the
lubrication lines and marks the static oil level to suit
the torque arm mounting angle specified at the time
of purchase. The lubrication lines, sight gauge,
and breather are removed for shipping purposes.
The torque arm mounting angle is stamped on the
backstop nameplate, and the backstop must be
mounted at this angle, (±5°). See Figure 4, page 5, for
interpretation of mounting angle. Lubrication lines and
oil level will be incorrect for other angles.

BREATHER GREASE FITTINGS

GREASE FITTINGS (2 OR 4)
(2 OR 4) 90° ANGLES INCREASE C.C.W. ROTATION ROTATION TEE
BREATHER BREATHER
ARROW ARROW
ELBOW
ROTATION ELBOW ELBOW
1 PURGE
ARROW 4 PLUGS
1 4
(1 OR 2) GREASE FITTINGS
(2 OR 4)
4
HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL
180° 0°
3 1
2
OIL 3
2
LEVEL
OIL 3 2
LEVEL OIL
TEE LEVEL
TEE PURGE PLUGS
(1 OR 2) DRAIN
DRAIN
270° PURGE PLUGS
(1 OR 2) DRAIN
LEFT RIGHT TEE

Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9

2. The lubrication lines, sight gauge and breather are
removed for shipping. The pipe tees and elbows (see
Figures 7, 8, and 9) are left in the end cover at the
proper angles for simple reassembly. The tees and
elbows are plugged for shipment.
3. The sight gauge/piping subassembly must be mounted
in a position that allows direct viewing of oil level
markings. Figures 7, 8, and 9 are examples of left-
hand assembly configurations. Similar right-hand
configurations are possible.
4. Coat all pipe threads with Permatex #3 sealant liquid
or equivalent.
5. Position backstop and torque arm at angle specified
on nameplate (±5°). Remove plug from the lowest pipe
tee and attach sight gauge/piping subassembly. DO
NOT tighten fittings.
6. With the sight gauge in the proper vertical position,
locate and remove the plug nearest the unattached
upper end of the sight gauge/piping subassembly.
This plug may be in the backstop end cover (Figures 7,
8, and 9) or it may be in the upper pipe tee (Figure 9).
Install fitting but DO NOT tighten.
7. Position sight gauge oil level groove to the appropriate
dimension shown in Figure 10 and Table 6, page 9,
and tighten all fittings.
8. Refer to the following page for recommended lubricant.
Drain and flush residual shipping oil with specified
lubricant. Fill with lubricant by removing the pipe plug
in the elbow installed at the Factory in the uppermost
hole. Also remove the uppermost pipe plug in the
opposite end cover to act as a vent. Fill to marks on oil
sight glass. Replace plugs after filling.
9. Install breather and associated piping parts in the
same elbow referred to in Step 8 above.
10. Backstops ordered as spares must be referenced to
the original Falk M.O. number from the nameplate.
Confirm power, speed, rotation, and torque arm angle.

568-111 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

October 2014 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
NEW www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E (Page 9 of 12)

OIL LEVEL — Fill the backstop with specified lubricant to

LEVEL the static level indicated by the scribed line on the vertical
SQUARE sight gauge. Check oil level in sight glass only when the
unit is not operating. During operation the oil level in the
sight glass will drop due to distribution of oil around the
periphery of the housing. Approximate oil capacities are
A
given in Table 7.
HORIZONTAL

OIL
LEVEL B
TABLE 6A — Lubricants and Viscosity
Grade Recommendations
Extreme High
Cold Normal
OIL LEVEL Cold Temperature
Ambient Ambient
GROOVE Ambient Ambient
-40°F to -15°F -15°F to +40°F +32°F to 125°F Greater than
HUB OR Temperature 125°F
INNER CAM Range Greater than
-40°C to -26°C -26°C to +4°C 0°C to 52°C
52°C
Figure 10 — METHODS OF MEASURING LOCATION OF OIL
Unit Sizes Mobil Aero Consult
1075 NRT HFA or Dexron ATF Dexron ATF or
1095NRT Dexron ATF ISO VG 68 Factory
TABLE 6 — Oil Level DimensionsH – Inch (mm) Unit Sizes Mobil Aero SAE 10W40
1105NRT HFA or with pour point ISO VG 150 Consult
Unit Size Dimension “A” Dimension “B” of at least
1145NRT Dexron ATF Factory
1075 4.0 (102) 0.8 (20) -20°F (-29°C)
1085 5.3 (135) 1.2 (30) SAE 10W40
1095 5.8 (147) 1.2 (30) Unit Sizes Mobil Aero
1155NRT- HFA or with pour point ISO VG 220 Consult
1105 7.6 (193) 1.7 (43) of at least
1185NRT Dexron ATF Factory
1115 8.6 (218) 2.2 (56) -20°F (-29°C)
1125 9.7 (246) 2.3 (58)
1135 10.8 (274) 3.0 (76)
1145 12.1 (307) 2.9 (74)
1155 14.1 (358) 3.5 (89) TABLE 7 — Approximate Oil Capacities†
1165 15.1 (384) 4.4 (112) Oil Capacity Grease Purge
1175 18.6 (472) 5.4 (137) Backstop Size
Aprox. Pints (Liters) Qty-Oz (grams)‡
1185 20.0 (508) 5.0 (127)
++ Adjust piping so that the oil level indicator on sight gauge is within ±1/4” 1075 .50 (0.24) 2.25 (64)
(±6 mm) of Dimension “A” or “B.” 1085 .75 (0.35) 3.00 (85)
1095 1.50 (0.71) 7.00 (198)
1105 2.00 (0.95) 9.00 (255)
1115 4.00 (1.89) 7.50 (213)
Lubrication 1125 5.00 (2.37) 8.25 (234)
Read and carry out all instructions on name and lubrication 1135 6.50 (3.08) 5.50 (156)
1145 8.00 (3.79) 10.25 (291)
plates and heed all warning tags. Determine minimum
1155 10.00 (4.73) 12.00 (340)
and maximum expected ambient temperature in which 1165 16.00 (7.57) 8.00 (227)
the backstop is to operate and use the recommended 1175 20.00 (9.46) 12.00 (340)
lubricant for the particular size backstop and applicable 1185 26.00 (12.30) 16.75 (475)
temperature range. †† Ounce (gram) per side.
‡‡ Use these quantities as a guide when ordering oil. Always fill to the static
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS — Refer to Tables 8 level indicated on the sight gauge.
thru 12 (pages 10 and 11) for transmission fluids, oils
and greases meeting Rexnord specifications. NOTE:
Lubricants listed are typical products ONLY and should GREASE PURGED SEALS — The purchaser/user is
not be construed as exclusive recommendations. responsible for adding grease to grease cavities, see
Figure 11. Fill grease cavity by slowly pumping NLGI #2
CAUTION: DO NOT USE EXTREME PRESSURE grade grease into OUTER grease fittings (see Figure 6,
LUBRICANTS OR GREASES. Typical extreme pressure page 6) with HAND GREASE GUN until fresh grease flows
additives are sulphur, chlorine, lead and phosphorus out along the shaft. Wipe off purged grease.
derivatives, which act under conditions of heat and
pressure to produce a coating on the working surfaces If the backstop is equipped with a shaft guard, remove guard
which could allow slippage. Similarly, lubricants containing cover to observe when grease is expelled from around the
graphite and molybdenum disulfide cannot be used. shaft.

WARNING: FOOD PROCESSING INDUSTRIES
Backstops are not approved for use in the food and drug
industries if lubricants could contaminate material being
processed.
CAUTION: DO NOT use pressurized grease gun. Use
manual grease gun to prevent damage to seals.
Grease application or re-lubrication should be done at
temperatures above 20°F (-7°C). If grease must be applied
below 20°F (-7°C), consult Factory.

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-111

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 10 of 12) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E

PURGING GREASE TABLE 10 — Dexron Automatic

Transmission Fluids
GREASE
FITTING Viscosity @ 40°C — 29 - 31 cSt
Viscosity Index — 145 - 152
Pour Point — -65°F (-54°C)
Ambient Temp Range — – 40°F to +125°F (– 40°C to 52°C)
GREASE Maximum Fluid Operating Temp — +200°F (+93°C)
CAVITY Manufacturer Fluid Name
BP Lubricants USA/Castrol Castrol Transmax Dexron VI ATF
Chevron U.S.A., Inc. Chevron ATF Dexron - VI
Chevron/Texaco Havoline ATF Dexron VI
CITGO Petroleum Corporation CITGO Transgard ATF, Dexron VI
ExxonMobil Mobil Dexron VI ATF
Petro-Canada Petro-Canada Dexron - VI
Pennzoil Dexron VI
Shell Oil Co.
Quaker State Dexron VI ATF
Total Specialties USA, Inc. Dexron VI ATF
Valvoline Valvoline Dexron VI ATF

TABLE 11 — Multi-ViscosityOils‡
Manufacturer Lubricant Name
BP Lubricants USA/Castrol Castrol GTX 10W40
Chevron U.S.A., Inc. Chevron Supreme 10W-40 Motor Oil
Chevron/Texaco Havoline 10W-40 Motor Oil
CITGO Petroleum Corporation CITGO SuperGard 10W-40 Motor Oil
GREASE ExxonMobil Mobil Super 10W-40 High Mileage Motor Oil
FITTING
Petro-Canada Petro-Canada Supreme 10W-40 Motor Oil
FormulaShell Conventional Motor Oil 10W-40
Figure 11 Shell Oil Co. Pennzoil Motor Oil 10W-40
Quaker State 10W-40 Peak Perf. Conv. Motor Oil
Valvoline Valvoline 10W-40 Premium Conventional
TABLE 8 — Cold Climate ‡‡ SAE 10W-40 motor oil with a pour point of at least –20°F (–29°C).
Lubricant
Ambient Temperature Range -40°F to -10°F (-40°C to -23°C) — Mobil Aero HFA

TABLE 9 — Petroleum Based R&O LubricantsH Maximum operating temperature of lubricants 200°F (93°C)
ISO Viscosity Grade 68 100 150 220
AGMA Viscosity Grade 2 3 4 5
cSt @ 40°C †
61.2-74.8 90-110 135-165 198-242
Viscosity
SSU @ 100°F 284-347 417-510 626-765 918-1122
Manufacturer Lubricant Name Lubricant Name Lubricant Name Lubricant Name
Hyspin AWS 68 Hyspin AWS 100 Hyspin AWS 150 Hyspin AWS 220
Castrol Industrial Lubricants
Castrol Paradene R&O 68 Castrol Paradene R&O 100 Castrol Paradene R&O 150 Castrol Paradene R&O 220
Chevron / Texaco / Caltex Rando HD 68 Rando HD 100 Rando HD 150 Rando HD 220
Citgo Petroleum Corp. Pacemaker T 68 Pacemaker T 115 Pacemaker T 150 Pacemaker SD 220
DTE Oil Heavy Medium DTE Heavy Oil DTE Oil Extra Heavy DTE Oil BB
Exxon Mobil / Esso
... Vacuoline 525 Vacuoline 528 Vacuoline 533
Petro-Canada Lubricants TurboFlo R&O 68 TurboFlo R&O 100 TurboFlo R&O 150 TurboFlo R&O 220
Phillips 66 / Conoco / 76 Lubricants / Kendall Multipurpose R&O 68 Multipurpose R&O 100 Multipurpose R&O 150 Multipurpose R&O 220
Morlina S2 B 68 Morlina S2 B 100 Morlina S2 B 150 Morlina S2 B 220
Shell Oil Co.
... Morlina S2 BA 100 Morlina S2 BA 150 Morlina S2 BA 220
Total Lubricants USA / Keystone Div. Penwalt Corp. Azolla ZS 68 Azolla ZS 100 Cirkan ZS 150 Cirkan ZS 220
Whitmore Manufacturing Company Hyperion 68 Hyperion 100 Hyperion 150 Hyperion 220
++ 1 Minimum viscosity index of 90.
†† 2 Kinematic viscosity in units of mm2/s is equivalent to cSt (centistokes).

568-111 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

October 2014 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
NEW www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E (Page 11 of 12)
TABLE 12 — Greases for Grease Purged Outer
SealsH 0° to 200°F (–18° to +93°C)
Manufacturer Lubricant Name†
ExxonMobil Unirex N2
Kluber Lubrication Centoplex 2
Precision XL EMB Grease
Petro-Canada Lubricants
Precision Synthetic EMB
Shell Oil Co. Gadus S2 V100-2
Total Lubricants Multis 2
++ The purchaser/user is responsible for adding grease to the seal cavities.
†† Seal cavities are partially filled with lithium-complex type grease at the
factory. When filling cavities, be sure grease is compatible with this type
of grease. For example, do not mix polyurea and lithium based greases.
Preventive Maintenance
AFTER FIRST WEEK OF OPERATION — Drain lubricant.
Fill with new lubricant to proper oil level and operate for 5
to 10 minutes. Drain again and fill with new, clean lubricant
to proper oil level.
LUBRICANT CHANGES — For normal operating conditions (8
to 10 hours per day) with low dust or abrasive environment and
ambient temperatures less than 125°F (52°C), change lubricant
every six months or 2500 hours, whichever occurs first.
For 24 hours per day operating conditions, change
lubricants every three months of operation.
For operation in a dusty or abrasive environment, it may be
necessary to change lubricant and flush every 300 hours. Have
a lubricant supplier analyze oil samples from the backstop
periodically and recommend economical change periods based
on the rate of lubricant contamination and degradation.
PURGING GREASE SEALS — Periodically, (at least at
every lubricant change) depending upon the frequency
and degree of contamination, purge contaminated grease
from outer grease purged seals. See instructions on page
9 for purging grease.
Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-111
Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
TORQUE ARM ALIGNMENT — Check alignment of the
torque arm whenever the lubricant is changed. Maintain
clearances between torque arm and support as specified in
the TORQUE ARM STOPS (OR STIRRUP) paragraph, page 2.
Stored or Inactive Backstops
Backstops are shipped WITHOUT LUBRICANT but do
contain one ounce of NOX-Rust® VCI 10‡ vapor phase rust
inhibitor which will protect internal parts against rust for a
period of up to six months.
If the backstop is to be stored or inactive for more than
six months, add the recommended amount of lubricant
from Table 7, page 9, and add one ounce of NOX-Rust
VCI 10 vapor phase rust inhibitor every additional six
month period. Replace breather with pipe plug for
extended storage.
Indoor dry storage is recommended. If outdoor storage is
necessary, cover the backstop with a tarpaulin or suitable
covering.
‡‡ Product of the Daubert Chemical Co., Chicago, IL.
BEFORE PLACING BACKSTOP IN OPERATION — Drain
lubricant mixture and replace breather and oil sight gauge,
if removed. Flush backstop and refill with clean, fresh
lubricant per instructions above.
Dismantling, Repair & Parts Replacement
WARNING: DO NOT attempt to service or remove
backstop before removing load.
An important part of the Falk NRT backstop manufacturing
process is the full load and overrunning testing with
specially instrumented equipment. Consequently, return
NRT backstops to Rexnord for repair and full load testing.
Except for replacement of oil seals (Service Manual 568-
131), NRT backstops should not be dismantled or repaired
in the field. If seals are to be replaced, it is important that
the cam and roller assemblies not be removed from the
outer race. Removal will void applicable warranties.
When writing to Rexnord Service Department concerning
required service, state nature of problem and give complete
data from backstop nameplate: M.O. number, size, date, etc.
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 12 of 12) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185, Model E

PART DESCRIPTIONS
1. End Cover 7. Roller Cage End Rings (2) 11. Optional Axial Retaining Collar 13. Stop Lug Fasteners
2. Gasket 8. Inner Cam with fasteners 14. Rotation Direction Plate
3. Bearing 9. Outer Race 12. Stop Lug 15. End Cover Fasteners
4. Outer Seal 10. Labyrinth Cover (2) 16. Torque Arm
5. Inner Seal 17. Torque Arm Pin
6. Rollers 18. Roller Cage Spacer Post
19. Roller Cage Fasteners
20. Grease Fitting

13

12
17 20
1 1 16
2 18 19
9 2
7 8 10 11
4 5 3 6 3 5 4
14

15
15 20

568-111 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

October 2014 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
NEW www.rexnord.com
 Falk® Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Oil Seal Replacement
Type NRT • Sizes 70-180, 1070-1185, Model E (Page 1 of 3)

How to Use this Manual

This manual applies to standard Falk Type NRT backstops.
This manual provides detailed instructions on oil seal
replacement. Use the following Table of Contents to locate
required information.

Table of Contents COTTER PIN

TORQUE ARM PIN
Oil Seal Replacement....................................................... 1-2 NYLON SLING
END COVER
Backstop Removal................................................................1
INNER CAM HUB FACE-
Seal Replacement................................................................2 PUSH ON THIS FACE
WHEN INSTALLING
Backstop Installation........................................................ 2-3 BACKSTOP ON SHAFT

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS

MANUAL FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE AND
TROUBLE FREE SERVICE.
NYLON
SLING
Introduction
This manual covers oil seal replacement for both new model
cast iron and fabricated steel end covers. See Page 2.
CAUTION: Remove all external loads from drive before CLAMPS TO PREVENT
SLING FROM SLIPPING
servicing drive or accessories. Do not damage inner cam hub OFF "I" BEAM
face: new seals will leak if seal contacting surface is marred. Do
not use abrasive material on seal contacting surface.
TORQUE ARM

Required Equipment
In addition to standard mechanic’s tools, the following BALANCE
POINT
equipment is required: hoist, sling, torque wrench, dial Figure 1
indicator with stand or depth micrometer and puller.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to service or remove backstop
before removing load. When removing backstop from shaft,
do not apply heat to the backstop. Apply axial force to the
inner cam hub face of the backstop only.

Backstop Removal
1. Drain and discard lubricant in an environmentally safe
method.
2. Remove oil sight gauge and breather assembly and
insert pipe plugs in cover holes.
3. Remove torque arm. Refer to Figure 1 for proper
method of supporting and lifting.
4. Reassemble torque arm pins in backstop and lock in
place with cotter pins for lifting.
5. If the backstop is furnished with an axial retaining collar(s),
loosen set screws and mounting bolts and remove collar.
Remove burrs on shaft caused by set screws.
6. Remove backstop from shaft. Apply force to the inner
cam hub face of the backstop only. (Figure 1)
7. Thoroughly clean exterior of backstop with clean
solvent to prevent dirt from falling into the backstop
when disassembling.
8. Position backstop on clean work surface with bore
vertical.

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-131

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
Oil Seal Replacement • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 2 of 3) Type NRT • Sizes 70-180, 1070-1185, Model E

BACKSTOP SEAL REPLACEMENT
Removal
CAUTION: Remove all external loads from drive before
servicing drive or accessories. Do not damage cam hub
face: new seals will leak if seal contacting surface is
marred. Do not use abrasive material on seal contacting
surface.
1. To prevent dirt from falling into the backstop,
thoroughly clean the exterior of backstop with clean
non-flammable solvent.
2. Remove labyrinth cover (See Figure 4) from backstop.
Clean cam and hub face with solvent and remove all
sharp edges.
3. Outer Seal — With a hook shaped tool reach over
the outer seal and pull outward moving around the
opening, (see Figure 2).
2. Inner Seal — Position the inner seal squarely in the end
cover with the garter spring positioned per Figure 7.
3. Place a square ended cylindrical tool against the seal
and press or lightly tap the tool (not the seal) until the
seal is seated against the shoulder. (Figure 3)
4. Check inner seal backface runout with a depth
micrometer, dial indicator, or bar micrometer as
shown in Figure 3, must be performed prior to outer
seal installation. Runout must not exceed
.010” (0.25mm) TIR.
MEASURE PROPER
DEPTH USING DESIRED
MEASURING METHOD AS NOTED

INNER SEAL RUNOUT

REFERENCE SURFACES

Figure 3

5. Outer Seal — Apply a thin layer of NLGI#2 grease to

the outward face of the inner seal. Position the new
outer seal on the inner cam with the lip facing inward
(See Figure 4). Stretch the seal around the inner cam
Figure 2
moving around the diameter evenly until the outer seal
is installed to the depth as found in Table 1.
4. Inner Seal — Use a sharp center punch to lightly
6. Check seal runout with a depth micrometer, dial
punch the seal case as a guide for the drill.
indicator or bar micrometer as shown in Figure 3.
5. Wrap several turns of tape around the drill Runout must not exceed .010” (0.25mm) TIR.
approximately .250” (6mm) from the drill point to
prevent the drill from entering too deeply into the
housing and damaging the bearing (inner seal only).
Grease or magnetize the drill to help retain the chips.
Drill two .125” (3mm) diameter holes in the seal case LABYRINTH
180° apart. Control the angle of the drill as illustrated COVER
in Figure 6 to prevent damage to the cam.
6. Insert two #10 sheet metal screws of sufficient length
into the seal. DO NOT drive the screw more than .250”
(6mm) beyond seal face or bearing damage may
occur. Use a claw type pry bar under the screw head
as shown in Figure 6, and pry the seal out. Remove
all chips. Use a magnet to remove the chips that fall
into the bore. Remove Permatex sealant from housing
bore. Inspect the seal cavity and remove any debris OUTER SEAL
INSTALLATION DEPTH
or metal chips. Thoroughly clean the seal cavity with
clean non-flammable solvent.
Figure 4

Installation
7. Replace the labyrinth cover and screws. Ensure the
1. Check seal surface for any damage prior to installing
gap between the inner cam and labyrinth cover is
new seals. Install one seal at a time. Coat the outside
even all the way around. (See Figure 7.) Torque the
diameter of the inner seal housing bore with Permatex
bolts to 14-17 lb-ft (18-23 Nm).
#3 or equivalent sealant.

568-131 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

October 2014 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
NEW www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Oil Seal Replacement
Type NRT • Sizes70-180, 1070-1185, Model E (Page 3 of 3)

CAUTION: An important part of the Falk NRT backstop

TABLE 1 — Outer Seal Installation Depth manufacturing process is the full load and overrunning
Outer Seal testing with specially instrumented equipment.
NRT Size
Inch mm Consequently, return NRT backstops to Rexnord for repair
1075 0.614 ±0.009 15.60 ±0.23 and full load testing.
1085 0.672 ±0.020 17.07 ±0.51
1095 0.768 ±0.020 19.51 ±0.51 Except for replacement of shaft seals, NRT backstops
1105 0.511 ±0.107 12.98 ±2.72 should not be dismantled or repaired in the field. If seals
1115 0.669 ±0.051 16.99 ±1.30 are to be replaced, it is important that the cam and roller
1125 0.629 ±0.044 15.98 ± 1.10 assemblies not be removed from the outer race. Removal
1135 0.444 ±0.022 11.28 ±0.55 will void applicable warranties.
1145 0.571 ±0.044 14.50 ± 1.10
1155 0484 ±0.044 12.29 ±1.10 When contacting Rexnord concerning required service,
1165 0.784 ±0.044 19.91 ±1.10 state the nature of problem and give complete data from
1175 0.884 ±0.044 22.45 ±1.10 backstop nameplate; order number, size, date, etc.
1185 0.914 ±0.044 23.22 ±1.10

Backstop Installation
Refer to Manual 568-111 for backstop installation, oil sight
gauge assembly, and lubrication recommendations.

Figure 5 Figure 6

LABYRINTH
COVER
INNER SEAL
SHOULDER
ENSURE EVEN
GAP WHEN
INSTALLING
COVER

GARTER
SPRINGS

Figure 7

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-131

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 October 2014
www.rexnord.com NEW
 Falk® Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185 (Page 1 of 11)
How to Use this Manual
The following instructions and recommendations apply to
all standard Falk™ Type NRT backstops.
Their performance and life depend largely upon how they
are installed and serviced. Drawings are representative of
this series of backstops and may not agree in exact detail
with all backstop sizes.
When requesting information, specify the M.O. number,
backstop size, model number, maximum running rpm,
torque rating, torque arm angle degrees, and date
stamped on the backstop nameplate.
This manual provides detailed instructions on installation,
maintenance, and parts identification. Use the following
Table of Contents to locate required information.
Table of Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Codes & General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Application Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Dismantling, Repair & Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . 11
Stored or Inactive Backstops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Part Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS
MANUAL FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE AND
TROUBLE FREE SERVICE.
Introduction
IMPORTANT: Mount the backstop ONLY at the torque
arm angle degrees (±5°) stated on the nameplate and as
described in Figure 4, page 5. Lubrication lines and oil level
will be incorrect for other angles; refer revised specifications
to the Factory.
WARRANTY — Rexnord Industries, LLC (the “Company”)
warrants that NRT backstops (I) conform to Company’s
published specifications, and (II) are free from defects of
material for three years from the date of shipment.
Company does not warrant any non-Company branded
products or components (manufacturer’s warranty applies)
or any defects in, damage to, or failure of products caused
by: (I) dynamic vibrations imposed by the drive system in
which such products are installed unless the nature of such
vibrations has been defined and accepted in writing by
Company as a condition of operation; (II) failure to provide
suitable installation environment; (III) use for purposes other
than those for which designed, or other abuse or misuse; (IV)
unauthorized attachments, modifications or disassembly, or
(V) mishandling during shipping.
Safety Codes & General Precautions
WARNING: Consult applicable local and national safety
codes for proper guarding of rotating members. Lock out
Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-110
Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 December 2013
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-11
power source and remove all external loads from drive
before servicing drive or accessories.
DISMANTLING, REPAIR, & PARTS REPLACEMENT — See
page 11. The backstop and normal associated equipment
(shaft, pulleys, etc.), involve moving parts, therefore consult
local, state, OSHA, and ANSI safety codes for proper
guarding of revolving parts and possible pinch points.
(A pinch point occurs at the contact point between the
backstop torque arm and end covers, and between the
torque arm and stirrup. See Figs. 2, 3, and 5).
Carefully read and follow all supplementary instructions
and tags attached to the backstop and then file for future
reference.
Operate the backstop within the torque rating, overrunning
speed, temperature range, and torque arm angle listed
on the nameplate. Follow lubrication instructions in this
manual.
When removing backstop from shaft, do not apply heat to
the backstop. Apply axial force to the hub of the backstop
only.
Damage may occur to the backstop if it remains under full
load for extended periods of time. Remove the load before
shutting down the equipment.
If the shaft was accidentally rotated in the wrong
direction of rotation at start-up, the backstop may have
been damaged. Return the backstop to the Factory for
inspection.
Application Requirements
BACKSTOP APPLICATION — The Falk NRT backstop
is designed to prevent reverse rotation in applications
such as inclined conveyors, bucket elevators, fans,
rotary pumps, and kilns. If local safety codes permit, the
backstop may be used as a backup for a brake on these
applications, but NOT in people conveying systems such
as elevators, manlifts, ski tows or ski lifts. Also, DO NOT
use the backstop as a substitute for a brake.
OPERATING TEMPERATURES — Enclosure of the
backstop may cause overheating. Provide adequate
ventilation. Backstop operating temperatures, at maximum
overrunning speed, may reach 200°F (93°C). Determine
the effect of this temperature on the driven equipment and
provide cooling if necessary.
If a backstop operates in the sun at ambient temperatures
over 100°F (38°C), then special measures should be taken to
protect the backstop from solar energy. This protection can
consist of a canopy over the backstop or reflective paint on
the backstop. If neither is possible, a cooling device such as
a fan may be required to prevent the sump temperature from
exceeding the allowable maximum of 200°F (93°C).
INDEXING — Falk NRT backstops can be used for
indexing service. Refer application data to the Factory
for selection. Indexing is defined as continuous cyclic or
periodic application of the backstop as encountered in
the conversion of reciprocating or oscillating motion into
intermittent linear motion.
JOGGING — Defined as start/stop movement with jerking
or jolting motion is permissible. NOTE: There must be
at least one complete overrunning revolution between
backstop operations or it is considered an indexing
application.
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 2 of 11) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185

EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES — The purchaser is
responsible for taking adequate precautions to prevent
spark generation in explosive atmospheres. Consideration
should be given to spark generation that may occur when
the torque arm strikes the stirrup.
CHEMICAL ATMOSPHERES — The backstop may be
damaged if exposed to certain types of chemicals or
vapors; for example, potash dust, chlorine gas, carbon
tetrachloride, etc. These materials may cause deterioration
of the seals or aluminum roller cage rings.
AXIAL RETAINING COLLARS — Axial retention of the
backstop is required to prevent the backstop from moving
on the shaft (either off the shaft or toward the headshaft
bearing), causing increased loads on the backstop
bearings. Rexnord offers axial retaining collars as an
optional extra charge accessory for all applications. The
collars are manufactured to fit the backstop and the shaft
and can be mounted on either side of the backstop. This
allows the retaining collars to be mounted on the shaft
inside of the backstop if the application requirements so
dictate. If two collars were furnished with the backstop,
mount one collar on each side of the backstop (so
backstop is sandwiched between the collars).
LUBRICATION LINES, SIGHT GAUGE & BREATHER — Do
not assemble to backstop until backstop is mounted on the
shaft.
General Instructions
BACKSTOP–SHAFT FITS — The shaft must have a 125
micro-inch (or finer) finish and clearance fits specified in
Table 2 (page 6).
KEYS & KEYWAYS — Keys to be used with Falk NRT
backstops are furnished by the Factory. They are either cold
drawn 1045 steel or heat-treated alloy steel (310-350 HB).
DO NOT USE SLED RUNNER TYPE KEYWAY. IT MAY
INDUCE UNDUE FORCES ON BACKSTOP.
TORQUE ARM STOPS (OR STIRRUP) — The torque arm
stops must be designed to resist the force developed by
the actual torque applied to the backstop. The minimum
recommended distance to the torque arm stop is .9N
as illustrated in Figure 1, page 5, and Table 3, page 6.
Use torque arm stops capable of withstanding the loads
tabulated in Table 3, page 6.
Where shorter than recommended torque arms are
required, the stirrup should be designed to withstand the
increased reaction forces of the shorter torque arm.
Actual Retention Force = Actual Peak Backstopping Torque
Actual Application Dimension N
The torque arm must be free to move within the stirrup.
Provide clearance on three sides per Figure 3, page 5. DO
NOT restrict torque arm movement by welding or securing
the torque arm to any supporting structure.
Locate the torque arm support surface parallel (±1/2°) to the torque
arm surface.
Prevent accumulation of any foreign material or ice around
torque arm and torque arm stirrup which could restrict free
movement of the torque arm.
LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS — See Figure 5, page 5. Cotter
pins must be locked to prevent axial movement of torque
arm pin. Sling torque arm as shown. Use clamps or similar
device to prevent sling from slipping.

BACKSTOP MOUNTING POSITIONS — The backstop

rotational axis must be horizontal within 5° for all
applications.
The NRT backstop is capable of being mounted at any
desired angle, per Figures 2 and 4, page 5; however,
a horizontal mounting at 0° or 180° is preferred. The
mounting angle must be specified at the time of purchase.
This enables Rexnord to custom fit the lubrication lines
and establish and mark the proper static oil level for the
specified mounting angle. The lubrication lines, sight
gauge and breather are removed for shipping purposes.
Furnished lubrication lines and oil level will be incorrect for
mounting angles not within 5° of the angle stamped on the
nameplate — refer revised specifications to the Factory.

568-110 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

December 2013 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
Supersedes 5-11 www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185 (Page 3 of 11)

TABLE 1 — Shaft and Keyway Dimensions – Inch

Nominal Shaft Shaft Keyway Backstop Keyway Key ①
Size Diameter Key Length Minimum Key Key
Width Depth Width Depth Width x Height
(Over-Thru) Furnished Engagement Material ②
2.3125 - 2.7500 .625 .313 .625 .313 .625 x .625 7.25 6.50 2
2.7500 - 3.2500 .750 .375 .750 .375 .750 x .750 7.00 6.00 1
1075NRT 3.2500 - 3.5625 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 5.50 4.50 1
3.5625 - 3.7500 .875 .313 .875 .323 .875 x .625 7.25 5.50 1
3.7500 - 3.9375 1.000 .500 1.000 .250 1.000 x .750 7.00 6.50 1
2.9375 .750 .375 .750 .375 .750 x .750 7.50 7.00 2
2.9375 - 3.2500 .750 .375 .750 .375 .750 x .750 7.50 7.00 2
1085NRT 3.2500 - 3.7500 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 6.00 4.50 2
3.7500 - 4.5000 1.000 .500 1.000 .500 1.000 x 1.000 7.00 5.50 1
4.5000 - 4.7500 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.00 4.00 1
4.7500 - 5.1875 1.250 .625 1.250 .250 1.250 x .8750 7.00 7.00 1
3.4375 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 9.50 9.00 2
3.4375 - 3.7500 .875 .438 .875 .438 .875 x .875 9.50 9.00 2
1095NRT 3.7500 - 4.5000 1.000 .500 1.000 .500 1.000 x 1.000 9.00 8.50 1
4.5000 - 5.0000 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.00 6.00 1
5.0000 - 5.5000 1.250 .625 1.250 .500 1.250 x 1.125 7.00 6.50 1
4.9375 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.50 7.00 2
1105NRT 4.9375 - 5.5000 1.250 .625 1.250 .625 1.250 x 1.250 7.50 7.00 2
5.5000 - 6.5000 1.500 .750 1.500 .750 1.500 x .1.500 8.00 6.50 1
6.5000 - 7.4375 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 9.00 5.50 1
5.9375 1.500 .750 1.500 .750 1.500 x 1.500 8.75 8.00 2
5.9375 - 6.5000 1.500 .750 1.500 .750 1.500 x 1.500 8.75 8.00 2
1115NRT 6.500 - 7.5000 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 9.00 8.50 1
7.500 - 8.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 9.00 8.00 1
8.000 - 8.4375 2.000 .750 2.000 .500 2.000 x 1.250 10.50 10.50 1
7.2500 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 11.00 10.50 1
1125NRT 7.250 - 7.5000 1.750 .750 1.750 .750 1.750 x 1.500 11.00 10.50 1
7.500 - 9.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 11.00 10.50 1
8.5000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 11.00 10.00 2
1135NRT 8.500 - 9.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 11.00 10.00 2
9.000 -10.5000 2.500 .875 2.500 .875 2.500 x 1.750 12.00 11.00 1
9.0000 2.000 .750 2.000 .750 2.000 x 1.500 13.00 12.50 2
1145NRT 9.0000 -11.0000 2.500 .875 2.500 .875 2.500 x 1.750 12.00 11.50 2
11.0000 -12.0000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 13.00 11.00 1
10.5000 2.500 1.250 2.500 1.250 2.500 x 2.500 12.00 11.00 2
1155NRT 10.500 -11.0000 2.500 1.250 2.500 1.250 2.500 x 2.500 12.00 11.00 2
11.000 -13.0000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 13.00 12.50 2
13.000 -13.2500 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 12.00 9.00 2
12.5000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 15.50 12.00 2
1165NRT 12.500 -13.0000 3.000 1.000 3.000 1.000 3.000 x 2.000 15.50 12.00 2
13.000 -15.0000 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 12.00 12.00 2
15.000 -15.5000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 13.00 9.00 2
13.5000 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 16.00 15.50 2
1175NRT 13.500 -15.0000 3.500 1.250 3.500 1.250 3.500 x 2.500 16.00 15.50 2
15.000 -17.5000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 13.00 12.50 2
15.5000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 17.00 16.50 2
1185NRT 15.500 -18.0000 4.000 1.500 4.000 1.500 4.000 x 3.000 17.00 16.50 2
18.000 -20.0000 5.000 1.750 5.000 1.750 5.000 x 3.500 14.00 13.50 2
①① Keys are furnished by Rexnord to suit shaft and backstop keyways. Keys are either cold drawn 1045 material or heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB).
②② #1 Keys are cold-drawn 1045 steel.
#2 Keys are heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB).

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-110

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 December 2013
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-11
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 4 of 11) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185

TABLE 1A — Shaft and Keyway Dimensions – Metric (Millimeters)

Nominal Shaft Shaft Keyway Backstop Keyway Key ①
Size Diameter Key Length Minimum Key Key
Width Depth Width Depth Width x Height
(Over-Thru) Furnished Engagement Material Á
58 - 65 18.0 7.0 18.0 4.4 18 x 11 210 210 2
65 - 75 20.0 7.5 20.0 4.9 20 x 12 200 185 2
1075NRT 75 - 85 22.0 9.0 22.0 5.4 22 x 14 180 160 2
85 - 95 25.0 9.0 25.0 5.4 25 x 14 150 140 2
95 - 100 28.0 10.0 28.0 4.9 28 x 14.5 180 140 2
75 - 85 22.0 9.0 22.0 5.4 22 x 14 210 210 2
1085NRT 85 - 95 25.0 9.0 25.0 5.4 25 x 14 210 210 2
95 - 110 28.0 10.0 28.0 6.4 28 x 16 180 170 2
110 - 130 32.0 11.0 32.0 7.4 32 x 18 150 120 2
95 - 110 28.0 10.0 28.0 6.4 28 x 16 265 265 2
1095NRT 110 - 130 32.0 11.0 32.0 7.4 32 x 18 230 225 2
130 - 150 36.0 12.0 36.0 7.4 36 x 19 180 160 2
120 - 130 32.0 11.0 32.0 7.4 32 x 18 265 265 2
1105NRT 130 - 150 36.0 12.0 36.0 8.4 36 x 20 265 265 2
150 - 170 40.0 13.0 40.0 9.4 40 x 22 220 210 2
170 - 200 45.0 15.0 45.0 10.4 45 x 25 170 165 2
150 - 170 40.0 13.0 40.0 9.4 40 x 22 290 290 2
1115NRT 170 - 200 45.0 15.0 45.0 10.4 45 x 25 290 280 2
200 - 225 50.0 17.0 50.0 11.4 50 x 28 220 220 2
180 - 200 45.0 15.0 45.0 10.4 45 x 25 305 305 2
1125NRT 200 - 230 50.0 17.0 50.0 11.4 50 x 28 305 305 2
230 - 240 56.0 20.0 56.0 12.4 56 x 32 280 250 2
210 - 230 50.0 17.0 50.0 11.4 50 x 28 350 350 2
1135NRT 230 - 260 56.0 20.0 56.0 12.4 56 x 32 350 350 2
260 - 280 63.0 20.0 63.0 12.4 63 x 32 330 315 2
260 56.0 20.0 56.0 12.4 56 x 32 350 350 2
1145NRT 260 - 290 63.0 20.0 63.0 12.4 63 x 32 350 350 2
290 - 300 70.0 22.0 70.0 14.4 70 x 36 350 340 2

1155NRT 290 - 330 70.0 22.0 70.0 14.4 70 x 36 360 360 2

330 - 350 80.0 25.0 80.0 15.4 80 x 40 360 330 2
320 - 330 70.0 22.0 70.0 14.4 70 x 36 415 395 2
1165NRT 330 - 380 80.0 25.0 80.0 15.4 80 x 40 415 395 2
380 - 405 90.0 28.0 90.0 17.4 90 x 45 380 365 2
1175NRT 380 - 440 90.0 28.0 90.0 17.4 90 x 45 430 415 2
440 - 465 100.0 31.0 100.0 19.5 100 x 50 430 415 2
1185NRT 440 - 500 100.0 31.0 100.0 19.5 100 x 50 450 430 2
①① Keys are furnished by Rexnord to suit shaft and backstop keyways. Keys are either cold drawn 1045 material or heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB)
②② #1 Keys are cold-drawn 1045 steel.
#2 Keys are heat-treated alloy steel (310-350HB).

568-110 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

December 2013 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
Supersedes 5-11 www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185 (Page 5 of 11)

90°

180° 0°
HORIZONTAL

.9 N
ACTUAL APPLICATION
DIMENSION N 270°
Figure 1 Figure 4

THE BACKSTOP ROTATIONAL AXIS (ie.-Bore Axis) MUST BE HORIZONTAL WITHIN 5 °

N

SEE END
VIEW
HORIZONTAL BELOW
0°
PREFERRED POSITION

STIRRUP

0.9N
VERTICAL

COTTER PIN
BACKSTOP TORQUE
ARM CAN BE TORQUE ARM PIN
MOUNTED AT NYLON SLING
ANY ANGLE END COVER
CAM OR HUB FACE-
PUSH ON THIS FACE
315° WHEN INSTALLING
BACKSTOP ON SHAFT
A BOOT OR HOOD IS RECOMMENDED
FOR ALL MOUNTING POSITIONS TO
PREVENT ACCUMULATION OF MATERIAL
AROUND STIRRUP & MAINTAIN CLEARANCE
FOR FREE MOVEMENT
270°
FLOOR SLOT
NYLON
Figure 2 SLING

1” to 1 ½ ”
(25.4 mm to 38.1 mm)
CLEARANCE
1” to 1 ½” CLAMPS TO PREVENT
(25.4 mm to 38.1 mm) SLING FROM SLIPPING
CLEARANCE OFF “I” BEAM

TORQUE ARM

BALANCE
(25.4 mm to 38.1 mm)

POINT

Figure 5
CLEARANCE
1” to 1 ½”

Figure 3 END VIEW

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-110

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 December 2013
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-11
Installation and Maintenance • Falk® Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 6 of 11) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185

TABLE 2 — Backstop – Shaft Fits (Inch①)

PUSH ON INNER CAM FACE ONLY
Nominal Diameter Nominal Shaft Nominal Bore Bore–Shaft②
(From-Includes) Tolerance Diameter Tolerance Min–Max Clearance
1.9375 – 2.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0005, + .0015 .0005 – .0025
3.0000 – 7.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0010, + .0025 .0010 – .0035
8.0000 – 11.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0015, + .0035 .0015 – .0045
12.0000 – 14.9375 +.0000, – .0010 +.0020, + .0045 .0020 – .0055
15.0000 – 20.0000 +.0000, – .0020 +.0020, + .0045 .0020 – .0065 INNER CAM
①① Backstops for metric shafts are supplied w/E7 bore and D10 keyway tolerance assuming
m6 shaft diameter and h9 keyway tolerance. MINIMUM SHAFT
②② A 125 micro-inch (or finer) shaft finish and clearance fit specified above are ENGAGEMENT
recommended.

Figure 6

TABLE 3 — Backstop Reaction Force at Torque Arm Stirrup (Inch & Metric)
N Torque Arm Length
Backstop Catalog Torque Rating .9N =/.5” (127mm) Torque Arm Reaction Force③
(See drawing on next page)
Size
lb-ft Nm Inch mm Inch mm lb N
1075NRT 10,000 13,600 36.00 914 32.50 822 5,550 24,700
1085NRT 16,000 21,700 48.00 1219 43.00 1097 6,700 29,800
1095NRT 28,000 38,000 54.00 1372 48.50 1235 10,500 46,700
1105NRT 45,000 61,000 66.00 1676 59.50 1508 13,600 60,500
1115NRT 75,000 102,000 72.00 1829 65.00 1646 20,800 92,550
1125NRT 105,000 142,000 78.00 1981 70.00 1788 27,000 120,100
1135NRT 150,000 203,000 82.00 2083 74.00 1875 36,500 162,400
1145NRT 212,000 287,000 88.00 2235 79.00 2011 48,300 214,850
1155NRT 249,000 338,000 94.00 2386 84.50 2146 53,300 237,100
1165NRT 346,000 469,000 100.00 2540 90.00 2286 69,200 307,850
1175NRT 519,000 704,000 120.00 3048 108.00 2743 86,500 384,850
1185NRT 747,000 1,013,000 120.00 3048 108.00 2748 124,500 553,800
③③ Reaction force is based on .9N torque arm length and 1.5 catalog rating:

Force (lb) = 1.50 x Catalog Torque Rating (lb-ft) x 12 (inch per foot)
.9N (in)

Force (N) = 1.50 x Catalog Torque Rating (Nm) x 1000 (mm per m)
.9N (mm)

For reduced length torque arms, substitute actual N dimension in formula.

568-110 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

December 2013 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
Supersedes 5-11 www.rexnord.com
 Falk® Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185 (Page 7 of 11)

Installation TABLE 5 — Axial Retaining Collar Fastener

MOUNT BACKSTOP — CAUTION: Before installing Tightening Torque③ — lb-in/Nm
backstop, check direction of shaft-free rotation and (all Fasteners are UNC)
required rotation of motor. The backstop overrunning (or
Fastener Size Tightening Torque (lb-in) Tightening Torque (Nm)
free rotation) direction is indicated by a rotation arrow on
each side of the backstop. .375"-16 440 50
.500"-13 1,025 116
1. Clean the shaft and remove burrs. .625"-11 2,050 232
2. Slide the axial retaining collar onto the shaft ONLY if .750"-10 3,475 393
the bore size or application requires a collar to be on 1.000"- 8 7,875 890
the shaft inside of (or ahead of) the backstop. 1.250"- 7 13,750 1 550
③③ Do not oil fasteners.
3. Coat shaft and key with oil or anti-seize compound to
ease installation of key, as well as backstop. Mount the
heat-treated key furnished with the backstop. MOUNT TORQUE ARM
4. Refer to Figure 5, page 5. Lift backstop and slide it 1. Lift torque arm as shown in Figure 5, page 5, and
onto shaft. Apply axial force only to the inner cam face attach it to the backstop with torque arm pins and
of the backstop. The backstop must be positioned cotter pins supplied with backstop. Lock cotter pins.
to meet certain minimum engagement requirements
which vary with backstop and bore size. Minimum 2. Place torque arm in torque arm support and then
required engagement is determined by the GREATER complete construction of the torque arm support as
distance of: previously described under TORQUE ARM STOPS (OR
STIRRUP) on page 2.
A. Minimum required backstop key engagement as
shown in Tables 1 and 1A, pages 3 and 4, or CAUTION: Check to see that backstop is not axially
B. Minimum shaft/inner cam engagement as shown in restrained through the torque arm and that accumulation
Figure 6 and Table 4. If two axial retention collars of foreign material or ice cannot restrict movement of the
are required, provide adequate shaft length to torque arm.
permit mounting the collars.
INSTALL LUBRICATION LINES, SIGHT GAUGE, &
BREATHER
TABLE 4 — Minimum Shaft Engagement 1. As previously stated, Rexnord custom fits the
Unit lubrication lines and marks the static oil level to suit
Size 1075 1085 1095 1105 1115 1125 1135 1145 1155 1165 1175 1185 the torque arm mounting angle specified at the time
Inches 6.2 6.2 8.1 8.1 9.0 9.6 11.4 11.4 11.5 13.8 14.3 14.7 of purchase. The lubrication lines, sight gauge,
mm 158 158 206 206 229 244 290 290 292 351 363 373 and breather are removed for shipping purposes.
The torque arm mounting angle is stamped on the
backstop nameplate, and the backstop must be
mounted within ±5° of this angle. See Figure 7, page
5. In all cases where a Rexnord axial retaining collar is 8, for interpretation of mounting angle. Lubrication
used (other than the applications referred to in Step 2 lines and oil level will be incorrect for other angles.
above), mount the collar to the backstop. First tighten
the fasteners to the backstop and then the fasteners to
the shaft. Torque to the (lb-in) given in Table 5. For bore
sizes requiring the use of two axial retention collars,
mount collars (one on each side) on the shaft and
tighten fasteners to the shaft.

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-110

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 December 2013
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-11
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 8 of 11) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185

90°

180° 0°
HORIZONTAL

270°

Figure 7

Use the above diagram to interpret the mounting angle

specified on the backstop nameplate. View the backstop
assembly from the shaft extension end as shown above.
DO NOT exceed the mounting angle by ±5° of the
specification on the backstop nameplate.

BREATHER GREASE FITTINGS

GREASE FITTINGS (2 OR 4)
(2 OR 4) 90° ANGLES INCREASE C.C.W. ROTATION ROTATION TEE
BREATHER BREATHER
ARROW ARROW
ELBOW
ROTATION ELBOW ELBOW
1 PURGE
ARROW 4 PLUGS
1 4
(1 OR 2) GREASE FITTINGS
(2 OR 4)
4
HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL
180° 0°
3 1
2
OIL 3
2
LEVEL
OIL 3 2
LEVEL OIL
TEE LEVEL
TEE PURGE PLUGS
(1 OR 2) DRAIN
DRAIN
270° PURGE PLUGS
(1 OR 2) DRAIN
LEFT RIGHT TEE

Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11

2. The lubrication lines, sight gauge and breather are
removed for shipping, the pipe tees and elbows (see
Figures 9, 10, and 11) are left in the end cover at the
proper angles for simple reassembly. The tees and
elbows are plugged for shipment.
3. The sight gauge/piping subassembly must be mounted
in a position that allows direct viewing of oil level
markings. Figures 9, 10, and 11 are examples of
left-hand assembly configurations. Similar right-hand
configurations are possible.
4. Coat all pipe threads with Permatex #3 or equivalent.
5. Position backstop and torque arm at angle stamped on
nameplate (±5°). Remove plug from the lowest pipe tee
and attach sight gauge/piping subassembly. DO NOT
tighten fittings.
6. With the sight gauge in the proper vertical position,
locate and remove the plug nearest the unattached
upper end of the sight gauge/piping subassembly.
This plug may be in the backstop end cover (Figures 9
and 10) or it may be in the upper pipe tee (Figure 11).
Install fitting but DO NOT tighten.
7. Position sight gauge oil level groove to the appropriate
dimension shown in Figure 12 and Table 6, page 9,
and tighten all fittings.
8. Refer to the following page for recommended lubricant.
Drain and flush residual shipping oil with specified
lubricant. Fill with lubricant by removing the pipe plug
in the elbow installed at Rexnord in the uppermost
hole. Also remove the uppermost pipe plug in the
opposite end cover to act as a vent. Fill to marks on oil
sight glass. Replace plugs after filling.
9. Install breather and associated piping parts in the
same elbow referred to in Step 8 above.
10. Backstops ordered as spares must be referenced to
the original Falk M.O. number from the nameplate.
Confirm power, speed, rotation, and torque arm angle.

568-110 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

December 2013 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
Supersedes 5-11 www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185 (Page 9 of 11)

LEVEL
TABLE 6A —Recommended Lubricants
Extreme High
SQUARE Cold Normal
Cold Temperature
Ambient Ambient
Ambient Ambient
Temperature -40°F to -15°F -15°F to +40°F +32°F to 125°F Greater than
Range 125°F
A HORIZONTAL (Degree F)
Temperature -40°C to -26°C -26°C to +4°C 0°C to 52°C Greater than
OIL Range
LEVEL 52°C
B (Degree C)
Unit Sizes Mobil Aero
1075 NRT HFA or Dexron ATF or Dexron ATF or AGMA #3 Oil
1095NRT Dexron ATF AGMA #2 Oil AGMA #2 Oil
OIL LEVEL SAE 10W40
GROOVE Unit Sizes Mobil Aero
1105NRT HFA or with pour point AGMA #4 Oil Consult
1145NRT Dexron ATF of at least Factory
HUB OR -20°F (-29°C)
INNER CAM
Unit Sizes Mobil Aero SAE 10W40
1155NRT- HFA or with pour point AGMA #5 Oil Consult
Figure 12 — METHODS OF MEASURING LOCATION OF OIL of at least Factory
1185NRT Dexron ATF
-20°F (-29°C)

TABLE 6 — Oil Level Dimensions① – Inch (mm) TABLE 7 — Approximate Oil Capacities②
Unit Size Dimension “A” Dimension “B” Backstop Size Oil Capacity Grease Purge
Aprox. Pints (Liters) Qty-Oz (grams) ③
1075 4.0 (102) 0.8 (20)
1085 5.3 (135) 1.2 (30) 1075 .50 (0.24) 2.25 (64)
1095 5.8 (147) 1.2 (30) 1085 .75 (0.35) 3.00 (85)
1105 7.6 (193) 1.7 (43) 1095 1.50 (0.71) 7.00 (198)
1105 2.00 (0.95) 9.00 (255)
1115 8.6 (218) 2.2 (56)
1125 9.7 (246) 2.3 (58) 1115 4.00 (1.89) 7.50 (213)
1135 10.8 (274) 3.0 (76) 1125 5.00 (2.37) 8.25 (234)
1145 12.1 (307) 2.9 (74) 1135 6.50 (3.08) 5.50 (156)
1145 8.00 (3.79) 10.25 (291)
1155 14.1 (358) 3.5 (89)
1165 15.1 (384) 4.4 (112) 1155 10.00 (4.73) 12.00 (340)
1175 18.6 (472) 5.4 (137) 1165 16.00 (7.57) 8.00 (227)
1185 20.0 (508) 5.0 (127) 1175 20.00 (9.46) 12.00 (340)
1185 26.00 (12.30) 16.75 (475)
①① Adjust piping so that the oil level indicator on sight gauge is within ±1/4”
(±/– 6 mm) of Dimension “A” or “B.” ②② Use these quantities as a guide when ordering oil. Always fill to the static
level indicated on the sight gauge.
③③ Ounce (gram) per side.
Lubrication
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS — Refer to Tables 8 GREASE PURGED SEALS — Backstops are furnished
thru 12 (pages 10 and 11) for transmission fluids, oils with grease purged tandem seals which, when greased,
and greases meeting Rexnord specifications. NOTE: provide maximum protection under the most unfavorable
Lubricants listed are typical products ONLY and should conditions such as atmospheres laden with taconite or
not be construed as exclusive recommendations. similarly severe abrasive dusts.
Read and carry out all instructions on name and lubrication The inner seal cavity is grease packed by Rexnord for all
plates and heed all warning tags. Determine minimum backstops. Refer to Figure 13, page 10. DO NOT FIELD
and maximum ambient temperature in which the backstop PURGE INNER SEAL CAVITY.
is to operate and use the recommended lubricant for The option of adding grease to the outer grease cavity
the particular size backstop which corresponds to the is the purchaser’s; however, it is recommended that
temperature conditions. grease be added when operating in abrasive atmospheric
conditions. Adding grease to the cavity is NOT
CAUTION: DO NOT USE EXTREME PRESSURE RECOMMENDED if grease could contaminate the material
LUBRICANTS OR GREASES. Typical extreme pressure being processed as in the food and drug industries.
additives are sulphur, chlorine, lead and phosphorus
derivatives, as well as graphite and molybdenum disulfide, To purge OUTER purge chambers, pump NLGI #2 grease
which act under conditions of heat and pressure to into OUTER grease fittings until contaminated grease is
produce a coating on the working surfaces. expelled around the shaft. Wipe off purged grease.
OIL LEVEL — Fill the backstop with specified lubricant to If outer grease cavity is to be greased or purged, and the
the static level indicated by the scribed line on the vertical backstop is equipped with a shaft guard, remove guard
sight gauge. Check oil level in sight glass only when the cover to observe when grease is expelled from around the
unit is not operating. During operation the oil level in the shaft.
sight glass will drop due to distribution of oil around the CAUTION: DO NOT use pressurized grease guns.
periphery of the housing. Approximate oil capacities are
given in Table 7.

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-110

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 December 2013
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-11
Installation and Maintenance • Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops

(Page 10 of 11) Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185

PURGING GREASE TABLE 10 — Dexron Automatic

Transmission Fluids
API Gravity — 28.2
Pour Point — – 50°F (– 46°C)
Viscosity at 104°F (4O°C) SSU — 187
Viscosity Index ASTM D-2270 — 161
GREASE Color — Red
FITTING Ambient Temp Range — – 40°F to +125°F (– 40°C to +52°C)
Max Lube Operating Temp — +200°F (+93°C)
OUTER
GREASE Manufacturer Lubricant
CAVITY Amoco Oil Co. Dexron A-T-F
Atlantic Richfield Co. Arco Dexron ATF II
INNER Cities Service Oil Co. Automatic Trans. Fluid-Dexron Type
GREASE Conoco Inc. Conoco Dexron II Fluid
CAVITY Exxon Co. U.S.A. Exxon ATF
FACTORY
FILLED
Gulf Oil Co. U.S. Automatic Trans. Fluid-Dexron
Mobil Oil Corp. Mobil ATF D/M
Phillips Petroleum Co. Automatic Trans. Fluid-Dexron
Shell Oil Co. Domax T-6
Texaco Inc. Texamatic Fluid 8570

TABLE 11 — Multi-ViscosityOils①
Manufacturer Lubricant
GREASE Amoco Oil Co. Amoco LDO 10W40
FITTING Atlantic Richfield Co. Arco Supreme 10W40
Cities Service Oil Co. All Season Multi-Grade 10W40
Conoco Inc. Tracon Supreme 10W40
Exxon Co. U.S.A. Uniflo 10W40
Gulf Oil Co. U.S. Gulf Pride Prem. 10W40
Figure 13 Mobil Oil Corp. Mobil Super 10W40
Phillips Petroleum Co. Trop-Artic All-Season 10W40
Shell Oil Co. Fire & Ice 10W40
Texaco Inc. Havoline Super Prem. 10W40
TABLE 8 — Cold Climate Lubricant ①① Ambient Temperature Range –15°F to +40°F (–26°C to +4°C).
SAE 10W-40 motor oil with a pour point of at least –20°F (–29°C).
Ambient Temperature Range -10°F to -40°F (-23°C to -40°C) — Mobil Aero HFA

TABLE 9 — Petroleum-Based R & O Gear Oils (Maximum operating temperature of lubricants 200°F (93° )
AGMA Viscosity Grade 2 3 4 5
ISO Viscosity Grade 68 100 150 220
cSt @ 40°C 61.2-74.8 90-110 135-165 198-242
Viscosity
SSU @ 100°F 284-347 417-510 626-804 918-1140
Manufacturer Lubricant Lubricant Lubricant Lubricant
Amoco Oil Co. Amer. Ind. Oil 68 Amer. Ind. Oil 100 Amer. Ind. Oil 150 Amer. Ind. Oil 220
BP Oil Co. Turbinol T-68 Turbinol T-100 .... Energol HLP-HD 220
Chevron U.S.A., Inc. Hydraulic Oil AW 68 Machine Oil AW 100 Machine Oil AW 150 Machine Oil AW 220
Citgo Petroleum Corp. Citgo Pacemaker 68 Citgo Pacemaker 100 Citgo Pacemaker 150 Citgo Pacemaker 220
Conoco Inc. Dectol R & O Oil 68 Dectol R & O Oil 100 Dectol R & O Oil 150 Dectol R & O Oil 220
Exxon Co., U.S.A. Teresstic 68 Teresstic 100 Teresstic 150 Teresstic 220
Houghton International Inc. Hydro-Drive HP-300 Hydro-Drive HP-500 Hydro-Drive HP-750 Hydro-Drive HP-1000
Imperial Oil Ltd. Teresso 68 Teresso 100 Teresso 150 Teresso 220
Kendall Refining Co. Kenoil R & O AW 68 Kenoil R & O AW 100 Four Seasons AW 150 ....
Keystone Lubricants KLC-20 KLC-30 KLC-40 KLC-50
Lyondell Petrochemical (ARCO) Duro 68 Duro 100 Duro 150 Duro 220
Mobil Oil Corp. DTE Oil Heavy DTE Oil Heavy DTE Oil Extra Heavy DTE Oil BB
Petro-Canada Prod. Harmony 68 Harmony 100 Harmony 150 or 150D Harmony 220
Phillips 66 Co. Magnus Oil 68 Magnus Oil 100 Magnus Oil 150 Magnus Oil 220
Shell Oil Co. Turbo T68 Morlina 100 Morlina 150 Morlina 220
Shell Canada Ltd. Tellus 68 Tellus 100 Tellus 150 Tellus 220
Texaco Lubricants Regal Oil R & O 68 Regal Oil R & O 100 Regal Oil R & O 150 Regal Oil R & O 220
Unocal 76 (East) Unax RX 68 Unax RX 100 Unax RX 150 Unax RX 220
Unocal 76 (West) Turbine Oil 68 Turbine Oil 100 Turbine Oil 150 Turbine Oil 220
Valvoline Oil Co. Valvoline AW ISO 68 Valvoline AW ISO 100 Valvoline AW ISO 150 Valvoline AW ISO 220

568-110 Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA

December 2013 Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359
Supersedes 5-11 www.rexnord.com
 Falk Horizontal Shaft Backstops • Installation and Maintenance
Type NRT • Sizes 1075 thru 1185 (Page 11 of 11)

TABLE 12 — Greases for Grease Purged Outer Dismantling, Repair & Parts Replacement
Seals① (0° to 200°F (–18° to +93°C) WARNING: DO NOT attempt to service or remove
Manufacturer Lubricant backstop before removing load.
Amoco Oil Co. Amoco Rykon Premium Grease No. 2 An important part of the Falk NRT backstop manufacturing
Exxon Company, U.S.A. Unirex N2 process is the full load and overrunning testing with
E.F. Houghton & Co. Cosmolube 2 specially instrumented equipment. Consequently, return
Imperial Oil Ltd. Unirex N2L
NRT backstops to Rexnord for repair and full load testing.
Kendoll Refining Co. Multi-Purpose Lithium Grease L421
Shell Oil Co. Alvania Grease 2 Except for replacement of oil seals (Service Manual 568-
Shell Canada Limited Alvania Grease 2 130), NRT backstops should not be dismantled or repaired
Texaco Lubricants Marfak #2 in the field. If seals are to be replaced, it is important that
①① The option of adding grease is the purchaser’s. Adding grease to the the cam and roller assemblies not be removed from the
outer seal cavities is NOT RECOMMENDED if grease could contaminate
the material being processed as in the food and drug industries — use outer race. Removal will void applicable warranties.
food grade greases.
When writing to Rexnord Service Department concerning
required service, state nature of problem and give complete
Preventive Maintenance data from backstop nameplate: M.O. number, size, date, etc.
AFTER FIRST WEEK OF OPERATION — Drain lubricant
and flush with fresh lubricant by operating 5 to 10 minutes. Stored or Inactive Backstops
Drain again and fill with fresh, clean lubricant. Backstops are shipped WITHOUT LUBRICANT but do
LUBRICANT CHANGES — For normal operating conditions (8 contain one ounce of Motorstor② vapor phase rust
to 10 hours per day) with low dust or abrasive environment and inhibitor which will protect internal parts against rust for a
ambient temperatures less than 150°F (66°C), change lubricant period of up to six months.
every six months or 2500 hours, whichever occurs first. If the backstop is to be stored or inactive for more than six
For 24 hours per day operating conditions, change months, add the recommended amount of lubricant from
lubricants every three months of operation. Table 7, page 9, and add one ounce of Motorstor every
For operation in a dusty or abrasive environment, it may be additional six month period. Replace breather with pipe
necessary to change lubricant and flush every 300 hours. plug for extended storage.
Have a lubricant supplier test oil samples from the backstop Indoor dry storage is recommended. If outdoor storage is
periodically and recommend economical change periods based necessary, cover the backstop with a tarpaulin or suitable
on the rate of lubricant contamination and degradation. covering.
PURGING GREASE SEALS — Periodically, (at least at ②② Product of the Daubert Chemical Co., Chicago, IL.
every lubricant change) depending upon the frequency BEFORE PLACING BACKSTOP IN OPERATION — Drain
and degree of contamination, purge contaminated grease lubricant mixture and replace breather and oil sight gauge,
from outer grease purged seals. See instructions on page if removed. Flush backstop and refill with clean, fresh
9 for purging grease. lubricant per instructions above.
TORQUE ARM ALIGNMENT — Check alignment of the
torque arm whenever the lubricant is changed. Maintain
clearances between torque arm and support as specified in
the TORQUE ARM STOPS (OR STIRRUP) paragraph, page 2.

PART DESCRIPTIONS
1. End Cover 7. Roller Cage End Rings (2) 11. Optional Axial Retaining Collar 13. Roller Cage Fasteners
2. Gasket 8. Inner Cam 12. Stop Lug 14. Rotation Direction Plate
3. Bearing 9. Outer Race 15. End Cover Fasteners
4. Outer Seal 10. Labyrinth Shroud 13 16. Torque Arm
5. Inner Seal (Not available on all sizes) 17. Torque Arm Pin
6. Rollers
12
17
1 1 16
2
9 2
7 8 10 11
4 5 3 6 3 5 4
14

15
15

Rexnord, 3001 W. Canal St., Milwaukee, WI 53208-4200, USA 568-110

Telephone: 414-342-3131 Fax: 414-937-4359 December 2013
www.rexnord.com Supersedes 5-11